Wsp900 TLD Aug11 Water Truck

WSP-900
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-0-01

WSP-900
PAGE BLANK
0-0-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
CHAPTER 0
GENERAL
INFORMATIONS
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-0-03

WSP-900
PAGE BLANK
0-0-04 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
0-1-TLD – SALES INFORMATIONS

MARKETING, SALES DEPARTMENT AND AFTER SALES DEPARTMENT SPARE PARTS
DEPARTMENT - LOCATION IN THE WORLD.
INFORMATION, A QUESTION...
DON ' T HESITATE TO CONTACT US.
Fig 1 : Addresses
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-01

WSP-900
Quick Reference Address List

GROUP ASIA NORTH AMERICA SOUTH AMERICA
TLD Group TLD Asia - Thailand TLD America - Southwest TLD America - Brazil
Location : TLD GROUP Location : TLD TH (Thailand) Location : TLD America - Seguin Location : TLD BR (Brazil)
Region : EUROPE Region : ASIA Region : NORTH AMERICA Region : SOUTH AMERICA
Country : FRANCE City : Bangkok City : Seguin Country : BRAZIL
Telephone : +33 (0)1 56 34 10 40 Country : THAILAND State : Texas Postal Code : 04632-020
Fax : +33 (0)1 56 34 10 45 Postal Code : 10400 Country : UNITED STATES OF Telephone : + 55 (11) 5034 1355
Telephone : +66(2) 693 6308 AMERICA Fax : + 55 (11) 5034 9022
Fax : +66(2) 693 6309 Postal Code : 78155
Telephone : +1 (830) 379-1080 Steelbro Australia Pty Ltd
EUROPE TLD Asia - Shanghai Fax : +1 (830) 379-1080 Location : Australia
Location : TLD SHA (Shanghai) Region : Oceania
TLD Europe - Montlouis Facility Region : ASIA TLD ACE Country : Australia
Location : TLD MTL (Montlouis) City : Shanghai Location : TLD WIN (Windsor) Postal Code : 3026
Region : EUROPE Country : PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF Region : NORTH AMERICA Telephone : +61 3 9369 0888
City : Montlouis Sur Loire CHINA City : Windsor Fax : +61 3 9369 0999
Country : FRANCE Postal Code : 201321 State : Connecticut
Postal Code : 37270 Telephone : +86-21-58153322 Country : UNITED STATES OF TLD America - Latin America
Telephone : +33.(0)2.47.45.77.42 Fax : + 86-21-58152244 AMERICA Location : TLD America - Miami
Fax : +33.(0)2.47.45.16.11 Postal Code : 06095 Region : SOUTH AMERICA
TLD Asia - Taiwan Telephone : +1(860) 602-33-00 City : Miami
TLD Europe - St Lin Facility Location : TLD TW (Taiwan) Fax : +1(860) 688-77-73 State : Florida
Location : TLD STL (St Lin) Region : ASIA Country : UNITED STATES OF
Region : EUROPE State : Taiwan TLD America - Salinas AMERICA
City : St Lin Country : REPUBLIC OF CHINA Location : TLD America - Salinas Postal Code : 33178
Country : FRANCE Telephone : +886-3-4838450 Region : NORTH AMERICA Telephone : +1 (305) 716-1130
Postal Code : 79420 Fax : + 886-3-4838452 City : Salinas Fax : +1 (305) 716-1178
Telephone : + 33 (0) 5 49 95 73 00 State : California
Fax : + 33 (0)5 49 70 61 37 TLD Asia - Singapore Pte Ltd Country : UNITED STATES OF
Location : TLD SG (Singapore) AMERICA
TLD Europe - Parts Region : ASIA Postal Code : 93901
Location : Montlouis - Parts Country : SINGAPORE Telephone : +1 (831) 754-6221
Region : EUROPE Postal Code : 389834 Fax : +1 (831) 754-0766
City : Montlouis Sur Loire Telephone : + (65) 6744-1539
Country : FRANCE Fax : + (65) 6746-5697 TLD America - Central US
Postal Code : 37270 Location : TLD America - Dallas
Telephone : +33.(0)2.47.45.77.42 TLD Asia - Hong Kong Region : NORTH AMERICA
Fax : +33.(0)2.47.45.16.11 Location : TLD ASI State : Texas
Region : ASIA Country : UNITED STATES OF
TLD Europe - Rungis - Sales and City : Hong Kong AMERICA
Service State : New Territories Postal Code : 75244
Location : TLD EUR Country : HONG KONG SAR Telephone : +1 (972) 490-4538
Region : EUROPE Telephone : + (852) 26922181 Fax : +1 (972) 490-4539
City : Rungis Fax : + (852) 26912604
Country : FRANCE TLD America - New York
Postal Code : 94633 Location : TLD America - New York
Telephone : +33.(0)1.45.60.71.40 Region : NORTH AMERICA
Fax : +33.(0)1.45.60.57.00 Town : Floral Park
City : New York City
State : New York
Country : UNITED STATES OF
AMERICA
Postal Code : 11001
Telephone : +1 (516) 352-0303
Fax : +1 (516) 352-0408
TLD Canada
Location : TLD SHE (Sherbrooke)
Region : NORTH AMERICA
City : Sherbrooke
State : Quebec
Country : CANADA
Postal Code : J1K 3C3
Telephone : +1 (819) 566-8118
Fax : +1 (819) 566-1199
TLD America - Windsor

Location : TLD AME
Region : NORTH AMERICA
City : WINDSOR
State : Connecticut
Country : UNITED STATES OF
AMERICA
Postal Code : 06095
Telephone : +1(860) 602-34-00
Fax : +1(860) 688-78-95 (Sales and
Service)
Table 1 : Addresses
0-1-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
0-1-1-1-PURPOSE
NOTICE
SOME ILLUSTRATIONS IN THIS MANUAL MAY SHOW VEHICLES WITH OPTIONAL.
EQUIPMENT THAT MAY BE PURCHASED FROM YOUR LOCAL DEALER.
SOME PICTURES IN THIS MANUAL MAY BE TAKEN OF PROTOTYPE MODELS
PRODUCTION MODELS MAY DIFFER IN SOME DETAILS.
Continuing improvement and advancement of product design may cause changes to the model group
which may not be included in this publication.
Each publication is reviewed and revised, as required, to update and include the changes in later
additions.
We reserve the right to modify or make changes within a specific model group without notice and without
incurring any liability to retrofit vehicles previously shipped from the factory.
Contact your TLD dealer for maintenance that is not covered in this publication.
0-1-1-2-ABBREVIATIONS
blank
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-03

WSP-900
1. This manual covers operation and maintenance information for towbarless vehicles. It should be used
as a guide for operators and maintenance personnel to use and care of this equipment. This manual
should be read before attempting to operate or repair this equipment.
2. At the beginning of the manual, you will find a title page, record of revisions, list of effective pages, and
an alphabetical index.
• The title page identifies the unit by model, specification, and serial number.
• The Record of Revisions page lists all revisions of the manual in chronological order, and assigns
a number to each revision.
• The alphabetical index lists components and their corresponding page number in the manual
alphabetically.
The manual has five chapters:
Chapter 0 Information.
Chapter 1 General information and operating instruction.
Chapter 2 Maintenance.
Chapter 3 Repair manual.
Chapter 4 Spare parts.
Chapter 5 Manufacturer’s Literature.
3. This manual follows the guidelines set forth in Air Transport Association
specification No. 101 (ATA 101) , and SAE ARP5916 and SAE AS4828 specification.
Arrangement of information corresponds to this standard.
Page numbers run consecutively within each chapter. Pages are identified in the bottom of each page with
chapter number, section number, page number within that section, and the date of publication or revision.
Example:
0-0-04 Créaion 07.16 - 2007

th
This page is identify as chapter 0, section 0, page 12, published the 16 Jy 2007.
0-1-04 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
0-1-1-3-MANUAL UPDATE
The information contained in this document was the latest valid data when the equipment was shipped.
This Manual may have been updated or modified since that. To get the most recent information we
recommend the operator to consult the TLD Website where data are available for download.
0-1-1-4-TLD WEBSITE ACCESS:

Introduction
To access the TLD Extranet Website you must possess a username and password. If you have not
already been issued with a username and password then please contact your local TLD representative.
Login Page
To login to TLD Extranet, open a web browser and navigate to the following address:
https://www.tld-gse.com/extranet
Once at the login page, type your username and password into the appropriate fields and click on the
Login button. If the login is successful, you will be redirected to an agreement page.
Fig 2 : Login
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-05

WSP-900
If you agree to the terms and conditions, as described on the agreement page, click the “Agree” link to
continue, otherwise hit the “I DO NOT AGREE” link to exit the system.
Fig 3 : Accepter
Extranet Homepage
Once logged into Extranet, you will be presented with the main homepage. Here you will see some
information about your account and information about your TLD representatives.
Fig 4 : Homepage
0-1-06 Creation : 07.16 – 2007
WSP-900
Equipment/Parts
The Equipment/Parts section provides access to equipment records, spare parts and other technical
information related to equipment belonging to you.
Fig 5 : Spare part access

For more information about the other section refer to “TLD Extranet User’s Guide”.
This manual can be requested to your local TLD representative or download on web site.
Fig 6 : Download on web site
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-07

WSP-900
Searching For Equipment
There are three methods of viewing equipment. You can find spare parts either using the unit’s serial
number, or using your asset number or simply listing all equipment on one page.
• To find by serial number, enter the TLD Equipment Serial Number into the first field and hit the
find button.
• To find by asset number, enter you asset number into the second field and hit the find button.
• To display a list of all your equipment, hit the last find button on the page.
Fig 7 : Look for vehicle
0-1-08 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
Example of Equipment List
The example below shows a list of equipment found. A similar list will be shown which ever method you
use to search for equipment.
Fig 8 : Vehicle list example

To get information regarding a particular part, hit the “magnifying glass” icon on the row that the
equipment appears on.
Fig 9 : Vehicle choice
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-09

WSP-900
Fig 10 : Indentify a vehicle

Click on Pubs and Parts section to access to Manual section.
Fig 11 : Section "Pubs and Parts"

For further information refer to “TLD Extranet User’s Guide”.
This manual can be requested to your local TLD representative or download.
0-1-010 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
Online Manuals
In an effort to provide customers with efficient access to technical information for equipment, all manuals
are created and provided online. Each manual consists of ‘documents’ and there are two types of
documents: parts diagrams and manual sections. The uses of and differences between both are
explained below.
Following picture is an example of an online manual. The online manual index page is made up of three
sections: the search form at the top, the header information in the middle and the document list at the
bottom.
When first viewing a manual, all documents related to the manual appear in the document list at the
bottom of the page.
Fig 12 : Vehicle documentation

If you perform a search, within the manual, to find a particular part number, then the document list will only
show those documents found to contain the part number searched for and the words “Filtered documents
containing search item 'xxxx'” will appear on the page. To return to the complete manual, hit the Reset
button at the top of the manual.
Fig 13 : Filtered search
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-011

WSP-900
Manual Sections
A manual section consists of a document, in PDF format, and header information describing the
document. Manual sections, and typically all manual information except for parts information e.g.
maintenance and operation information. An example manual section is shown below. To view the PDF
file, click on the PDF icon . You will need a PDF file reader in order to view these documents.
Fig 14 : Download a PDF file
Fig 15 : PDF file
0-1-012 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
Parts Diagrams
Parts diagrams are made up of a picture, typically an engineering drawing, of the part or assembly with a
list detailing the parts in the drawing. An example of a parts diagram is given below. The layout is similar
to a manual section except that the attachment is now a JPG picture and there is a list of parts at the
bottom of the page. To view the picture, click on the picture icon and a new window will open with
the picture.
Fig 16 : Sparepart page
Fig 17 : Picture
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-013

WSP-900
If your account has been setup for online parts ordering you will be able to select items from manuals for
purchase and add them to your online cart. To order a part enter the required quantity into the Qty field of
the part you would like.
Fig 18 : Enter the quantity

And hit the Add Items with Quantities to Cart button. Any parts with a value in their Qty fields will be added
to your online cart.
Fig 19 : Validate
0-1-014 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
Fig 20 : Cart
With Edit/Empty/Check Out menu you can rectify, modify or validate your choice.
For more information about the other section refer to “TLD Extranet User’s Guide”.
This manual can be requested to your local TLD representative or downloaded on web site.
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-015

WSP-900
PAGE BLANK
0-1-016 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
0-2-GENERAL WARRANTY CONDITIONS

This document presents the warranty conditions offered to any customer for all the pieces of equipments manufactured in the TLD
facilities and sold to him through the authorized TLD Sales and Service network.
The general warranty conditions hereunder described do govern the relationship between final customer of a TLD product, hereunder
called « the buyer » and TLD factory, called « the manufacturer », following the sales of new product manufactured by TLD, through
an authorized TLD Sales and Service organization of TLD Group, called « the seller », i.e. TLD Europe (Headquarters in France),
TLD.
America (Headquarters in Connecticut, USA) or TLD Asia (Headquarters in Hong Kong), or any other subsidiary or any other
authorized distributor.
The fact that the buyer places an order of a TLD product means that he has read the present policy and does accept its provision.
Any other general or particular provision, that differs from or contradicts one of the general or particular conditions described
hereafter which may appear in any document from the buyer and especially in its general purchasing conditions, cannot be used
against the manufacturer unless accepted by TLD in a written agreement.
ARTICLE 1:
TLD warrants that each new item of equipment is of good workmanship and is free from mechanical defects provided that:
1) The product is installed and operated in accordance with printed TLD Equipment’s instructions.
2) The product is used under normal operating conditions, for which it is designed,
3) The product is not subject to misuse, negligence or accident,
4) The product receives proper care, lubrication, protection and maintenance under the supervision of trained personnel,
5) The product is normally protected from exterior aggressions whatever their origin.
ARTICLE 2:
This warranty expires, unless otherwise agreed by TLD in a special provision, 27 months after shipment by the manufacturer, or 24
months after being placed in service, or after 2000 operating hours if the main engine of the unit is under 50KW or 3000 operating
hours if main engine of the unit is above 50KW, whichever first occurs.
ARTICLE 3:
The TLD Warranty is strictly limited to the replacement of defective parts and if the repair does justify it, to the assistance of a
technician.
Parts shipping expenses and traveling and housing expenses of personnel are to be paid by customer.
ARTICLE 4:
The TLD Warranty does not apply to fluids, oils, fuses, bulbs, accumulators, paint, seals, tires, bumpers, pads and other
consumables or normally wearing type items unless found to be defective prior to use.
ARTICLE 5:
All warranty claims from the Buyer must be sent by written to Seller who will be in charge of dealing with the Manufacturer to address
the problem in a timely manner.
ARTICLE 6:
All the expenses related to a warranty claim will be invoiced to the buyer until TLD employees have evaluated the claim. Whatever
the circumstances, the buyer should not refuse or delay the payment. If the evaluation concludes to TLD’s full responsibility, a credit
memo will be issued in favor of the buyer.
Under no circumstance other than those accepted by TLD, the buyer of the defective parts at the manufacturer address can accept
without a formal letter from the buyer and without the effective return no warranty claim.
ARTICLE 7:
This warranty is extended by TLD only to the buyer of new products from TLD or of its authorized distributors. The products
purchased under this warranty are intended for use exclusively by the buyer and his employees and by no other person. Therefore,
there shall be no third party beneficiary of this warranty.
ARTICLE 8:
This warranty does only apply to the primeval reason. In other words, the consequences on the product linked to its use after first
problem are not covered by this warranty.
ARTICLE 9:
Under no circumstances whatever shall TLD and the seller be liable for any special or consequential damages, whether based on
lost goodwill, lost resale profits, work stoppage, impairment of other goods or otherwise, and whether arising out of breach of any
express or implied warranty, breach of contract, negligence or otherwise, except only in the case of personal injury as may be
required by applicable law
ARTICLE 10:
The warranty is automatically void by TLD in the following cases:
1) The product has received some modification, not advised by TLD or not done following TLD requirements
2) Some original parts have been replaced by parts not provided by TLD.
ARTICLE 11:
This warranty and all undertaking of TLD shall be governed by the laws of manufacturer’s country and discussed in front of nearest
court from the manufacturer’s facility even in case of multiple of defenders.
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-2-01

WSP-900
PAGE BLANK
0-2-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
0-3-SAFETY REGULATIONS
Read this entire chapter BEFORE attempting to operate this

vehicle
0-3-1-1- GENERAL WARNING
FOREWORD
This instruction manual is intended for all users of the machine: the company manager, the Department
Head, the driver, as well as the whole personnel who work with or near to the equipment.
GENERAL WARNING:
1 - Before using the machine, go through this manual and comply with all its instructions.
2 - Also carefully read the instructions that appear on the plates fixed onto the machine and keep them
readable.
3 - Keep this instruction manual at the disposal of all operators.
4 - Make sure that any person to whom you entrust the machine is qualified to fulfill the safety
requirements linked to its use.
5 - Avoid unsupervised interventions on your equipment when not being used.
6 - Never use a machine which does not look to be in good condition.
7 - Never apply a load or a stress exceeding the maximum operating load of the machine.
8 - Never use the machine for an operation it is not designed to perform.
9 - Become thoroughly familiar with the safety regulations applicable to the machine and enforce them
scrupulously.
10 - The manufacturer declines his responsibility for the consequences of a disassembly of the
machine or any modification made without his supervision.
0-3-1-2-OBLIGATION TO GO THROUGH THE USER'S MANUAL

The company manager is compelled to make the operators fully acquainted with the regulations of the
instruction manual.
The company manager is responsible for the enforcement of the applicable “user’s regulation”.
The user must imperatively read and assimilate this instruction manual in order to be able to comply with
it during start- up and use.
The instruction manual must be kept during the life- span of the machine, including in the event of a
resale, of a change of user or manager.
The instruction manual is not a training manual but it specifies, when required, if training is necessary.
Fig 21 : Read documentation
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-3-01

WSP-900
0-3-1-3-GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
The company manager must ensure that the machine is delivered with the instruction manual (and the
certificate of conformity for European community members).
* The location of the instruction manual is specified on the dispatch note when leaving the factory.
* The certificate of conformity is placed with the dispatch note.
Only trained and qualified operators with appropriate driving license and accredited by the company
manager may operate the vehicle within the scope of the use for which it has been designed.
The vehicle may only be used in accordance with the conditions established by the manufacturer in this
instruction manual and declines his responsibly.
Any use that does not comply with the regulations of this instruction manual might cause risks of injury to
people, property and the environment; it would decline the manufacturer responsibility.
The manufacturer’s responsibility is limited to the assembly configuration of the equipment as described
in the certificate of conformity.
Before each use, the driver should check that the machine is in good condition.
It is forbidden to use the vehicle if there is no regular marks or if they are not visible.
0-3-1-4- MODIFICATIONS – ADDITIONS

The manufacturer is not responsible in case of any modification, addition or combination with equipment
from another origin.
The manufacturer declines any responsibility for consequences resulting from changes in the
characteristics or modifications made without his written consent, and concerning either the mechanical,
electrical, hydraulic part or the mechanically welded structure.
If the client wants a modification to be made, he must imperatively consult the manufacturer.
All modification or add-on must be approved and verified before to be back in service as country
regulation specification (France: art 20-b – 9 June 1993).
For your safety and in order to benefit from the total guarantee of the manufacturer, you must only use
guaranteed genuine spare parts.
NOTE :
THE SECURITY IS IMPORTANT AS HUMAN AND ECONOMICAL VIEW, AND THIS REFLECTS
ITSELF IN THE CONSCIENCE BY THE NEED TO PROMOTE THE SECURITY.
TLD IS CONSCIOUS OF THIS SECURITY NEED THEREFORE IT WAS THINKING ABOUT IT IN
THE CONCEPTION OF YOUR VEHICLE.
YOU HAVE ALSO THIS RESPONSIBILITY TO ASSUME.
YOUR SECURITY AND THE ONE OF THE OTHERS DEPEND ON YOUR COMPETENCE AND, IN
PARTICULAR, OF YOUR COMPREHENSION AND OF YOUR WILL TO FOLLOW THE SIMPLE
RULES HEREAFTER.
REMEMBER THAT A CAREFUL DRIVER NOT ONLY PROTECTS HIMSELF, BUT ALSO OTHER
PEOPLE WITH WHOM HE WORKS; AT THE SAME TIME, HE AVOIDS DANGERS WHICH
COULD DAMAGE THE VEHICLE AND THE AIRCRAFTS BEING TOWED.
0-3-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
0-3-1-5-SAFETY INFORMATION
This manual provides important information to familiarize you with safe operating and maintenance
procedures for the vehicle.
Even though you may be familiar with similar equipment, you must read and understand this manual
before operating this vehicle. Safety is everyone's business and must be one of your primary concerns
Knowing the guidelines covered in this manual will help you to provide your safety, safety of those around
you, and machine's proper operation.
KNOW how to safely use the vehicle's controls and what you must do for safe maintenance.
ALWAYS wear or use the proper safety items required for you personal protection.
If you have ANY QUESTION about the safe use or maintenance of this vehicle ASK YOU SUPERVISOR -
NEVER GUESS - ALWAYS CHECK!
CAUTION
SOME PICTURES IN THIS MANUAL MAY SHOW GUARDS OR COVERS REMOVED FOR
PURPOSES OF CLARITY.
NEVER OPERATE UNIT WITHOUT ALL GUARDS AND COVERS IN PLACE.
THROUGHOUT THIS MANUAL, WARNING, CAUTION AND NOTES ARE GIVEN BY FOLLOWING
GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS.
CLOSELY READ IT, PAY ATTENTION TO NOTES AND FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS.
WARNING :
WARNING SAFETY NOTES MUST BE FOLLOWED
YOUR MISTAKE MIGHT RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURIES OR DEATH TO YOURSELF OR OTHERS.
CAUTION :
CAUTION SAFETY NOTES ARE ALSO VERY IMPORTANT
THEY POINT OUT WHERE YOUR MISTAKES COULD CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE MACHINE.
PLEASE NOTE: NOTICE IS USED TO NOTIFY PEOPLE OF INSTALLATION, OPERATION, OR

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION WHICH IS IMPORTANT BUT NOT HAZARD- RELATED.
READ WITH CARE: Refers to a chapter or a procedure

to read.
WARNING: Relative indications to security must be
respected.
A negligence of your share can involve serious wounds
or death.
CAUTION:
Indications relating to precautions about security are
also important. They inform you from possible errors
which can to damage the machine.
NOTE: The note provides information to personnel of
exploitation and maintenance, certainly important but
which does not relate to security.
ENVIRONMENT: Texts located by this symbol give
important indications on protection of environment.
Pollution risk
INFORMATION NOTE: Only provide informations or
remarks.
Table 2 : Standard caution
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-3-03

WSP-900
0-3-1-6-SECURITY COLOURS AND LABELLING
In an effort to reduce the number of accidents due to transportation of men and materials, the International
organization of Normalization (ISO) has defined a security code using colors and geometric forms.
In operation you can find some signalization panels, advertisements, etc…

For this reason, we recall you the meaning of colors and geometric forms used.
COLOR SYMBOL MEANING USING

Compulsory stop
RED harmful activity Stop signals
Interdiction. Equipment against fire and his location
Urgency stop device.
YELLOW - Carefulness Danger advertisement

ORANGE Warning Caution signals.
Advertisement.
GREEN Security Emergency exit and refuges

Signals "free " or "go" for the persons and
vehicles.
WHITE Information
Table 3 : Color and symbols

AUXILIARY COLOUR
Blue can be used as signalization color for organization needs, consignees or information.
0-3-04 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
DANGER: Indicate a general danger.
DANGER: Indicate a danger related to acid (batteries, for

example).
DANGER: Indicate a risk of explosion.
DANGER: Indicate a danger of inflammability.
DANGER: Indicate a danger of electrocution.
DANGER: Indicate a danger related to flammable

material.
DANGER: Indicate a danger related to toxic material.
DANGER: Indicate a danger with laser’s beam emissions.
DANGER: Indicate a danger of wound by a mechanism.
DANGER: Indicate a danger of asphyxiation.
DANGER: Indicate a danger of crushing.
DANGER: Indicate a danger of falling.
DANGER: Indicate a danger caused by batteries.
DANGER: Indicate a danger of burning.
PROHIBITION: Indicate operations or all other actions

which it is strictly forbidden to do.
PROHIBITION: forbidden to smoke.
PROHIBITION: forbidden to make fire. Avoid the formation

of sparks.
PROHIBITION: forbidden to extinguish fire with water.
PROHIBITION: forbidden to touch.
PROHIBITION: forbidden access.
OBLIGATION: Indicate an obligation.
OBLIGATION: Indicate that it is obligatory to wear safety

goggles.
OBLIGATION: Indicate that it is obligatory to wear
protection helmet.
OBLIGATION: Indicate that it is obligatory to wear anti-
noise protections.
protection shoes.
protective gloves.
protective clothing.
Table 4 : Danger symbols
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-3-05

WSP-900
0-3-1-7-PRE- START
Read this entire chapter BEFORE attempting to operate this vehicle.
- Driving this vehicle is prohibited to unauthorized people.
- Be familiar with the controls and their functions before you start the vehicle.
- INSPECT your machine by doing a pre- operational inspection.
- Observe the limits on weight of the loads to be towed and unladen weight of the vehicle.
- Follow the manufacturer's instructions for regular maintenance.
- Have any broken or missing parts, corrected or replaced before use.
- Check that all maintenance has been performed.
- Check that all instructions and safety labels are in a place and readable.
These are as important as any other equipment on the vehicle.
0-3-1-8-BEFORE USING THE EQUIPMENT
BEFORE USING THE EQUIPMENT, THE OPERATOR SHOULD CAREFULLY READ THE
INSTRUCTION IN THIS SECTION, AND BECOME FAMILIAR WITH THE TOW VEHICLE'S CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS.
Make a pre-start check operation as described in ‘Workshop manual»: Daily check.
0-3-06 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
0-3-1-9-GENERAL SAFETY RULES AND RECOMMENDATION
1-3-1.9.1.DRIVING
Safety is an important factor, which has effects on your unit’s life. DO NOT FORGET that a safe driver
protects not only himself but also other people working around and in the meantime can avoid risks
leading to damaging the unit.
- Non authorized personnel are not allowed to drive this unit;
- Always consider load limit;
- Make sure the unit is driven on roads in accordance with the unit’s size;
- Driving speed must be compatible with ground/road conditions; Avoid cracked or damaged roads;
- Slow down in turns;
- Be attentive to pedestrians and do not follow other vehicles too closely;
- Avoid sudden and long use braking; engage the parking brake only when the unit has come to a
complete stop;
- Do not park in front of flush-hydrant;
- Do not get too close to obstacles;
- If the operator notices a mechanical, electrical or hydraulic issue, he must report to the people in charge
of the unit’s maintenance;
- Always follow daily and regular maintenance recommendation;
- The unit’s max speed is 25 km/h, this speed is not the normal driving condition of the unit. IT is
recommended to slow down when approaching an aircraft, or around other personnel. The speed should
be selected in accordance with the environment;
- Do not drive with passengers riding on the vehicle;
- Prior to using the unit, the operator must ensure that all operating and driving commands and emergency
stops works properly. He must ensure no parts are damaged or not safe;
- Stop the unit if a pedestrian could be hurt;
- Before starting the unit, make sure no personnel or obstacles stand on your path;
- Extra safety is required when working on a narrow or congested road or with bad visibility;
- Always look around before turning;
- During operations, observe all applicable regulations;
- Towing speed must be chosen in accordance with ground/road condition and load limits;
- Shift to neutral only when the unit has come to a complete stop;
- Hold the driving wheel firmly when driving;
- Do not pass other vehicles at crossroads or if visibility is bad;
- Drive slowly and pay attention to pedestrians, other vehicles and heights; if the unit is not equipped with
a rear-view camera or if visibility is bad, have someone help you. Check your mirrors especially when
backing up;
- Slow down on wet, snowy, icy or irregular ground/road and in turns;
- De-ice and clear of snow before using unit with appropriate tool;
- Remove any obstacles on your path;
- At crossings, in corridors, always slow down and make sure you are located on the correct side of the
road;
- Pay attention to pedestrians who can appear suddenly from a masked corner;
- Always look in the driving direction;
- Always adapt your speed to the load, the slope and the turning radius;
- Be carefull of retardation strength because of water on tank sides, during braking or turning, what can involve
suddenly path alteration;
- Do not use the unit in a closed place (exhaust gas).
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-3-07

WSP-900
1-3-1.9.2.UTILIZATION
- Prior to any operation, the operator must ensure that no personnel is riding on the unit;
- Before operations on the aircraft, make sure that aircraft’s reactors are not running;
- Respect the load: 200 daN [440 Lbs] or 1 person in the basket;
- Be extra careful when approaching the aircraft: slow down, leave a correct safety distance between the
unit and the aircraft to avoid damaging the latter;
- The owner of the equipment has to provide their maintenance people and their operators the right
equipment/accessibility to have a good and safe access to all components of the equipment;
- It is forbidden to get inside tank;
- It is forbidden to get under the raised basket;
- It is forbidden to move the unit with the basket raised;
- It is forbidden to transport personnel in the basket;
- It is forbidden to neutralize any safety devices;
- It is forbidden to move the unit with personnel at close distance;
- It is forbidden to use the unit with wind speed over 90 km/h [56 mph];
- It is forbidden to use the unit in slope superior than 5%;
- It is forbidden to use the lift for other purposes than instructions in this manual;
- It is forbidden to defrost with an open flame;
- It is forbidden to use the material intended for the drinking water supply for the draining of the toilets of
the plane;
- It is forbidden that the personnel carrying out of the operations on the level of the vacuum toilet handles
the material in relation to drinking water;
- It is forbidden to tow other units;
1-3-1.9.3.INFORMATION
- If an emergency stop is pressed during driving operations, braking and steering assistance are lost;
- The emergency platform lowering operation must be done with the help of another operator;
- Any aircraft damage must be reported to a competent authority.
- The personnel charged with the drinking water supply must wear clean working clotheses, of grease,
dust, and stains.
- The vehicle must remain clean and storage must be done in a area where it cannot be contaminated.
- It is imperative to control that the procedures of disinfection and cleaning are carried out regularly in
accordance with the regulation.
1-3-1.9.4.MAINTENANCE
- Maintenance operations must be done by qualified personnel, with the appropriate formation and tools;
- Before any operation, make sure any potential energy is null, that tank are empty and clean;
- Install a danger area when maintaining and remove the keys from the ignition;
- Only maintenance personnel is allowed to get inside tank for inspection or cleaning operation after
making sure they are correctly vented and that there are no hazardous and noxious gas. These
operations must be supervised by another operator outside of tank.
- the process of cleaning and disinfection of tank must be adapted to the outside temperatures, at the
utilisation ratios of the vehicle.
1-3-1.9.5.CURRENT REGULATION
Comply with the current and local regulation concerning:

- Products to use (disinfectant, etc.)
- protection (helmets, gloves, googles, etc.);
- waste draining;
- sanitary recommendations for tank cleaning;
- Products utilization warning (cleaning, fuels, etc.);
- Disinfecting to use in order to maintain a drinking water inside the tank.
0-3-08 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
1-3-1.9.1.ENGINE
Safety precautions
These safety precautions are important

You must refer also to the local regulations in the country of use. Some items only apply to specific
applications.
o Do not change the specification of the engine

o Do not smoke when you put fuel in the tank. Clean away fuel, witch has been spilt. Material, which
has been contaminated by fuel, must be moved to a safe place
o Do not clean, add lubricating oil, put fuel in the tank or adjust the engine while it runs.
o Do not make adjustments that you do not understand
o Ensure that the engine does not run in a location where it can cause a concentration of toxic
emissions
o Others persons must be kept at a safe distance while the engine or auxiliary equipment is in
operation
o Do not permit loose clothing or long hair near moving parts
o Keep away from moving parts during engine operation
o Warning! Some moving parts cannot be seen clearly while the engine runs
o Do not operate the engine if a safety guard has been removed
o Do not remove the filler cap or any component of the cooling system while the engine is hot and
while the coolant is under pressure, because dangerous hot coolant can be discharged
o Do not allow sparks or fire near the batteries (especially when the batteries are on charge)
because the gases from the electrolyte are highly flammable. The battery fluid is dangerous to the
skin and especially to the eyes.
o Disconnect the battery terminals before a repair is made to the electrical system
o Only one person must control the engine
o Ensure that the engine is operated only from the control panel or from the operator’s position
o If your skin comes into contact with high pressure fuel, obtain medical assistance immediately
o Diesel fuel and lubricating oil (especially used lubricating oil) can damage the skin of certain
persons. Protect your hands with gloves or a special solution to protect the skin
o Do not wear clothing which, is contaminated by lubricating oil. Do not put material, which is
contaminated with oil into the pockets of clothing
o Discard used lubricating oil in accordance with local regulations to prevent contamination
o The combustible material of some components of the engine (for example some seals) can
become extremely dangerous if it is burned. Never allow this burnt material to come into contact
with the skin or with the eyes.
o Ensure that the control lever of the transmission drive is in the “out of drive” position before the
engine is started
o Use extreme care if emergency repairs must be made in adverse conditions.
o Do not allow compressed air to contact your skin. If compressed air enters your skin, obtain
medical help immediately
o Caution: do not clean an engine while it runs. If cold cleaning fluids are applied to a hot engine,
certain components on the engine may be damaged.
Fit only genuine parts
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-3-09

WSP-900
1-3-1.9.2.CAB
- Do not start the engine or operate any levers or pedals from outside the operator's compartment to keep
the machine from hitting you or other person.
- Never climb onto, or get out of the machine while it is in motion.
- Never let arm or body part pass outside the driving post during using.
WARNING
IF CAB HAVE DOORS : IT ' S FORBIDDEN TO DRIVE WITH THE DOOR OPENED
WARNING
THE WEAR OF THE SAFETY BELT IS COMPULSORY
WARNING
GENERALLY THE VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITHOUT DOOR ARE EQUIPPED WITH SAFETY CHAINS
THESE SAFETY CHAINS MUST BE CLOSED WHEN TRAVELLING, TO AVOID FALLING ON THE
SIDE
WARNING
NEVER CLIMB ONTO, OR GET OUT OF THE MACHINE WHILE IT IS MOTION OR OPERATE THE
VEHICLE WITH ANY PART OF YOUR BODY OUTSIDE OF THE OPERATOR'S COMPARTMENT
GENERAL WARNING
NEVER LET A PART OF YOUR BODY IN A MOTION MECHANISM, AND NEVER START A
VEHICULE WHEN SOMEBODY MAKES SERVICING OPERATION ON IT. AN LOSE OF CAUTION
CAN CAUSE FATAL INJURIES.
0-3-1-10-DASHBOARD
- Always pay special attention to red warning lights signals and beeper on the instrument panel.
- If problems or equipment malfunctions occurred while operating the vehicle, it must be properly shut
down and the problem corrected.
- Continuing to use malfunctioning equipment can not be safe for the operator and other personnel, but
can lead to further damage to the vehicle as well.
0-3-1-11-STOPPING
- DO NOT leave the driver's cab with the vehicle running.
- ALWAYS properly shut down the vehicle before leaving the vehicle.
- ALWAYS park the vehicle on solid, level ground.
On severe slopes ALWAYS park the vehicle perpendicular to the steepest slope to prevent accidental
motion.
- Use proper flags, warnings or barriers when parking in traffic areas.
- Do not park your vehicle in such a way as to obstruct fire brigade access points.
- Never park your vehicle or leave towed equipment (aircraft, trail...) in front of fire equipment, an
emergency issue or all other place where it could constitute an obstacle or a danger.
- During parking, use the parking brake and put the contact to key on the STOP position.
- If the vehicle must be leaves with nobody for watch on it, remove the ignition key.
- Never release towed equipment (aircraft, trail...) with the equipment parking brake unapplied or the
wheels unchoked.
- Never park your vehicle on a slope.
- If it is necessary to park vehicle on a slope (breakdown etc), chock the vehicle wheels.
0-3-010 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
0-3-1-12-MAINTENANCE
AVOID, whenever possible, servicing, cleaning or examining the machine in congested areas.
Avoid, whenever possible, servicing or providing maintenance to the vehicle unless the wheels are well
choked to prevent accidental movement of the vehicle.
- To carry out work behind the wheels, switch off the engine.
- Never attempt to repairs yourself if you are not authorized and if you are not qualified.
- Never does maintenance work without referring to the maintenance manual and the driving notice.
- Never assemble other pieces that the ones provided by TLD and never modify equipment existing: the
mounting of other pieces than TLD ones or equipment existing modification without authorization of the
manufacturer could make a dangerous vehicle and cancel the guarantee covering this one.
DANGER: ASPHYXIA
IN EVENT OF PROLONGED USE IN A CLOSED/NO AERATED PLACE, (IN A WORKSHOP...) WITH
ENGINE, THINK ABOUT EXHAUST GAZ EVACUATION.
1-3-1.12.1.ELECTRICITY
DO NOT alter the electrical or hydraulic settings from that indicated in the manual or as set at the factory.
DISCONNECT the batteries when possible while working on electrical systems to prevent short circuits.
Also, disconnecting the batteries when working around the engine can help preventing accidental engine
starting.
- Doesn’t verify batteries condition next to a bare flame, particularly during the battery charging.
1-3-1.12.2.WELDING
Before any welding on a TLD vehicle it is IMPERATIVE to respect the following instructions :
- to get information and respect the legislation in force of the country of use;
- any impacted modification being able resistance structural of the equipment must be submitted
beforehand for approval of TLD;
- welding must be carried out by qualified personnel;
After having respected these instructions, to disconnect the batteries and to disconnect any significant
equipment (electronic charts, ...).
CAUTION
IF ANYONE IS WELDING OR GRINDING ON THE GALVANIZED BASES SAFETY GLASSES
AND A DUST FILTRATION MASK MUST BE WORN TO PREVENT EXPOSURE TO FUMES
AND DUST.
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-3-011

WSP-900
1-3-1.12.3. SERVICING OPERATION ON SCAFFOLDING OR ON SECURITY GUARD

(IN HEIGHT)
Fig 22 : Scaffolding
The vehicles can require servicing operations in height to reach the top of the vehicle, so using scaffolding
or security guard on each side of the vehicle is necessary to avoid falling risk. Respect regulations and
norms for servicing operation in height.
Also respect recommendations and safety measures necessary by the regulation for such operations in
this condition.
0-3-1-13-HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT
1- Hydraulic equipment is standing under high pressure.
WARNING
FLUIDS (FUEL, HYDRAULIC OIL) WHICH ESCAPE UNDER HIGH PRESSURE CAN PENETRATE
THE SKIN AND CAUSE HEAVY INJURIES. THEREFORE IMMEDIATELY CONSULT A DOCTOR AS
OTHERWISE SERIOUS INFECTIONS CAN BE CAUSED.
2- When searching leakage use appropriate auxiliary devices because of the danger of accidents.
3- Before working on hydraulic equipment, lower pressure to zero and lower platform of the machine.
4- When working on hydraulic equipment, absolutely stop motor and secure machine against rolling away
(parking brake, shim).
5- When connecting hydraulic cylinders and motor pay attention to correct connection of hydraulic flexible
hoses.
6- In case of exchanging the ports, the functions are vice versa (f ex Lift-up/lower) - risk of accidents.
7- Check hydraulic flexible hoses regularly and replace them in case of damage or wear! The new hose
pipes must comply with the technical requirements of the machine manufacturer.
ORDERLY DISPOSAL OR RECYCLING OF OIL, FUEL AND FILTERS!
0-3-1-14-ACCIDENTS
- Immediately advise any incident to your superior.
- NEVER neglect an injury even if it appears insignificant, go immediately to the infirmary for medical
treatment, to avoid complications.
0-3-012 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
AREA RISK SAFETY STEPS
CAUSES OF FAILURE WHAT CAN HAPPEN IF HOW TO PREVENT THE FAILURE

PRECAUTIONS AND
SAFEGUARDS ARE NOT
OBEYED
ENTIRE MACHINE A moving vehicle can run over or crush Keep away all people from around vehicle
body parts between vehicle and other and always switch off the engine before
object and cause irreparable injury or leaving the driver's cab
death
DRIVING STATION Personnel injuries may happen if parts of Keep head, arms, hands, legs and feet
the body or members (hands, legs, ect) inside the operator's compartment at all time
are outside of the driver's cab
Unit lifted for service could fall and injure If vehicle must be lifted for service, it must
UNDERNEATH / kill personnel around be securely blocked so that all 4 (four)
DURING SERVICE wheels may safely turn
ENGINE AND Moving parts (fans, belts, drive shafts, DURING SERVICE :
DRIVE TRAIN steering axles, and wheels could cause The engine must be turned off when
serious injury if persons are struck by possible
moving parts or caught in belts If procedures require the engine to be
running during service, care must be taken
to avoid moving objects
The battery cable should be disconnected
when possible to avoid having the engine
accidentally started
Hot surfaces (radiator, engine, exhaust

pipe, transmission) could cause serious
burns Care should be taken to avoid hot surfaces
Radiator cap removed from an Never remove the radiator cap from on
overheated engine could allow coolant to overheated engine
flash into steam, causing serious burns Allow engine to cool before removing cap
Welding on the fuel tank could cause

heat build- up inside, causing the tank to
explode
Fuel spilled on hot surfaces could ignite Pay attention when welding on or around the
causing serious burns fuel tank to avoid excessive heat
Pay attention when disconnected fuel lines
to prevent spilled fuel
Clean up any spilled fuel immediately
BATTERIES Batteries produce flammable gasses that Batteries should be well ventilated before
could be ignited causing burns an servicing particularly if welding is required
explosions near the batteries
During charge batteries can exhaust Open covers during charge, and make it on
dangerous gas correct ventilated premise
Batteries contain strong acid that may Protective clothing, gloves and eyewear
cause severe burns if spilled or splashed must be worn when working on batteries
on body parts or in the eyes
TIRE Welding near the wheels may damage If welding has to be done near the wheel or
the tire, which may explode on the rim, remove the tire
May cause serious injury or death
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-3-013

WSP-900
0-3-1-15-FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES
1-3-1.15.1.GENERAL
Prominent and strategic placement of fire extinguishers will assure maximum vale in an
emergency. Placement, use, and maintenance of portable fire extinguishers shall be
instructed in the location of extinguishers; the classification of extinguishers; the
classification and types of fire on which each type of extinguisher is effective; the
methods of handling extinguishers; evaluation to determine when fire fighting,
particularly awareness of potential hazards form reactive or combustible substances and
materials are near the fire area. If a fire is large or conditions are unsafe, the building or
area must be evacuated. On LSP, a place materialized by label is envisaged in the cabin
to install an extinguisher (see below).
0-3-014 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
0-3-1-16-FLAMMABLE PROPERTIES
1) High temperature produced by fire may initiate spontaneous chemical

decomposition, violent reactions, or explosion. Remember that even
nonflammables may burn under the under the right conditions. Materials and
substances may demonstrate the following characteristic and behavior when
exposed to high temperatures.
a) While a substance or material may not be flammable in the pure from, it

may burn when mixed with air at relatively low pressures.
b) Pressurized containers may rupture when exposed to high temperatures.
c) Hazardous decomposition products may results from exposure to high

temperature. Polymerization may occur.
d) Normally stable material and substance may react violently with other
material, such as refrigerant R-134a with alkalis or alkaline earth metals.
e) High temperatures may cause auto-ignition of various materials and

substances. Provide ad adequate electrical ground.
2) Four elements are required for combustion. By eliminating any one of the
elements, a fire can be extinguished.
(a) Fuel
(b) Oxygen
(c) Sufficient heat
(d) Chain reaction process
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-3-015

WSP-900
0-3-1-17-EXTINGUISHANTS
Fire extinguishers are rated for their effectiveness in extinguishing the four major
categories of fires. Use the appropriate extinguisher for combustible in the area. The
Extinguishing agent for the other burning material in the area is sufficient to extinguish
refrigerant.
1. Classes d'incendie :
Flammable liquids such as gasoline, oil and oil based paint.

Energized electrical equipment - including wiring, fuse boxes, circuit breakers,
machinery, and appliances.
Combustible metals such as magnesium or sodium.
Types of Media
WARNING:
THE USE OF A CLASS A OR B EXTINGUISHER ON A CLASS FIRE WALL INCREASE THE
FIRE DANGER. THE USE OF CORROIE EXTINGUISHERS SUCH AS A PATASSIUM
CHLORDIRE AD MONOAMMOUIM PHOSHATE IS ACCEPTABLE.
Pressurized Water
This type of water puts out a fire by lowering the temperature to inhibit the spread of
flames and wetting combustible materials to suppress the fire. Use pressurized water on
Class A fires only. Never use water on electrical or flammable liquid fires.
Dry Chemicals
This media smothers a fire with a blanket of powdered chemicals the exclude oxygen.
The chemicals can be corrosive if not cleaned up immediately. Types includes the
following:
(1) Ammonium phosphate can be used on a Class A, B, or C fires.

(2) Sodium bicarbonate or potassium bicarbonate can be used on class B or C fires.
0-3-016 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
Carbon Dioxide
Carbon dioxide extinguishers contain pressurized liquid carbon dioxide, which
vaporizes when discharged. This media may be used on Class A, B, or C fires.
Foam (AFFF or FFFP)

Foam extinguishers blanket a burning surface, excluding oxygen. This media may be
used on Class B fires. Since foam contains mostly water. It cannot be used to put out
electrical fires.
WARNING:
IMMEDIATELY EVACUATE ANY AREA WHERE A HALON DISCHARGE OCCURS.
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE UNCONSCIOUSNESS FOLLOWED BY DEATH.
Halon (1211)
This media is used in normally unoccupied enclosures to displace oxygen and
suffocate a fire.
1-3-1.17.1.Clean Up
Spills of environmentally hazardous substances or material should be immediately
reported to the appropriate authorities. Spills should be contained by fire retardant
treated absorbent. Materials and substances should be cleaned up or recovered and
disposed of at an approved waste disposal facility in accordance with current
applicable laws and regulations governing such disposal depending on the product
characteristics at the time of disposal.
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-3-017

WSP-900
PAGE BLANK
0-3-018 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
0-4-RECORD OF REVISION
ISSUE DATE
UPDATE NUMBER Deleted Inserted Description of change
Table 5 : Revision
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-4-01

WSP-900
PAGE BLANK
0-4-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
0-5-EFFECTIVE PAGES
CHAPTER / SECTION NUMBER OF PAGES DATE OF ISSUE
Table 6 : Effectives pages
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-5-01

WSP-900
PAGE BLANK
0-5-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
0-6-TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER / SECTION TITRES DE CHAPITRES ET DE SECTIONS
CHAPTER 0 INTRODUCTION
0/0 Record of revision
0/1 TLD – Sales informations
0/2 General Warranty conditions
0/3 Safety regulations
0/5 Effectives pages
0/6 Table of contents
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION & OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

1/1 Description
1/2 Operation
1/3 Specifications and Capabilities
1/4 Shipping
1/5 Storage
CHAPTER 2 MAINTENANCE
2/1 Servicing
2/2 Troubleshooting
2/3 Removal / installation
2/4 Repairs
CHAPTER 3 REVISIONS / REPARATIONS

3/1 Components / Steering axle
3/2 Components / Transmission
3/3 Components / Hydraulic
CHAPTER 4 SPARE PARTS

4/1 Introduction
4/2 Manufacturer’s code
4/3 Spare parts with list
CHAPTER 5 MANUFACTURER'S TENDERS

5 Manufacturer’s annex
Table 7 : General table of contents
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-6-01

WSP-900
PAGE BLANK
0-6-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-0-01

WSP-900
BLANK PAGE
1-0-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
1-0-1-TABLE OF MATTER
1-0-1- TABLE OF MATTER ....................................................................................................................3

1-1- DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................................................1
1-1-1- FIELD OF USE .............................................................................................................................1
1-1-2- DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................................2
1-1-3- COMPONENTS LOCATION ........................................................................................................4
1-1-4- IDENTIFICATION PLATE ............................................................................................................9
1-2- OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ...........................................................................................................1
1-2-1- PRELIMINARY CHECKINGS.......................................................................................................1
1-2-2- COMMANDS ...............................................................................................................................2
1-2-3- START-UP....................................................................................................................................5
1-2-4- DRINKING WATER SERVICING .................................................................................................6
1-2-5- TANK DRaINING AND CLEANING..............................................................................................6
1-2-6- EMERGENCY OPERATION ........................................................................................................7
1-2-7- AIRCRAFT DETECTION (DEPENDING VERSIONS) .................................................................8
1-2-8- COLD WEATHER KIT - VENTILATION SYSTEM (OPTION)......................................................9
1-2-9- CABIN FUEL HEATER (OPTION) .............................................................................................10
1-3- SPECIFICATION AND CAPABILITIES...............................................................................................1
1-3-1- DIMENSIONS...............................................................................................................................1
1-3-2- PERFORMANCES .......................................................................................................................2
1-3-3- WEIGHT .......................................................................................................................................2
1-3-4- NOISE LEVEL ..............................................................................................................................3
1-3-5- VIBRATION LEVEL ......................................................................................................................3
1-4- SHIPPING ...........................................................................................................................................1
1-4-1- PREPARATION............................................................................................................................1
1-4-2- SHIPMENT ...................................................................................................................................1
1-4-3- OVERSEAS SHIPMENT ..............................................................................................................1
1-5- STORAGE ...........................................................................................................................................1
1-5-1- GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................1
1-5-2- STORAGE ....................................................................................................................................1
1-5-3- REMOVING FROM STORAGE....................................................................................................1
1-5-4- JACKING POINTS........................................................................................................................2
1-5-5- HOLDING POINTS.......................................................................................................................3
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-0-03

WSP-900
BLANK PAGE
1-0-04 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
1-1-DESCRIPTION
1-1-1-FIELD OF USE
Fig 1-1-1 : Field of use
The equipment is designed to service the water tank of all commercial aircraft, which service ports
are located between 1 400 mm [55”] (2/3 of the tank) and 4 900 mm [193”], within normal safety and
comfort situation. Any other use is forbidden, as well as the use in an explosive atmosphere and the use
on other surfaces than concrete or asphalt.
It is forbidden to climb on the unit outside of defined area.
This unit should not be used to move items or personnel.
The unit is not designed to cross obstructions.
This unit is only for airports, it is forbidden to use it on highway
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-1-01

WSP-900
1-1-2-DESCRIPTION
3 4
Fig 1-1-2 : WSP-900
1- Driving commands
2- Engine cover
3- Hydraulic tank
4- Rear axle
1-1-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
Fig 1-1-3 : WSP-900
5- Waste tank
6- Water pump plumbing compartment
7- Fuel tank
8- Lifting basket (high position)
9- Front axle
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-1-03

WSP-900
1-1-3-COMPONENTS LOCATION
Engine/Transmission
1 2 3 4
7 6 5
Fig 1-1-4 : WSP-900
1- Engine
2- Automatic transmission
3- Driveshaft
4- Rear axle
5- Leaf springs
6- Wheels
7- Front axle
1-1-04 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
Braking system/Parking brake
5 4
Fig 1-1-5 : WSP-900
1- Brake fluid reservoir

2- Brake booster
3- Brake pedal
4- Parking brake handle
5- Pad brakes
6- Drum brakes
7- Parking brake cable
8- Vacuum pump, brake system
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-1-05

WSP-900
Hydraulic circuit
4
7
3
Fig 1-1-6 : WSP-900
1- Steering valve
2- Hydraulic tank
3- Water pump hydraulic motor
4- Lift cylinders
5- Hydraulic plumbing
6- Steering cylinder
7- Hydraulic pump
1-1-06 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
Drinking water circuit
4
2
1
Fig 1-1-7 : WSP-900
1- Aircraft connection coupling

2- Waste hose
3- Flow meter
4- Hose real
5- Water pump
6- Man hole
7- Waste tank
8- Waste tank level gauge
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-1-07

WSP-900
Lifting basket
5
1
Fig 1-1-9 : WSP-900
1- Delivery coupling holder

2- Lifting system
3- Access door
4- Waste coupling holder
5- Control box
1-1-08 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
1-1-4-IDENTIFICATION PLATE
Fig 1-1-10 : Identification plate location
The identification plate will contain the following information:

• Unit serial number
• Unit date of manufacturing
• Unit weight
• External dimensions
• Power
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-1-09

WSP-900
BLANK PAGE
1-1-010 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
1-2-OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1-2-1-PRELIMINARY CHECKINGS
First use inspection
- Remove the blocking, banding, ties and other securing material. Clean the unit if needed.
- Inspect the exterior for shipping damage, broken lights, bent sheet metal, or other external damage.
- Open all doors and covers and inspect the interior for rags, shipping papers, or other foreign materials.
- Check for visible evidence of fuel, coolant, or hydraulic leaks.
- Check electrical connections.
- Check wheel nuts tightening torque.
WARNING:
INCORRECT USE CAN DAMAGE THE MATERIAL, RESULTING IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH.
READ AND UNDEERSTAND THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS PRIOR TO USING THE EQUIPMENT
Daily inspection
- Report to chapter 2 - Maintenance
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-2-01

WSP-900
1-2-2- COMMANDS
Driving commands
Fig 1-2-1 : Driving commands
6 5 2 3 4 8
Fig 1-2-2 : Driving commands
1 Dashboard
2 Gearbox lever
3 Parking brake handle
4 Electrical box
5 Throttle pedal
6 Brake pedal
7 Column switch (lights/horn)
8 Battery disconnect switch
1-2-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
16 17 18 19 20 21
15 22
14 3
4
13
2 12 5
1 6 7 8 9 10 11
Fig 1-2-3 : Dashboard
1 Ignition switch
2 Emergency stop switch
Gages :
3 Fuel gage
4 Coolant temperature
5 Hour-meter
Switches :
6 Hazard lights
7 Flood light
8 Beacon
9 Front windshield wiper
10 Rear windshield wiper (option)
11 Heater/Defroster (option)
Indicators:
12 Low fuel level
13 High transmission temperature
14 Low brake fluid level/parking brake engaged
15 High coolant temperature
16 Battery charge
17 Engine oil pressure
18 Preheating
19 Hazard lights
20 Turning lights
21 High beams
22 « Lift down » indicator
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-2-03

WSP-900
Fig 1-2-4 : Steering column switch
Steering Column switch :
1 Turning lights
2 Position lights
3 Low beams / high beams
4 Switch low neams / high beams
5 Temporary high beams
6 Horn
Control box
6
3
4 5
Fig 1-2-5 : Control box
1 Water pump switch

2 Disinfectant low level (pump shutdown)
3 Lift down
4 Lift up
5 Emergency stop
6 Dead-Man (for lift controls)
1-2-04 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
1-2-3-START-UP
Start-up :
- Make sure that the emergency stop switches (Fig 1-2-3 and 1-2-5) are not activated;
- Make sure the parking brake rep.3 (Fig 1-2-1) is engaged;
- Open the electrical circuit by turning the battery master switch rep.8 (Fig 1-2-2);
- Make sure the gearbox lever rep.2 (Fig 1-2-1) is in its neutral position;
- Check the fuel level on the gage rep.12 (Fig 1-2-3);
- Turn the ignition key rep.1 (Fig 1-2-3) and wait for the ‘preheating’ light to go off rep.18 (Fig 1-2-
3);
- Start the engine by turning the ignition key (see engine documentation);
WARNING:
DO NOT IDLE THE ENGINE IN AN ENCLOSED AREA
NOTE: After the start-up, make sure the indicators rep.16 and rep.17 (Fig 1-2-3) go off
NOTE: If the engine doesn’t start, refer to the manufacturer’s recommendation. During cold weather,
let the engine idle for 5 minutes.
WARNING:
IF YOU NOTICE ANYTHING ABNORMAL (NOISE, BATTERY CHARGE ISSUE, LEAKS,…), STOP
THE ENGINE IMMEDIATELY AND CALL A SERVICE AGENT
CAUTION:
DO NOT ADJUST YOU RSEAT WHILE DRIVING
BEFORE DRIVING THE UNIT, MAKE SURE YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE DRIVINNG
AND SAFETY RULES DESCRIBED IN CHAPTER 0.
Driving :
- Make sure all aircraft connection hoses are tightly secured on their respective holder, the basket is
in low position.
- Make sure the mirror are correctly set up.
- Make sure there is no personnel in the basket, on the vehicle and in the driving area.
- Make sure the speed lever rep.15 (Fig 1-2-2) is in the position wanted (forward or reverse)
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-2-05

WSP-900
1-2-4-DRINKING WATER SERVICING

- Position the vehicle at the aircraft according to the ‘’AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE FACILITY AND
RAMP MANUAL’’ of each aircraft;
- Engage the parking brake, move the transmission selector to neutral and choke the tires;
NOTE: During nightime servicing, turn the floodlight on.
- Step in the lift platform and close the door for safety. Make sure it is locked.
WARNING:
THE MAXIMUM CAPACITY OF THE LIFT PLATFORM IS 1 PERSON OR 200 KG (440 LBS)
IT IS FORBIDDEN TO CARY TOOLS AND MATERIAL IN THE BASKET
- Adjust the lift height to have easy access to the aircraft service trap door. To raise the platform,
push simultaneously the push-buttons ‘UP’ rep.3 (fig.1-2-5) and “DEAD MAN” rep.6 (Fig.1-2-5) and hold
them until you get to the required height.
- Service the aircraft according to the aircraft manufacturer’s recommendation and local regulation;
- Activating the water pump: push the switch rep.1 (Fig.1-2-5), and maintain it during the filling.
Before turning the water pump on, zero-reset the flow-meter. Water pump pressure adjusting can be
made inside water pump compartment by qualified person ;
- Do not forget to reconnect the couplings to their holders once the servicing is complete.
- Lower the platfrom by pressing simultaneously the push-button ‘DOWN’ rep.4 (fig.1-2-5) and
“DEAD MAN” rep.6 (Fig.1-2-5) and hold them until the platform is in its lowest position;
WARNING:
BEFORE LOWERING THE PLATFORM, MAKE SURE NOTHING OR NOONE STANDS BELOW THE
PLATFORM.
Carry out the drinking water supply of each tank of the plane following the same procedure.
1-2-5-TANK DRAINING AND CLEANING

The draining of the drinkable water tank is carried out with before right of the tank:
Draining valve
Think of closing again the valve well once draining carried out.
NOTE : It is imperative to control that the procedures of disinfection and cleaning are carried out
regularly in accordance with the regulation. For additional information refer to chapter 2.
1-2-06 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
1-2-6-EMERGENCY OPERATION
Emergency stop Switch
The vehicle is equipped with two emergency stop switch :
- One on the dashboard rep.2 (Fig.1-2-3) ;
- One on the lift platform control box rep.5 (Fig.1-2-5).
NOTE: Pushing the emergency stop switch will stop the engine and any current operation.
NOTE: To rearm the emergency stop switch and allow engine starting, turn the switch a quarter turn.
Emergency platform lowering
The vehicle is equipped with a bypass valve to lower the platform. It allows the lowering of the manual
platform in case of emergency, engine, electrical, hydraulic or battery failure.
Emergency by-
pass valve
Fig 1-2-9 : Emergency platform lowering
WARNING:
DURING THE EMERGENCY LOWERING, MAKE SURE NOTHING OR NOONE STANDS BELOW THE
BASKET.
- The valve must be closed after the emergency lowering operation
WARNING:
DO NOT TOW OR MOVE THE VEHICLE WITH THE PLATFORM ELEVATED OR WITH PERSONNEL
IN THE PLATFORM.
Remorquage
If the unit must be urgently moved away from the operation area, it is tolerated to tow the unit with a
towbar on a 200m distance at a max speed of 5km/h, with the transmission on neutral.
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-2-07
WSP-900
WARNING:
STEERING AND BRAKING ASISTANCE WILL NOT BE ACTIVE
WARNING:
THIS UNIT BEING EQUIPPED WITH AN AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION, IT IS STRCTLY FORBIDDEN,
IN CASE OF FAILURE, TO HAV EIT TOWED WITHOUT HAVING UNCOUPLED THE DRIVE WHEELS
BY DROPPING THE DRIVESHAFT.
1-2-7-AIRCRAFT DETECTION (DEPENDING VERSIONS)

This option stops the lift when it gets close to the aircraft body
Fig 1-2-14 : Aircraft detection

Limit switches
- When raising the platform, it will be stop if the limit switches are actuated by the aircraft body.
NOTE: To unlock the platform, lower it. The lowering command are still active.
1-2-08 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
1-2-8-COLD WEATHER KIT - VENTILATION SYSTEM
(OPTION)
This option prevent the unit from freezing under severe weather: a ventilation system (3 fans) circulates
the heated air from the plumbing compartment through a tube inside the tank, to the dump valve and to
the hose reel.
The air is heated by a fuel heater during operation and by a electrical heater when external power supply
is connected.
Operation heating
When the engine is running, the heating system can be turned on using the switch located on the
dashboard.
Fig 1-2-15 : Heating system switch (ventilation system)
Both the fuel heater and the ventilation system will start running.
NOTE: During cold weather, compartment doors should not be opened unnecessarily even if the
heating is running.
Plugged-in heating
When the unit is connected to a power supply (the receptacle on the LHS of the unit, behind the cab) the
heating system will start automatically. If the unit is equipped with an optional block heater, it will also start
running.
Fig 1-2-16 : Power supply receptacle (here shown for a 120V kit)
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-2-09

WSP-900
1-2-9-CABIN FUEL HEATER (OPTION)

This option offers a more comfortable cabin when operating under cold weather.
Cab heating
When the engine is running, the cab fuel heater can be turned on using the switch located on the
dashboard.
CABIN FUEL
HEATER
Fig 1-2-17 : Cabin fuel heater switch
Both the fuel heater and the ventilation system will start running.
NOTE: The fuel heater is wired to the ignition switch so it will stop heating when turned off. The fuel
heater fan is wired to the battery so it could keep running even when the heating is off to cool down.
1-2-010 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
1-3-SPECIFICATION AND CAPABILITIES
1-3-1-DIMENSIONS
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-3-01

WSP-900
1-3-2-PERFORMANCES
Water tank capacity : 3 300 liters [872 US Gal]

Relief valve: 2,5 bars [36 PSI]
Water pump flow: 80 L/min [22 US Gal]
Delivery hose : ID 3/4’’
Aircraft connection coupling :
- Quick disconnect, collar 1/4 turn ROYLIN/KAISER
- Dimension : 3/4’’
1-3-3-WEIGHT
- Weight (empty) : 4 420kg [9744 Lbs]

- Weight (full tanks) : 7 700kg [15873 Lbs]
- Lift platform max. load: 200 daN [440 Lbs] or 1 person
1-3-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
1-3-4-NOISE LEVEL
WSP-900
DISSOCIATED VALUES OF NOISE LEVEL
According to ISO 4871 :1996
Stopped, Stopped, Stopped, Stopped, Driving,

Idle. high rpm. Idle. high rpm high rpm
A-weighed noise power level,

LwA (reference 1pW), in - - - - -
decibels
Uncertainty, KwA, in decibels - - - - -
A-weighed noise pressure
82.6 82.7
level, LpA (reference 20µPa) at 74.5 dB(A) - -
dB(A) dB(A)
work station, in decibels
Uncertainty, KwA, in decibels 4.1 dB(A) 4.1 dB(A) 4.1 dB(A) 4.1 dB(A) 4.1 dB(A)
A-weighed noise pressure
82.9 dB(A) 93.3 dB(A) 76.3 dB(A) 88.4 dB(A)
level, LpA (reference 20µPa) at -
1m around* 1m around* lifting platf * lifting platf *
outer location*, in decibels
Uncertainty, KwA, in decibels 4.1 dB(A) 4.1 dB(A) 4.1 dB(A) 4.1 dB(A) -
Values determined in accordance with the code of acoustic test given in NF EN 1915-4 with use of basic
regulation NF EN ISO 4871:1996, NF EN ISO 3744:1995 and NF EN ISO 11201:1996.
NOTE - the sum of measured value and associated uncertainty represents a higher limit in which the
measured values can be.
1-3-5- VIBRATION LEVEL
WSP-900
Vibration level, declared according to with NF EN 12096 : 1997
Body Hand, arm
Measured value of vibration emission: a

awz = 1.72 m/s2 awh less than 2.5 m/s2
Uncertainty : K
0.51 m/s2 0.87 m/s2
Values determined in accordance with: NF EN 1915-3 : 2005 NF EN 1915-3 : 2005 for
operating conditions;
NF EN 1032 : 2003 for
locations and calculations
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-3-03

WSP-900
BLANK PAGE
1-3-04 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
1-4-SHIPPING
1-4-1- PREPARATION
- Insert manual in the cabin;
- Control and close all doors;
- Fill the fuel tank at ¼;
- According to the unit size, remove protruding components: mirrors, light protections, beacons…
- Turn the master battery switch to OFF;
1-4-2- SHIPMENT
- Load the WSP-900 on a suitable vehicle from a loading platform;
WARNING:
THIS VEHICLE DOES NOT HAVE SLINGING POINTS, IT IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN TO SLING THE
UNITS FROM POINTS WHICH ARE NOT DESIGNED TO WITHSTAND THE LOAD OF THE UNIT
IT IS FORBIDDEN TO LIFT UP UNIT WITH FORK LIFT UNIT
- Engage parking brake;
- Choke the wheels by placing two chokes each sides of the wheels;
- Secure the WSP-900 to the transportation vehicle by strapping the unit on both sides;
NOTE: Tie-down points are available on the chassis.
- Verrouiller les portes.
1-4-3- OVERSEAS SHIPMENT

- Follow the same instructions for preparation and transportation as for a regular shipment;
- Spread a maritime product on the vehicle, in the plumbing and engine compartments.
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-4-01

WSP-900
BLANK PAGE
1-4-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
1-5-STORAGE
1-5-1- GENERAL
Storage unit must be closed and ventilated to preserve materials:
- from humidity
- from dust
- from sunlight
- from extreme temperatures
Storage preparation must include:
- cleaning of the material to store;

- complete test and technical visit on all parts and accessories to noticve working issues and
necessary fixes to have the unit running correctly ;
- maintenance of the unit;
- Tank draining and disinfection;
- general greasing of the unit.
1-5-2-STORAGE
Engine storage must be done accordingly with the engine manufacturer’s recommendation.
- Disconnect the battery, clean and store in a separate place;
- choke the unit’s wheels and disengage the parking brake. Check the brake fluid level, fill if
necessary and check the opening of the cap;
- Check the tires pressure. Protect tires from light and atmosphere by applying protective;
- Empty the fuel tank and install a humidity absorber;
- Drain water circuit to avoid freezing;
- Storage must be done in area where the tank cannot be contaminated.
1-5-3- REMOVING FROM STORAGE

Removing the engine from storage must be done accordingly with the engine manufacturer’s
recommendation.
- Replace a discharged battery;
- Make a complete tank disinfection with bactericide product ;
- Purge circuits and do a preliminary check-up.
CAUTION:
IF STORAGE LASTS MORE THAN 6 MONTHS,IT IS IMPORTANT TO DO A COMPLETE
MAINTENANCE OF THE UNIT ACCORDING TO THE MAINTENANCE TABLES (MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER)
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-5-01

WSP-900
1-5-4-JACKING POINTS
WARNING:
IT IS MANDATORY TO EMPTY THE TANKS BEFORE JACKING THE UNIT
WARNING:
JACKS ARE NOT CORRECT SUPPORTS.
NEVER WORK UNDER THE UNIT IF IT’S NOT PROPERLY SECURED
1-5-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
1-5-5-HOLDING POINTS
WARNING:
IT IS MANDATORY TO EMPTY THE TANKS BEFORE SUPPORTING THE UNIT
WARNING:
NEVER WORK UNDER THE UNIT IF IT’S NOT PROPERLY SECURED
BEFORE ANY OPERATION MAKE SURE THAT THE SUPPORTS ARE PROPERLY SIZED
Creation : 07.16 - 2007 1-5-03

WSP-900
BLANK PAGE
1-5-04 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
CHAPTER 2
MAINTENANCE
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-0-01

WSP-900
BLANK PAGE
2-0-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-0-1-TABLE OF CONTENTS
2-0-1- TABLE OF CONTENTS ...............................................................................................................3

2-1- SERVICING.........................................................................................................................................1
2-1-1- CLEANING INSTRUCTION .........................................................................................................1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................................2
2-1-2- INSPECTION SCHEME ...............................................................................................................3
FIRST MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE...............................................................................................3
DAILY CHECK UNIT STATE...............................................................................................................4
CHECKING 125 H VEHICLE SERVICING..........................................................................................6
CHECKING 1000 H OR 1 YEAR (First limit reached) - VEHICLE SERVICING.................................9
CHECKING 2000 H OR 2 YEARS (First limit reached) - VEHICLE SERVICING ............................10
CHECKING 6 000 H ENGINE SERVICING ......................................................................................11
2-1-3- MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE .................................................................................................13
GREASING, LUBRICATION AND LIQUIDS .....................................................................................13
2-1-4- LUBRICATION ...........................................................................................................................14
2-1-5- ENGINE (DEUTZ VERSION) .....................................................................................................15
2-1-6- Differential Lubricant Check, Drain, and Refill. ..........................................................................16
2-1-7- MAINTENANCE OF THE WATER PUMP .................................................................................17
2-2- TROUBLE SHOOTING .......................................................................................................................1
2-2-1- HYDRAULIC AND ELECTRIC DIAGRAM ...................................................................................1
2-2-2- HOW TO READ A DIAGRAM ......................................................................................................3
ELECTRICAL FILE..............................................................................................................................4
HYDRAULIC FILE .............................................................................................................................19
2-2-3- ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM ...........................................................................................................37
2-2-4- HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM.............................................................................................................39
2-2-5- STARTING PROBLEMS ............................................................................................................41
2-3- REMOVAL / INSTALLATION (OF COMPONENTS)..........................................................................1
2-3-1- WHEELS ......................................................................................................................................1
WHEEL MOUNTING ...........................................................................................................................1
2-4- REPAIR ...............................................................................................................................................1
2-4-1- TIGHTENING TORQUE...............................................................................................................1
GENERAL............................................................................................................................................1
TORQUES VALUES............................................................................................................................1
2-4-2- RECOMMANDED TORQUE FOR HYDRAULIC CONNECTIONS .............................................2
2-4-3- STANDARD SCREWS.................................................................................................................3
2-4-4- WELDING.....................................................................................................................................9
2-4-5- Adjusting parking hand brake cable tension ..............................................................................10
2-4-6- LIFTING-STRUCTURE OPERATION MAINTENANCE ............................................................11
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-0-03

WSP-900
BLANK PAGE
2-0-04 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-1- SERVICING
2-1-1-CLEANING INSTRUCTION
For a complete cleaning of the vehicle, clean normally (HIGH-PRESSURE CLEANING SHOULD BE
AVOIDED) and make sure electrical components, safeties, name plates and stickers are well protected.
For electrical components, use appropriate air cleaner.
For mechanical parts cleaning, use degreasing products, and then blow air.
Clean the battery top, with plugs in place to prevent water penetration into the cells.
Dry with compressed air or with a clean rag.
Nettoyage des batteries
- Il est indispensable de nettoyer les batteries, afin d'éviter les formations de sel et les dérivations de
courant pouvant conduire à de graves avaries ;
- Laver le dessus des batteries sans enlever les bouchons afin d'éviter l'introduction d'eau dans les
éléments ;
- Sécher.
WARNING: SOLVENT MAY AFFECT SKIN, EYES, AND RESPIRATORY TRACT.

USE ONLY IN A WELL-VENTILATED AREA. AVOID PROLONGED BREATHING OF VAPOURS.
AVOID EYE AND REPEATED SKIN CONTACT KEEP AWAY FROM SPARKS AND FLAME.
REFER TO INDICATIONS OF SUPPLIER.
NOTE: To reduce the potential risk during operation due to encumbered and dirty cabin, we
recommend you to take a special care to the cleaning of cabin. The correct working of controls can be
altered by fireign objects.
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-1-01

WSP-900
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
WARNING: BEFORE ANY MAINTENANCE ACTION, IT IS IMPERATIF TO TAKE NOTE OF THE

SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
The servicing is divided onto 3 categories:
1 – Programmed maintenance:
It must be respected.
2 – Preventive maintenance:
It must be doing by user/operator.
It allows extending tractor lifetime and reducing failures.
3 – Curative maintenance:
To repairing breakdowns and tractor failures.
WARNING : THE MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS MUST BE CARRIED OUT BY QUALIFIED

PERSONNEL.
WARNING: DO NOT WELD ON GLAVANIZED OR ZINC-PLATED PARTS TO AVOID TOXIC GAZ

AND FUMES. ANY WELDING OPERATION ON THESE MATERIAL REQUIRE THE OPERATOR TO
WEAR THE APPROPRIATE PROTECTIVE CLOTHES (SAFETY GLASSES, DUST FILTRATION
MASK..)
ARNING: ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL SHOULD
2-1-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-1-2-INSPECTION SCHEME
FIRST MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE
- Check oil leaks and correct if necessary.
- Check hoses and connections check electric wiring.
- Tighten nuts 2 monthes after servicing.
NOTE : The TLD spare parts service can provide on request recommended parts list for routine
maintenances. See the information manual for addresses of contact
WARNING: BEFORE MAINTENANCE OPERATION ON BRAKING SYSTEM, UNIT MUST BE ON

HOLDING POINT (SEE CHAPTER 1)
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-1-03

WSP-900
DAILY CHECK -
UNIT STATE
Vehicle Number: Date: //
Start Time: End time: VISA: Start Time:
: Checks Good Adjustments Completed Needs Repairs
Daily Check and servicing allow verifying good tractor condition, and avoiding using problems.
These maintenance periods concern normals conditions of use. If necessary they can be
increase or decrease according w ith the context of use.
THESE CHECKS MUST BE DOING BY TRACTOR DRIVER, ONE TIME BY DAY, BEFORE ALL
USING.
CHECK? TO DO OPERATION TOOLS / SPARE PART REMARK

REF# NECESSARIES
Unit general condition.
Paint condition.
Legibility of the pictograms, labels, and

security instructions. Replace if necessary.
Check the tyres, wearing and inflating
pressure, cuts, crack, and objects inserted
onto tread tyres.
Drive and test all unit function (brake,
hydrostatic, steering).
Check leakages under unit
Check door closure, lock and damage on
the door.
Check heating, fan, and cab seat.
Check buttons, switch, buzzer, hourmeter

and light indicators.
Check rear and front lighting (headlight
…), working light, flash and stop lights.
Check that chassis, body and frame are in
good condition (without impact).
Check glass, and windscreen.
Check wiper arm and blade.

Replace them if wear.
Check wheels nuts and their tightening.
Start the engine, and wait it is warming,

listen all abnormal noises, see abnormal
smoke.
Make a slow motion, with brake test.
Table 1 : Daily check 1
2-1-04 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
DAILY CHECK -
UNIT STATE (continuous)

REF# NECESSARIES
Depending versions, check fire extinguisher,
validity date and pin/clips in place.
Check (depending versions) :
- Filters
- Leaks (advert if presence).
Check all liquid level : engine and gearbox
oil, water, fuel/petrol, brake liquid,
windscreen washer fluid…
Refill if necessary.
WATER TANK
Drain tank each evening
Disinfection of the tank by personnel
qualified every 2 days during the summer
and every 3 days during the winter or
following an immobilization of more than 2
days or a maintenance of the tank.
The tanks are cleaned with bleach diluted to

2,6 %. They are filled with the solution and
are left with disinfecting during 6 hours the
night. Then 2 rinsings with drinking water
are carried out.
REPORT ALL DAMAGE TO THE WORKSHOP MANAGER.
FOLLOWING OPERATIONS MUST BE PERFORMED BY DRIVER, AFTER ALL USING.

REF# NECESSARIES
Check fuel leakage under unit.
Check oil leakages under steering axle
(steering cylinder).
Check tyres.
Check that chassis, body and frame are in

good condition (without impact).
Clean cab. Take care about all objects
which can be on ground.
Unit general condition.
Legibility of the pictograms, labels, and
security instructions. Replace if necessary.
DRIVER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR HIS VEHICLE.

NOT RETURN IT IN GOOD CONDITION CAN ENDANGER NEXT USER.
IT’S IMPORTANT TO RESPECT THESE ELEMENTARY RULES.
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-1-05

WSP-900
CHECKING 125 H -
VEHICLE SERVICING
CHECK? TO DO OPERATION TOOLS / SPARE REMARK

REF# PART
NECESSARIES
ENGINE
See engine operator handbook
ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT
Check batteries charging, tight connection/plug. CAUTION :
batteries charge
should be
performed in
ventilated area
Electrolyte level
Check headlights and lighting
Check light, buzzers, alarm, sensors, switches
HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT
Check connections
Pipes: check the condition of the rigid pipes and
hoses
Check that none of the connections is leaking
and tighten as required
Check operating pressures (refer to hydraulic
diagram)
Check return filter clogging indicator
Check good conditions of cylinders
GENERAL
Check the good condition and more particularly
cab, driving station, tires and steering, basket
lifting system
Clean the vehicle (caution to electrical system)
WHEELS
Check wearing and wheels nut. Retighten then if
necessary
GEAR BOX
Check fluid level
REAR AXLE
Check no leak on rear axle
Drain after first 125 hours only (see page 18).
WATER TANK
Analyze water of the tank
Dismount the tank (to open all the inspection
holes) and wash them in Karcher with hot water
with high pressure to avoid the formation of
tartar.
2-1-06 Creation : 07.16 – 2007
WSP-900
CHECKING 250 H -
VEHICLE SERVICING
Check and servicing must be effectuated by maintenance department.

REF# NECESSARIES
Do recommended 125 H operations
ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT
Check electric appliances (indicators,
emergency stop, controls,…)
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
Check general condition
Check the condition of the flexible brake

pipes
Check steering track rod ends for play
Check adjustment and proper parking brake
function and throttle control
REAR AXLE
Rear drum brakes are adjusted
automatically by alternately driving the
vehicle forward and backward, and braking
firmly when the vehicle is driven in reverse.
ENGINE
Engine and gear box fixing, silent bloc
condition
HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT
Check the condition of the cylinders
Replace the hydraulic filters
LIFTING-STRUCTURE
check the length of each chain (see page
23)
GEAR BOX
Check oil level
Table 4 : Checking 250H-1
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-1-07

WSP-900
CHECKING 500 H -
VEHICLE SERVICING

REF# NECESSARIES
Do recommended 125 and 250 H

operations
ENGINE
SERVICE BRAKE
Check leaks on wheel cylinder
Check wearing on brake pads
REAR BRAKES
Plate brake carrier tightening
Parking brake adjustment
GREASING
Grease, following the instructions
contained page 16
WATER PUMP
Check no leaking (remplace seals if
necessary)
LIFTING-STRUCTURE
Visual checking of the unit : corrosion,
wear
Control platform and lifting by an approved periodicity according
to legislation in force
organization in the country of use
Cleaning of the unit
GEAR BOX
Replace filter
HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT
Check the hydraulic flaps for tightness
WATER TANK
Check the state of wear of the flexible
devices, connections and seals and
replace if necessary.
Table 5 : Checking 500H
2-1-08 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
CHECKING 1000 H OR 1 YEAR (FIRST LIMIT -
REACHED) - VEHICLE SERVICING

REF# NECESSARIES
Do recommended 125, 250, 500 H

operations
ENGINE
ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT
Check electric wiring
HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT
Drain and clean the tank hydraulic circuit
Replace return filters (refer to hydraulic
system diagram)
Replace return filters (refer to hydraulic
system diagram)
Contrôle de l’usure des flexibles et
changement si nécessaire
Check the calibration of the limiters (refer to
hydraulic system diagram)
Tighten all connections and retaining clips
Test all functions
Check operating pressures and travel
speeds (refer to hydraulic diagram)
GEAR BOX
Draining
REAR AXLE
Check brake shoes and drums and replace
as required.
BRAKING
Check brake pads and discs and replace as
required
CAB
Clean
Change wipers
Check gap on pedal, steering column and
cables/rod
Table 6 : Checking 1000H - 1
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-1-09

WSP-900
CHECKING 2000 H OR 2 YEARS (FIRST LIMIT -
REACHED) - VEHICLE SERVICING

REF# NECESSARIES
Do recommended 125, 250, 500, 1000 H

operations
ENGINE
BRAKING
Drain braking circuit
WATER PUMP
Replace seals
CHASSIS - TANK
Check the state of corrosion. Scrape,
sandpaper and repaint if necessary.
Table 7 : Checking 2000H
2-1-010 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
CHECKING 6 000 H -
ENGINE SERVICING

REF# NECESSARIES
Do recommended 125, 250, 500, 1000 and

2000 H operations
ENGINE
REAR AXLE
Drain rear axle and reducers
HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT
Replace hydraulic hoses
Table 8 : Checking 6 000H
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-1-011

WSP-900
WHEEL NUTS TIGHTENING
After a removal wheel, it's IMPERIOUS to tighten at the recommended wheel nuts tightening:
Recommended for wheels nuts tightening : 32 m.daN / 235 lbs.ft

Recommended pressure for wheels : Tires pressure (8 bar / 114 psi)
- 15 hours
- 50 hours
- 1000 hours
2-1-012 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-1-3- MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

GREASING, LUBRICATION AND LIQUIDS
IMPORTANT:
The choise of oils should be governed by the ambient temperature prevalling at the vehicle operating
site.
UNIT Label Capacity Norme Informations
ENGINE OIL Refer to engine manual (chapter 5)
ENGINE
COOLING SYSTEM Refer to engine manual (chapter 5)
(depending versions)
FUEL TANK DIESEL 80 liters Refer to engine manual (chapter 5)
GEAR BOX Refer to engine manual (chapter 5)

SAE90
REAR AXLE
5 liters API GL-5 -
(BODY)
MIL-L-2105B
REAR AXLE API GL-5
2 liters -
(REDUCER) MIL-L-2105B
Temperatures ambiantes Grade ISO
-40°C to +5°C - 40°F to 41°F 22
ISO 11158
HYDRAULIC TANK 75 liters -25°C to +20°C - 13°F to 68°F 32
category HV
-10°C to +40°C 14 °F to 104°F 46
-5°C to +55°C 23 °F to 131°F 68
SAE J 1703 f
BRAKING CIRCUIT
0,75 liter FMVSS 116- Synthetic oil DOT4
(depending versions)
DOT 4
Grease to lithium soap
Extreme pressure
GREASE - - Temperature : -30°C to +130°C (-22°F to
266°F)
NLGI 2
NOTE:
1- When replacing hydraulic parts or components, it is indispensable to filter and check the
hydraulic oil before reusing it, in order to avoid deterioration of the components.
2 - It's forbidden to mix two oils.
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-1-013

WSP-900
2-1-4- LUBRICATION
2-1-4.1.1.1. DRIVE LIVE GREASE LUBRICATION
(1) - Locate the front and rear drive line slip yokes and drive shaft universal joints.
(2) - Force grease into catch grease fitting until the old grease is purged from the component.
(3) - Clean up all excess grease.
1
5 3
2
4
1
3
2
1
1: Suspension
2: Swivel front axle grease fitting
3: Brake calliper grease fitting
4: Transmission shaft grease fitting
5: door hinge grease fitting
6: grease platform chains
7: Valve pillow block
Grease: WSA (ORAPI) TLD part number : 2700005
WARNING: DO NOT WORK UNDER THE TRACTOR BEFORE TAKING ALL THE
PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY AND MAKE SURE NO ONE WILL START THE ENGINE.
2-1-014 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-1-5-ENGINE (DEUTZ VERSION)
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-1-015

WSP-900
2-1-6-DIFFERENTIAL LUBRICANT CHECK, DRAIN, AND

REFILL.
a) Clean dirt and foreign matter from the area around the filler plug in the differential housing.
b) Slowly back the filler plug out. If seepage around the plug threads is noted, stop
immediately. Turn the plug back in to prevent lubricant drainage. This condition indicates that the
lubricant level is satisfactory. The bottom of the filler hole is the service fill level.
Note : Check fluid level only when fluid leakage is observed or suspected. Periodic inspection of
fluid level increases the risk of depleting fluid level or introducing contaminants into the fluid
through the filler port.
c) If replenishing fluid level only, fill to the filler plug level with hypoid gear lubricant
meeting Ford Motor Company specifications.
d) If refilling lubricant, remove the differential drain plug and allow the differential fluid to
drain into a suitable container. Clean accumulated residue from the bottom of the differential
housing or reducer.
Put the drain plug with a new seal and replenish fluid level as described in Step c)
Note : Draining fluid may be accomplished using a suction pump, but this method does not
remove all debris that may have settled to the bottom of the differential housing.
DRAIN
LUBE OIL FILE
LUBE OIL FILE

DRAIN
2-1-016 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-1-7-MAINTENANCE OF THE WATER PUMP

General precautions
1. Before inspecting the pump, please cut-off the main pump without rail. This is to avoid
dangers like sudden start of the pump due automatic operation etc.
2. Do not allow persons other than repair technicians to disassemble, repair, renovate,
etc. This may result in fire ignition; abnormal operations witch would be dangerous.
3. Check whether the pump is operating smoothly without vibrations.
4. Check the water level in the tank and the pressure at the suction inlet.
5. Compare the discharge pressure, power value during the operation with the value
printed on the nameplates on the pump, motor and check the operating load of the
pump.
6. Please note the pressure gauge displays the value, witch is the sun of the pump head
and the specific gravity.
7. Open the cock of the pressure gauge, vacuum gauge, during the measurement, and
close after the measurement. If it were left open always, then the instruments would
be damaged due to the abnormal pressure of the water hammer etc. For the
measurement of the pressure of the polluted water; measure via U-tube with water (if
the pressure is below 0.1 MPa (gauge)) or measure using the instrument with
diagram.
INSPECTION OF THE SHAFT SEAL
Mechanical seal
1. After implementing the priming completely, start the operation. Please avoid the idle
operation.
2. Confirm that there is no abnormal noise, vibration, and generation during the
operation.
3. Since the mechanism of the mechanical seal is in such a way that, the tight sealing is
achieved by liquid membrane is created on the sliding surfaces due the lubrication of
the liquid used, even though there is no leakage visible, there would be created on the
minute leakage of the liquid. Due to this mechanism, the leakage of the liquid may
occur due to the nature of the liquid, pressure, operation method etc. If you face liquid
leakage problem, you have to install the drain piping/ drain pan or replace the
mechanical seal upon consulting the dealer or our company. (Please refer to the
section 8-2 consumables for the replacement).
PRECAUTIONS IN CASE OF lONG-TERM STOPPAGE
1. There is a danger of damage to the pump not only in the case of long-term stoppage
of operation, but also due the freezing of the liquid during winter even if operation is
stopped for a short duration. Please remove the drain plug without fail and completely
drain out the liquid inside. After draining out the liquid, please fix back the drain plug
without fail.
2. Please follow 4) Operation of the pump, when resuming the operation.
PRECAUTIONS FOR LONG-TERM STORRAGE
1. Please implement 2) Unpacking check without fail

2. Please ensure that foreign bodies do not enter into suction inlet and the discharge
outlet.
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-1-017

WSP-900
BLANK PAGE
2-1-018 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-2-TROUBLE SHOOTING
2-2-1- HYDRAULIC AND ELECTRIC DIAGRAM
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-01

WSP-900
BLANK PAGE
2-2-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-2-2- HOW TO READ A DIAGRAM
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-03

WSP-900
ELECTRICAL FILE
COMPRISING A SET OF A4 FORMAT FOLIOS (1 FOLIO - 1 SHEET)
2-2-2.1.1. DRAWING DESIGNATION

FILE INDEX
TOTAL NUMBER OF FOLIOS

PRODUCTION PLANT
VEHICLE TYPE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
NBL / CH / TF7 / TMX / TPX / etc... FOLIO ORDER
FILE REFERENCE
Fig 1 : Drawing designation
MODIFICATION MADE AFTER LIVING THE

CREATION DATE FACTORY PAGE REFERENCE
DRAWN BY
NOTE: AT EACH MODIFICATION MADE TO THE VEHICLE AFTER LEAVING THE FACTORY
THE FILE IS INDEXED AND THE CATALOGUE REVISION DATE IS CHANGED.
14 FOLIOS FOR THIS
DRAWING
VEHICLE: TPX200 N° 56 D 154

FOLIO 1
MODIFICATION NUMBER B
Fig 2 : Numbering
2-2-04 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-2-2.1.2. IDENTIFICATION ON THE FOLIO
A 'SCALE', FROM 1 TO 20, LOCATED AT THE TOP OF THE FOLIO SEPARATES THE FOLIO INTO
FICTIVE COLUMNS
Fig 3 : Columns
2-2-2.1.3. READING THE DIAGRAM
A) CONNECTION BETWEEN FOLIOS
Fig 4 : Between folios
ARROWS FOR FOLLOWING THE DIAGRAM FROM ONE FOLIO TO THE NEXT
EACH ARRON HAS A (*.*) TYPE IDENTIFICATION (1 - 12)
TO FOLIO NUMBER TO COLUMN NUMBER
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-05

WSP-900
Fig 5 : Diagram specimen 1
2-2-06 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-07

WSP-900
2-2-2.1.4.COMPOSANTS
ALL THE COMPONENTS ARE SHOWN IN THEIR REST POSITION

THAT IS NON-ACTIVED
DISTRIBUTION BOARD SWITCHED OFF
2-2-2.1.4.1. RELAY
SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION OF A RELAY COIL

MARKING KAX OR KMX DEPENDING ON THE
TYPE OF RELAY
Fig 7 : Relay
NF NORMALLY CLOSED OR OPENING CONTACTS
NO NORMALLY OPEN OR CLOSING CONTACTS
THE PART NUMBER CAN BE FOUND AT THE BOTTOM OF THE FOLIO UNDER THE RELAY
THE PART NUMBER THE COIL TO ITS CONTACT
SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION OF THE CONTACTS
NORMALLY OPEN: NO
CLOSED WHEN THE RELAY IS ENERGISED
Fig 8 : Contact
2-2-08 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
NORMALLY CLOSED: NF
OPEN WHEN THE RELAY IS ENERGISED
Fig 9 : NC contact
NOTE:A KA CONTACTS CORRESPOND TO A KA COIL.

A KM CONTACT CORRESPONDS TO A KM COIL.
ALL THE CONTACTS IN ONE RELAY ARE MARKED WITH THE SAME PART NUMBER AS THE
RELAY.
EXAMPLE: A COIL MARKED KA15 -> ALL THE CONTACTS CONNECTED WITH THIS PART NUMBER
ARE MARKED KA15.
NEXT TO EACH CONTACT THERE IS A TEXT REFERRING OF THE RELAY CONTROLLING THE
CONTACT.
KA6 RELAY CONTACT
REFERENCE TO THE COIL SITUATION ON

FOLIO 1 - COLUMN 8
Fig 10 : Relay contact
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-09

WSP-900
2-2-010 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-011

WSP-900
2-2-2.1.4.2. TIMER
STATIC TIMER (MUR 3 type)
TIMING RETARDED ON SWITCHING ON.

WHEN THE TIMER IS SWITCHED ON, IT RETARDS THE PASSAGE OF THE CURRENT FOR A TIME
T (adjustable).
REPRESENTATION
Fig 13 : Timer
ASSOCIATED CONTACT
NORMALLY CLOSED OR OPEN

CONTACT
CLOSED IN THEIR REST
POSITION
NORMALLY OPEN OR CLOSING

CONTACT
Fig 14 : Timer contact OPEN WHEN THE RELAY IS AT
REST
SAME TYPE OF PART

NUMBERING AS THE RELAYS
2-2-012 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
TIMER (MUR3 type)
TIMING RETARDED ON OPENING.

WHEN THE Y1 CONTROL IS SWITCHED ON THE CONTACTS CHANGE STATE IMMEDIATELY
WHEN THE SUPPLY TO THE Y1 CONTROL IS CUT OFF THE CONTACTS REMAIN IN THEIR REST
PREVIOUS TIME T AND THEY RETURN TO THEIR REST POSITION.
REPRESENTATION
Fig 15 : MUR timer
A1 PERMANENT SUPPLY.
A2 GROUND.
Y1 CONTROL SUPPLY.
NORMALLY CLOSED OR OPEN

CONTACT.
CLOSED IN THEIR REST
POSITION.
NORMALLY OPEN OR CLOSING

CONTACT.
OPEN WHEN THE RELAY IS AT
REST.
Fig 16 : Timer contact
SAME TYPE OF PART

NUMBERING AS THE RELAYS.
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-013

WSP-900
2-2-014 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-015

WSP-900
2-2-2.1.4.3. SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION
PRESS BUTTON
CLOSING TYPE
OPENING TYPE
Fig 19 : Push button
ROTATING KNOB
CLOSING TYPE
MAINTAINED POSITION
CLOSING TYPE
UNSTABLE POSITION
OPENING TYPE
MAINTAINED POSITION
OPENING TYPE
UNSTABLE POSITION
Fig 20 : Rotating knob
MANIPULATOR
2 DIRECTIONS
MAINTAINED POSITION
2 DIRECTIONS
UNSTABLE POSITION
Fig 21 : Manipulator
2-2-016 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
CIRCUIT BREAKER
Fig 22 : Circuit breaker
PRESSURE SWITCH
Fig 23 : Pressure switch
TEMPERATURE SWITCH
Fig 24 : Temp sensor
DIVERS SENSORS
INDUCTION PROBE
Fig 25 : Induction probe
LIMIT SWITCH
Fig 26 : Limit switch
OPTICAL SENSOR
Fig 27 : Optical sensor
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-017

WSP-900
BATTERY
Fig 28 : Battery
ENGINE
Fig 29 : Engine
SOCKET AND PLUG ASSEMBLY
Fig 30 : Socket and plug
DIODE
Fig 31 : Diode
ZENER DIODE
Fig 32 : Zener diode
FUSE
Fig 33 : Fuse
ELECTRO-DISTRIBUTOR
Fig 34 : Electro distributor
SELECTOR SWITCH
LEVER SWITCH
MAINTAINED POSITION
LEVER SWITCH
2 MAINTAINED POSITIONS
LEVER SWITCH
3 MAINTAINED POSITIONS
LEVER SWITCH
2 RETURN TO CENTRE POSITIONS
Fig 35 : Lever switches
2-2-018 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
HYDRAULIC FILE
Hydraulics diagrams and symbols contained on the following pages comply with standard:
- ISO 1219-1: and ISO 1219: 1976 (previous regulation). ISO 1219 establishes principles for the use of
symbols and specifies basic symbols and rules for devising functional symbols. It also includes examples
of functional symbols.
- ISO 3511-1: 1977, Process measurement control functions and instrumentation — Symbolic
representation.
- ISO 128: 1982, Technical drawings — General principles of presentation.
- ISO 5598: 1985, Fluid power systems and components — Vocabulary.
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL APPLICATION
5.1 BASIC SYMBOLS
5.1.1 Line
5.1.1.1 — Continuous.
5.1.1.2 —Long dashes.

flow lines
5.1.1.3 — Short Dashes.
Mechanical connections (shafts, levers,

5.1.1.4 — Double.
piston rods).
— Long chain thin Enclosure for several components

5.1.1.5
(optional use). assembled in one unit.
5.1.2 Circle, semi-circle.

As a rule, energy conversion units (pump,
5.1.2.1
compressor, motor).
5.1.2.2 Measuring instruments.
5.1.2.3 Non-return link, roller, etc.
5.1.2.4 Mechanical link, roller, etc.
5.1.2.5 Semi-rotary actuator.
Fig 36 : Hydraulic basic symbols

2) L= Length of dash, E = Thickness of line, D = Space between lines
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-019

WSP-900
2-2-2.1.5.ISO FLUID POWER GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL APPLICATION
As a rule, control valves (valve) except

5.1.3 Square, rectangle.
for non return valves.
Conditioning apparatus (filter, separator,

5.1.4 Diamond.
lubricator, heat exchanger).
Miscellaneous
5.1.5
symbols.
5.1.5.1 Flow line connection.
5.1.5.2 Spring.
5.1.5.3 Restriction:
5.1.5.3.1 — Affected by viscosity.
5.1.5.3.2 — Unaffected by viscosity.
5.2 FUNCTIONAL
SYMBOLS.
The direction of flow and the nature of
5.2.1 Triangle:
the fluid.
5.2.1.1 — Solid. Hydraulic flow.
Pneumatic flow or exhaust to
5.2.1.2 — In outline only.
atmosphere.
5.2.2 Arrow. Indication of:
5.2.2.1 — Direction.
5.2.2.2 — Direction of rotation.
— Path and direction of flow through

5.2.2.3
valves.
For regulating apparatus as in 7.4 both

representations, with or without a tail to
the end of the arrow, are used without
distinction.
As a general rule the line perpendicular
to the head of the arrow indicates that
when the arrow moves, the interior path
always remains connected to the
corresponding exterior path.
Indication of the possibility of a
5.2.3 Sloping arrow.
regulation or a progressive variability.
Fig 37 : Hydraulic power symbols - Basic
2-2-020 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
USE OF THE EQUIPMENT
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
OR EXPLANATION OF THE SYMBOL
To convert mechanical
PUMPS AND
6.1 energy into hydraulic or
COMPRESSORS.
pneumatic energy.
Fixed capacity
6.1.1
hydraulic pump:
— With one direction

6.1.1.1
of flow.
— With two
6.1.1.2
directions of flow.
Variable
displacement
6.1.2 hydraulic pump:
The symbol is a
— With one direction
combination of 6.1.1.1
of flow.
and 5.2.3 (sloping arrow).
6.1.2.1
The symbol is a
— With two
6.1.2.2 combination of 6.1.1.2
directions of flow.
and 5.2.3 (sloping arrow).
Fixed capacity
compressor
6.1.3
(always one
direction of flow)
Fig 38 : Hydraulic symbols : Pumps and compressors
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-021

WSP-900
USE OF THE EQUIPMENT OR EXPLANATION OF THE
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
SYMBOL
6.2 MOTORS. To convert hydraulic or
pneumatic energy into
rotary mechanical energy.
6.2.1 Fixed capacity hydraulic
motor:
6.2.1.1 — With one direction of
flow.
6.2.1.2 — With two directions of

flow.
6.2.2 Variable displacement

hydraulic motor:
6.2.2.1 — With one direction of The symbol is a
flow. combination of 6.2.1.1 and
5.2.3 (sloping arrow).
6.2.2.2 — With two directions of The symbol is a
6.2.3 Fixed displacement
pneumatic motor:
6.2.3.1 — with one direction of flow
6.2.3.2 — with two directions of

flow

hydraulic motor:
6.2.4.1 — With one direction of The symbol is a
6.2.4.2 — With two directions of The symbol is a
6.2.5 Oscillating motor:
6.2.5.1 — Hydraulic.
6.2.5.2 — Pneumatic.
Fig 39 : Hydraulic symbols : Motors
2-2-022 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
SYMBOL
6.3 PUMP/MOTOR UNITS. Unit with two functions,
either as pump or as rotary
motor.
6.3.1 Fixed displacement
pump/motor unit:
6.3.1.1 — With reversal of the Functioning as pump or
direction of flow. motor according to direction
of flow.
6.3.1.2 — With one single Functioning as pump or
direction of flow. motor without change of
direction of flow.
6.3.1.3 — With two directions Functioning as pump or
of flow. motor with either direction of
flow.
pump/motor unit:
6.3.2.1 — With reversal of the The symbol is a combination
direction of flow. of 6.3.1.1 and 5.2.3 (sloping
arrow).
6.3.2.2 — With one single The symbol is a combination
direction of flow. of 6.3.1.2 and 5.2.3 (sloping
arrow).
6.3.2.3 — With two directions The symbol is a combination
of flow. of 6.3.1.3 and 5.2.3 (sloping
arrow).
6.4 VARIABLE SPEED Torque converter. Pump
DRIVE UNITS. and/or motor are variable
capacity. Remote drives see
12.2.
Fig 40 : Hydraulic symbols : Pump/Motors units
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-023

WSP-900
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
SYMBOL
6.5 CYLINDERS. Equipment to convert hydraulic or
pneumatic energy into linear
energy.
6.5.1 Single acting Detailed Simplified Cylinder in which the fluid
cylinder: pressure always acts in one and
the same direction (on the
extension stroke).
6.5.1.1 — Returned by an
unspecified force. General symbol when the method
of return is not specified.
6.5.1.2 — Returned by spring. Combination of the general

symbols 6.5.1.1 and 5.1.5.2
(spring).
6.5.2 Double acting cylinder: Cylinder in which pressure fluid
operates alternately in both
directions (extends and retracts
strokes).
6.5.2.1 — With single piston
rod.
6.5.2.2 — With double-ended

piston rod.
6.5.3 Differential cylinder. The action is dependent on the

difference between the effective
areas on each side of the piston.
6.5.4 Cylinder with cushion:
6.5.4.1 — With single fixed Cylinder incorporating fixed
cushion. cushion acting in one direction
only.
6.5.4.2 — With double fixed Cylinder with fixed cushion acting
cushion. in both directions.
6.5.4.3 — With single
adjustable cushion. The symbol is a combination of
6.5.4.1 and 5.2.3 (sloping arrow)
6.5.4.4 — With double
adjustable cushion. The symbol is combination of
6.5.4.2 and 5.2.3 (sloping arrow)
6.5.5 Telescopic cylinder:
6.5.5.1 — Single acting.
The fluid pressure always acts in
one and the same direction (on the
extend stroke).
6.5.5.2 — Double acting.
The fluid pressure operates
alternately in both directions
(extend and retract strokes).
Fig 41 : Hydraulic symbols : Cylinders

DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
SYMBOL
6.6 PRESSURE Detailed Simplified Equipment transforming a pressure
INTENSIFIERS: x into a higher pressure y.
6.6.1 — For one type of fluid.
E.g. a pneumatic pressure x is
transformed into a higher pneumatic
pressure y.
6.6.2 — For two types of fluid.
E.g. a pneumatic pressure x is
transformed into a higher hydraulic
pressure y.
6.7 AIR-OIL ACTUATOR. Equipment transforming a

pneumatic pressure into a
substantially equal hydraulic
pressure or vice versa.
Fig 42 : Hydraulic symbols : Pressure intensifiers
2-2-024 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
SYMBOL
7 CONTROL VALVES.
7.1 METHOD OF Made with one or more squares
REPRESENTATION OF 5.1.3 and arrows In hydraulic and
VALVES (EXCEPT 7.3 pneumatic circuit diagrams these
AND 7.6). units are normally shown in the
unoperated condition.
7.1.1 One single square. Indicates unit for controlling flow or
pressure, having in operation and
infinite number of possible
positions between its end
positions so as to vary the
conditions of flow across one or
more of its ports, thus ensuring the
chosen pressure and/or flow with
regard to the operating conditions
of the circuit.
7.1.2 Two or more squares. Indicate a directional control valve
having as many distinct positions
as there are squares. The pipe
connections are normally
represented as representing the
unoperated condition (see 7.1).
The operating positions are
deduced by imagining the boxes
to be displaced so that the pipe
connections correspond with the
ports of the box in question.
7.1.3 Simplified symbol for The number refers to a note on
valves in cases of the diagram in which the symbol
multiple repetition. for the valve is given in full.
7.2 DIRECTIONAL Units providing for the opening
CONTROL VALVES. (fully or restricted) or the closing of
one or more paths (represented by
several squares).
7.2.1 Flow paths: Square containing interior lines.
7.2.1.1 — One flow path.
7.2.1.2 — Two closed ports.
7.2.1.3 — Two flow paths.
7.2.1.4 — Two flow paths and one

closed port.
7.2.1.5 — Two flow paths with
cross connection.
7.2.1.6 — One flow path in a
bypass position, two
closed ports.
7.2.2 Non-throttling The unit provides distinct circuit
directional control valve. conditions each depicted by a
square.
7.2.2.1 Basic symbol for 2-position
directional control valve.
7.2.2.2 Basic symbol for 3-position
directional control valve.
7.2.2.3 A transitory but significant
condition between two distinct
positions is optionally represented
by a square with dashed ends.
Fig 43 : Hydraulic symbols : Control valves
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-025

WSP-900
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
SYMBOL
7.2.2.4 Designation: The first
figure in the
designation shows
the number of ports
(excluding pilot ports)
and the second
figure the number of
distinct positions.
7.2.2.5 Directional control Directional control valve
valve 2/2: with 2 ports and 2 distinct
positions.
7.2.2.5.1 — With manual
control.
7.2.2.5.2 — Controlled by
pressure operating
against a spring
(e.g., on air
unloading valve).
positions Indicating an
intermediate condition (see
7.2.2.3).
pressure in both
directions.
solenoid with return
spring.

positions.
7.2.2.7.1 — Controlled by Detailed
pressure in both
directions by means
of pilot valve (with
single solenoid and
spring return).
Simplified

positions.
pressure in both
directions.
Fig 44 : Hydraulic symbols : Control valves (2)
2-2-026 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
SYMBOL
7.2.3 Throttling The unit has 2 extreme
directional positions and an infinite
control. number of intermediate
conditions with varying
degrees of throttling.
All the symbols have parallel
lines along the length of the
boxes. For valves with
mechanical feedback see 9.3.
7.2.3.1
Showing the extreme
positions.
7.2.3.2 Showing the extreme positions
and a central (neutral)
position.
7.2.3.3 — With 2 ports (one
throttling orifice). For example: Tracer valve
plunger operated against a
return spring.
7.2.3.4 — With 3 ports (two For example: Directional
throttling orifices). control valve controlled by
pressure against a return
spring.
7.2.3.5 — With 4 ports For example: Tracer valve,
(four throttling plunger operated against a
orifices). return spring.
7.2.4 Electro-hydraulic A unit which accepts an
servo valve: analog electrical signal and
Electro-pneumatic provides a similar analog fluid
servo valve: power output.
7.2.4.1 — Single-stage.
— With direct operation.
7.2.4.2 — Two-stage with

mechanical
feedback. — With indirect pilot operation.
7.2.4.3 — Two-stage with

hydraulic feedback.
— With indirect pilot operation.
Fig 45 : Hydraulic symbols : Control valve control
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-027

WSP-900
USE OF THE EQUIPMENT OR EXPLANATION OF THE SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
7.3 NON-RETURN
VALVES, SHUTTLE Valves which allow free flow
VALVE, RAPID in one direction only.
EXHAUST VALVE.
7.3.1 Non-return valve.
7.3.1.1 — Free. Opens if the inlet pressure is
higher than the outlet
pressure.
7.3.1.2 — Spring loaded. Opens if the inlet pressure is
greater than the outlet
pressure plus the spring
pressure.
7.3.1.3 — Pilot controlled. As 7.3.1.1 but by pilot
control it is possible to
prevent.
7.3.1.3.1 — A pilot signal
closes the valve.
7.3.1.3.2 — A pilot signal

opens the valve.
7.3.1.4 — With restriction.

Unit allowing free flow in one
direction but restricted flow
in the other.
7.3.2 Shuttle valve. The inlet port connected to

the higher pressure is
automatically connected to
the outlet port while the
other inlet port is closed.
7.3.3 Rapid exhaust
valve. When the inlet port is
unloaded the outlet port is
freely exhausted.
Fig 46 : Hydraulic symbols : Non-return valves exhaust valves...
2-2-028 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
7.4 PRESSURE Units ensuring the control of pressure.

CONTROL Represented by one single square as
VALVES. in 7.1.1 with one arrow (the tail to the
arrow may be placed at the end of the
arrow). For interior controlling
conditions see 9.2.4.3.
7.4.1 Pressure control
valve:
7.4.1.1 — 1 throttling orifice
normally closed. General symbols.
7.4.1.2 — 1 throttling orifice

normally opens.
7.4.1.3 — 2 throttling
orifices normally
closed.
7.4.2 Pressure relief Inlet pressure is controlled by opening

valve the exhaust port to the reservoir or to
(safety valve): atmosphere against an opposing force
(for example a spring).
7.4.2.1 — with remote pilot The pressure at the inlet port is limited
Control. as in 7.4.2 or to that corresponding to
the setting of a pilot control.
7.4.3 Proportional
pressure relief.
Inlet pressure is limited to a value
proportional to the pilot pressure (see
9.2.4.1.3).
7.4.4 Sequence valve.

When the inlet pressure overcomes
the opposing force of the spring, the
valve opens permitting flow from the
outlet port.
7.4.5 Pressure regulator A unit which, with a pressure variable

or reducing valve inlet pressure, gives substantially
(reducer of constant output pressure provided that
pressure): The inlet pressure remains higher than
the required outlet pressure.
7.4.5.1 — Without relief
port.
7.4.5.2 — Without relief port

with remote control. As in 7.4.5.1, but the outlet pressure is
dependent on the control pressure.
7.4.5.3 — With relief port.
Fig 47 : Hydraulic symbols : Non-return valves exhaust valves... (2)
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-029

WSP-900
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
7.4.5.4. — With relief port,

with remote control. As in 7.4.5.3, but the
outlet pressure is
dependent on the control
pressure.
7.4.6 Differential
pressure regulator. The outlet pressure is
reduced by a fixed
amount with respect to
the inlet pressure.
7.4.7 Proportional
pressure regulator. The outlet pressure is
reduced by a fixed ratio
with respect to the inlet
pressure (see 9.2.4.1.3).
7.5 FLOW CONTROL Units ensuring control of

VALVES. flow excepting 7.5.3
positions and method of
representation as 7.4.
7.5.1 Throttle valve: Simplified symbol (does
not indicate the control
method or the state of the
valve).
7.5.1.1 — With manual Detailed symbol
control. (indicates the control
method of the state of the
valve).
7.5.1.2 — With mechanical
control against a
return spring
(braking valve).
7.5.2 Flow control valve: Detailed Simplified Variations in inlet

pressure do not affect the
rate of flow.
7.5.2.1 — With fixed output.
7.5.2.2 — With fixed output

and relief port to
As 7.5.2.1 but with relief
reservoir.
for excess flow.
Fig 48 : Hydraulic symbols : Control valves
2-2-030 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
7.5.2.3 — With variable

output. As 7.5.2.1 but with arrow
5.2.3 added to the
symbol of restriction.
7.5.2.4 — With variable
output and relief port
to reservoir. As 7.5.2.3 but with relief
for excess flow.
7.5.3 Flow dividing valve.

The flow is divided into
two flows in a fixed ratio
substantially independent
of pressure variations.
7.6 SHUT-OFF VALVE. Simplified symbol.

8 ENERGY
TRANSMISSION
AND
CONDITIONING.
8.1 SOURCES OF
ENERGY.
8.1.1 Pressure source. Simplified general
symbol.
8.1.1.1 Hydraulic pressure Symbols to be used
source. when the nature of the
source should be
indicated.
8.1.1.2 Pneumatic pressure
source.
8.1.2 Electric motor.

Symbol 113 in IEC
Publication 117.2.
8.1.3 Heat engine.
8.2 FLOW LINES AND

CONNECTIONS.
8.2.1 Flow line:
8.2.1.1 — Working line,
return line and feed
line.
8.2.1.2 — Pilot control line.
Fig 49 : Hydraulic symbols : Shut-off valve, sources of energy, flow lines
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-031

WSP-900
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
8.2.1.3 — Drain or bleed line.
8.2.1.4 — Flexible pipe. Flexible hose, usually

connecting moving parts.
8.2.1.5 — Electric line.
8.2.2 Pipeline junction.
8.2.3 Crossed Pipelines.

Not connected.
8.2.4 Air bleeds.
8.2.5 Exhaust port:

8.2.5.1 — Plain with no
provision for connection.
8.2.5.2 — Threaded for
connection.
8.2.6 Power take-off: On equipment or lines, for
energy take-off or
measurement.
8.2.6.1 — Plugged.
8.2.6.2 — With take-off line.
8.2.7 Quick-acting coupling:
8.2.7.1 — Connected, without
mechanically opened
non-return valve.
8.2.7.2 — Connected, with
mechanically opened
non-return valves.
8.2.7.3 — Uncoupled, with open
end.
8.2.7.4 — uncoupled, closed by

free non-return valve
(see 7.3.1.1).
8.2.8 Rotary connection: Line junction allowing angular
movement in service.
8.2.8.1 — One way.
8.2.8.2 — Three way.
8.2.9 Silencer.
8.3 RESERVOIRS.
8.3.1 Reservoir open to
atmosphere:
8.3.1.1 — With inlet pipe above
fluid level.
8.3.1.2 — With inlet pipe below
fluid level.
8.3.1.3 — With a header line.
8.3.2 Pressurized reservoir.
8.4 ACCUMULATORS.
The fluid is maintained under

pressure by a spring, weight
or compressed gas (air,
nitrogen, etc.).
Fig 50 : Hydraulic symbols : adaptations, quick-connections, silencer, tanks, and accumulators
2-2-032 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
8.5 FILTERS, WATER

TRAPS,
LUBRICATORS
AND
MISCELLANEOUS
APPARATUS.
8.5.1 Filter or strainer.
8.5.2 Water trap.

8.5.2.1 — With manual
control drain.
8.5.2.2 — Automatically
drained.
8.5.3 Filter with water

trap:
8.5.3.1 — With manual
control.
Combination of 8.5.1 and
8.5.2.1.
8.5.3.2 — automatically
drained Combination of 8.5.1 and
8.5.2.2.
8.5.4 Air dryer.
A unit drying air (for

example, by chemical
means).
8.5.5 Lubricator.
Small quantities of oil are
added to the air passing
through the unit, in order to
lubricate equipment
receiving the air.
8.5.6 Conditioning unit. Consisting of filter,

pressure regulator,
pressure gage and
lubricator.
8.5.6.1 — Detailed symbol.
8.5.6.2 — Simplified symbol.
Fig 51 : Hydraulic symbols : Filters
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-033

WSP-900
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL SYMBOL
8.6 HEAT EXCHANGERS. Apparatus for heating or

cooling the circulating
fluid.
8.6.1 Temperature
controller.
The fluid temperature is
maintained between two
predetermined values.
The arrows indicate that
heat may be either
introduced or dissipated.
8.6.2 Cooler. The arrows in the diamond

indicate the extraction of
heat.
8.6.2.1
— Without representation
of the flow lines of the
coolant.
8.6.2.1
— Indicating the flow lines
of the coolant.
8.6.2.1 Heater.
The arrows in the diamond
indicate the introduction of
heat.
9. CONTROL
MECHANISMS.
9.1 Mechanical
Components.
9.1.1 Rotating shaft:
9.1.1.1 — In one direction. The arrow indicates
rotation.
9.1.1.2 — In either direction.
9.1.2 Detent. A device for maintaining a

given position.
9.1.3 Locking device.
* The symbol for unlocking
control is inserted in the
square.
9.1.4 Over-center device. Prevents the mechanism

from stopping in a dead
center position.
9.1.5 Pivoting devices:
9.1.5.1 — Simple.
9.1.5.2 — With traversing lever.
9.1.5.3 — With fixed fulcrum.
Fig 52 : Hydraulic symbols : Heat exchangers
2-2-034 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
9.2 CONTROL The symbols representing

METHODS. control methods are
incorporated in the
symbol of the controlled
apparatus, to which they
should be adjacent. For
apparatus with several
squares the actuation of
the control makes
effective the square
adjacent to it.
9.2.1 Muscular control: General symbol (without
indication of control type).
9.2.1.1 — By pushbutton.
9.2.1.2 — By lever.
9.2.1.3 — By pedal.
9.2.2 Mechanical control:

9.2.2.1 — By plunger or
tracer.
9.2.2.2 — By spring.
9.2.2.3 — By roller.
9.2.2.4 — By roller,
operating in one
direction only.
9.2.3 Electrical control:
9.2.3.1 — By solenoid.
9.2.3.1.1
— With one winding.
9.2.3.1.2 — With two windings
operating in opposite
directions.
Fig 53 : Hydraulic symbols : Control methods
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-035

WSP-900
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL SYMBOL
9.2.3.1.3 — with two windings

operating in a variable
way progressively,
operating in opposite
direction
9.2.3.2 — by electric motor
9.2.4 Control by
application or
release of pressure
9.2.4.1 Direct acting control:
9.2.4.1.1 — by application of
pressure
9.2.4.1.2 — by release of
pressure
9.2.4.1.3 — by different In the symbol the larger
control areas rectangle represents the
larger control area, i.e.,
the priority phase
9.2.4.2 Indirect control, pilot General symbol for pilot
actuated: directional control valve
9.2.4.2.1 — by application of
pressure
9.2.4.2.2 — by release of
pressure
9.2.4.3 Interior control paths
The control paths are
inside the unit
9.2.5 Combined control:

9.2.5.1 — by solenoid and The pilot directional
pilot directional valve is actuated by the
valve solenoid
9.2.5.2 — by solenoid or
Either may actuate the
pilot directional
control independently
valve
Fig 54 : Hydraulic symbols : Control methods (2)
2-2-036 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-2-3- ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-037

WSP-900
BLANK PAGE
2-2-038 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-2-4- HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-039

WSP-900
BLANK PAGE
2-2-040 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
FAULT FINDING GUIDE FOR DIESEL ENGINE
2-2-5- STARTING PROBLEMS

2-2-5.1.1.LOW CRANKING SPEED
Low cranking speed
Incorrect grade of lubricating Check with the user or his supplier that the oil brand and
oil viscosity is in accordance with the approved list. See the
relevant service literature.
Battery capacity low Ensure that the battery is to the manufacturer's specification.
(voltage) Check the battery capacity and replace if necessary.
Bad electrical connections Check for corroded or loose connections. Clean, tighten or
between battery, starter remake connections as necessary using the correct cable
motor and earth specification.
Faulty starter motor Check the voltage drop at the starter motor with the starter
switched on. Check with manufacturer's specification.
Voltage drop normal. Voltage drop excessive.
Replace or repair starter Have auto-electrician

motor. investigate further.
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-041

WSP-900
2-2-5.1.2.COLD ENGINE WILL NOT START
Cold engine will not start
Incorrect use of cold starting Refer the engine handbook, check that the book being used is
equipment. relevant to the engine type with the problem.
Faulty cold starting Check the continuity of the electrical circuit in the cold starting
equipment equipment by an indicated voltage at the heater terminals
when switched on.
Check the right working of the preheating spark plug. When

the 12 V glow plugs are first switched on, there is an initial
current of about 40 Amperes settling to about 10 Amperes
after about 10 seconds
Some in-line fuel injection pumps are fitted with an excess

fuel device. Check that the remote controls are operating
satisfactorily
Incorrect grade of fuel Check for corroded or loose connections. Clean, tighten or
remake connections as necessary using the correct cable
specification.
2-2-5.1.3.HOT ENGINE WILL NOT START
Warm engine will not start
Injection pump excessive Remove pump for attention by specialised workshop or fit
leaks. replacement pump.
2-2-042 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-2-5.1.4.ENGINE IS DIFFICULT TO START
Engine is difficult to start
Air in the fuel system Bleed the system of air as in the relevant service litterature
Restricted fuel feed pipe or Trace and rectify restriction or blockage.

blocked vent in the fuel tank.
Choked fuel filter. Renew fuel filter element(s)
Defective fuel lift pump Check lift pump operation, if insufficient fuel is flowing, repair
or replace fuel lift pump.
Poor compression. See available section
Sticking valves or incorrect Adjust valve tip clearance according to the relevant manual.
valves tip clearance. Inspect valves, guides, springs and rocker assembly for
wear.
Incorrect fuel pump timing or Check all aspects of valve and fuel pump timing according to
incorrect valve timing the relevant manuel
Exhaust pipe restriction. Examine the complete exhaust system, checking for dents or
kinks in the pipes, check for broken mufflers.
Defective or incorrect Check that the correct part number is fitted. Replace or
atomisers. service all the atomisers.
Defective fuel injection pump. Remove pump for attention by specialised workshop or fit
replacement pump.
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-043

WSP-900
2-2-5.1.5.ENGINE STARTS AND STOPS
Engine starts and stops
Insufficient fuel in tank Ensure that the fuel level in the tank is sufficient, it too low it
may allow air to be drawn into the system at interval,
consequently stopping the engine.
Air in fuel system Bleed the fuel system.
Chack fuel pipes for hairline Rectify as necessary.

cracks or loose connections
allowing air into the system.
Blocked fuel tank vent. Check and rectify as necessary.
Choked fuel filter(s) Check and re-new as necessary.
Restriction in fuel return pipe. Ensure that fuel return pipe from the injection pump is not
restricting fuel return in any way. IE : blocked, kinked, ... as
this will cause the engine to stop as rev/min is raised.
Restriction in the induction Check air cleaner/element, re-new if dirty. Ensure that no
system. restriction is present in induction piping.
Sticking atomiser/s Remove for attention of specialised workshop.
Exhaust pipe restriction. Check and clear restriction.
2-2-044 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-2-5.1.6.ENGINE WILL NOT START
Engine will not start
Insufficient fuel in tank. Ensure that there is sufficient fuel in tank.
Faulty stop control operation Ensure that the engine stop control operation is functionning,
and is in run position.
Broken fuel injection pump Check by removing the fuel injection pump inspection plate,
drive turn the engine and check if the inside of the pump is rotating.
If not, remove it and check the quill (drive) shaft, the drive
(timing) gears and the fuel injection pump drive arrangement.
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-045

WSP-900
2-2-5.1.7.ENGINE MISFIRE
Engine misfires
Restriction in the induction Check air cleaner/element condition. Chack for dents or kinks in
manifold the hoses and pipes and examine the induction manifold for any
obstruction.
Incorrect type, or crossed high N° 1 outlet on fuel injection pumps is given in relevant service
pressures pipes. literature. Check rotation of pump and engine firing order for
correct pipe fitting.
Defective fuel lift pump. Remove outlet pipe and check there is sufficient fuel available
from the lift pump, if in doubt replace unit.
Broken or weak valve springs, Check lift pump operation, if insufficient fuel is flowing, repair or
stiking valves, or incorrect valve replace fuel lift pump.
tip clearances.
Poor compression. See available section
Sticking valves or incorrect Adjust valve tip clearance according to the relevant manual.
valves tip clearance. Inspect valves, guides, springs and rocker assembly for wear.
Incorrect fuel pump timing or Check all aspects of valve and fuel pump timing according to the
incorrect valve timing relevant manuel
Exhaust pipe restriction. Examine the complete exhaust system, checking for dents or
kinks in the pipes, check for broken mufflers.
Defective or incorrect atomisers. Check that the correct part number is fitted. Replace or service
all the atomisers.
Defective fuel injection pump. Remove pump for attention by specialised workshop or fit
replacement pump.
2-2-046 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-2-5.1.8.LEAK OF POWER
Engine leak of power
-
Confirm the complaint by a road TEST CONDITIONS
test, ensuring that the engine - Ensure vehicle or machine load is not excessive
reaches normal operating - Tyre sizes and pressures are not recommended
temperature and that the test - The road wheels rotate freely and no brakes are
conditions are in order binding
- Ensure axle drive ratios are tocorrect specification
- The clutch or free-wheeling system is functioning
correctly
- Consider accessories fitted (wind resistance with
vehicle)
Stop control Ensure it is in the fully “run” position
Sticking engine speed control or Check that all engine speed control linkages are free and
its restricted movment that maximum movement is acheived
Restriction in the induction Check air cleaner / element condition. Check for dents or
system. kinks in the hoses and pipes and examine the induction
manifold for any obstructions
Air in fuel system, restricted fuel Refer to the section “Engine is difficult to start”
feed pipe, choked fuel filters or
bloqued fuel tank vent
Defective fuel pump Remove outlet pipe and check there is sufficient fuel
available from the lift pump, if in doubt replace the unit
Incorrect fuel injection pump Check all aspects of fuel pump and valve timing according
timing or incorrect valve timing to the relevant service literature
Exhaust système restriction Examine the complete exhaust system, checking for dents
or kinks in the pipes, check for broken mufflers
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-047

WSP-900
Poor boost pressure (where Check turbocharger for :
turbocharger is fitted) - Excessive air inlet depression
- All induction pipes and joints are in order
- Restricted exhaust from turbine
- Low or high air delivery pressure
- Low oil pressure and/or poor oil drain
- Fuel injection pump fuelling
On boost controled engines, ensure there are no leaks on
the pipe from induction manifold to fuel pump
Defective or incorrect type Check that the correct part number is fitted. Remove the
atomisers equipment to the specialised fuel injection workshop for
Defective or incorrect type fuel checking and servicing
injection pump
Incorrect valve tip clearances See relevant service literature for correct valve tip
clearance
Poor compression Refer to the « Poor compression » section
2-2-048 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-2-5.1.9.EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
Excessive fuel consumption
Fuel leaks With the engine stopped, check the low pressure fuel pipes for
leaks and rectify
Dilution of the lubricating oil by A cold running engine can cause solid fuel to wash down the
fuel oil cylinder bores
A defective lift pump diaphragm can allow fuel to leak into the
engine sump (pan)
Fautly seals on drive shaft of fuel injection pump may allow fuel
oil to drain into the engine timing case or auxilliary drive and
then into the lubrication oil
Restriction in the induction Check air cleaner / element condition. Check for dents or kinks
system in the hoses or pipes and examine the induction manifold for
any obstructions
Sticking valves or incorrect Refer to the relevant service literature to check valve spring
valve tip clearances length at a known load. Adjust valve tip clearances
Defective cold starting aid Check that the thermostart is not leaking fuel into the induction
(thermostart) manifold during normal operating conditions – See section
“Cold engine will not start”
Incorrect fuel injection pump Check all aspects of fuel pump and valve timing according to
timing or incorrect valve timing the relevant service literature
Defective or incorrect type Check that the correct part number is fitted. Remove the
atomisers / type fuel injection equipment to specialised fuel injection workshop for checking
pump and servicing
Poor compressions Refer to the section « Poor compression »
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-049

WSP-900
2-2-5.1.10.BLACK EXHAUST
Black exhaust
Restriction in the induction Check air cleaner/element condition. Check for dents or kinks
manifold in the hoses or pipes and examine the induction manifold for
any obstructions
Poor boost pressure (Where Check turbocharger for :

turbocharger is fitted) - Excessive air inlet depression
- All induction pipes and joints are in order
- Low air delivery pressure
- Restricted exhaust from turbine
- Fuel injection pump fuelling
- Low oil pressure and/or poor oil drain
See relevant service literature
Exhaust system restriction Examine the complete exhaust system checking for dents or
kinks in the pipes, check for broken mufflers
Defective « THERMOSTART » Check that the “thermostart” is not leaking fuel into the
(cold starting aid) induction manifold during normal operation conditions
Defective or incorrect atomisers Check that the correct part number is fitted. Remove the
Defective or incorrect fuel equipment to the specialised fuel injection workshop for
injection pump checking and servicing
Incorrect fuel injection pump Check all aspects of fuel pump and valve timing according to
timing or incorrect valve timing the relevant service literature
Incorrect valve tip clearances Adjust valve tip clearances according to the relevant service
literature
Poor compressions Refer to the section « Poor compression »
2-2-050 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-2-5.1.11.ENGINE KNOCKING
Engine knocking
Incorrect type or grade of fuel Check that the fuel being used is to the correct specification.
See relevant service literature
Defective or incorrect type of Determine the knock is a fautly atomiser or not. Slacken off the
atomisers high pressure pipe of each atomiser in turn to eliminate
“knocking” whilst running engine at high idle. If the knock cease
on the slackening off of a particular atomiser fuel pipe then that
atomiser is probably fautly
Broken valve springs / Sitcking Refer to the relevant service literature to check valve spring
valves length at a given load. Adjust valve tip clearances
Incorrect valve tip clearances
Incorrect fuel pump timing or Check all aspects of fuel pump and valve timing according to
incorrect valve timing the relevant service literature
Incorrect piston height Remove cylinder head, check for any damage and check the
height of the pistons when at T.D.C relative to the top of the
cylinder block. See the relevant service literature
Broken, worm or sticking piston Repair the engine

rings, piston “pick-up”,
beginning to seize worn cylinder
bores
Worn or damaged bearings, Repair the engine

gudgeon (wrist) pin bearing
worn
Camshaft end float ecessive Repair the engine
Knock or rattle, possibly Repair the engine

rxcessive backlash on timing
gears
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-051

WSP-900
2-2-5.1.12.BLUE – WHITE EXHAUST
Blue – white smoke exhaust
Incorrect grade of lubrication oil Ensure that the oil being used is of the correct specification
i.e MIL-L-2104C or MIL-L-46152
Fautly cold start equipment Check for leaking cold start unit. Check that excess fuel device
is not permanently engaged (in line pumps only)
Restriction in the induction Check air cleaner, re-new if dirty. Ensure that no restriction is
system possible in induction piping
Incorrect fuel pump or valve Check timing according to relevant service literature
timing
Cold running Check coolant temperature / thermostat
Worn or damaged valve stem oil Remove cylinder head and check, replace with new parts as
deflectors, valve guides or valve necessary
stems
Poor compression Refer to the section « Poor compression »
« Blown » or leaking cylinder Repair engine

head gasket piston « picking
up » beginning to seize broken,
worn or sticking piston rings
worn cylinder bores
2-2-052 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-2-5.1.13.LUBRICATION OIL CONSUMPTION
Lubrication oil consumption
Oil leaks Examine for leaks with the engine under normal operating
conditions and rectify where necessary
Laisser aux segments neufs le temps de se roder

dans les chemises de cylindres. La durée à prévoir
dépend de la manière dont est utilisé le moteur et
des conditions dans lesquelles il travaille
New or rebuild engines bot fully Allows time for new piston rings to become bedded in to the
bedded in cylinder liners. The amount of time to allow will depend upon
the way the engine is used and the conditions under which it is
operating
Incorrect viscosity oil, dilued ao Drain the oil and refill with the engine manufacturers
inferior oil recommanded grade and viscosity of oil to comply with the
machines ambient and working conditions. Change the oil filter
element
Oil level too high (can also Check for improper practices of checking the oil level, ie
cause overheating) engine cold, drain-down time and engine/machine standard
level. If the complaint persist, check that the dipstick and tube
are of the correct part number
Engine not breathing Check all breather pipes and any breather oil strainers and oil
return pipes in the breather system
Communication between oil feed Check very carefully the rubbing spot of any chafing pipes.
pipe and fuel oil pipe Lubricating oil under pressure can flow from its own pipe into a
fuel pipe with a lower pressure throught the smallest of pin
holes
Oil carry-over by ancillary Oil carry-over by an air compressor can usually be indicated by
equipment an unusual amount of oil draining from the air reservoir
Fautly oil coolers Any leak from the oil pressure side into the coolant can usually
be detected by the presence of oil in the coolant
Consumption by the fuel This would normally be expected to show itself in some other
injection pump form, such as engine performance or exhaust condition
Blocked induction system Check air cleaner/element and induction pipework for
restriction
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-053

WSP-900
Glazed bores May be the result of long idling periods – Deglaze bores and
re-ring pistons
Worn, broken or stuck piston Dismantle and repair, inspecting for causes of the conditions
rings, worn pistons and cylinder found
bores, worn valve guide bores,
vorn valve stem seals
2-2-054 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-2-5.1.14.POOR COMPRESSION
Poor compression
Restriction in the induction Check air cleaner/element, re-new if dirty. Ensure that no
system restriction is possible in induction piping and manifold
Sticking valves, broken valve Check re-set valve tip clearances as necessary
springs or incorrect valve tip
clearances
Incorrect valve timing Check timing as instructed in relevant service literature
If compression figures show a Remove cylinder head and check gasket, valves, seats and
particularly low figure on one guides . Fit new parts as necessary
cylinder, then the most likely
cause is a cylinder head gasket
leaking or poor valve seating
Pitted valves and seats . Worn

valve stems and guides
Incorrect piston heights Check piston heights, ensure that tolerance is within
specification
Broken, worn or sticking piston Repair engine

rings. Worn cylinder bores
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-2-055

WSP-900
BLANK PAGE
2-2-056 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-3-REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
(OF COMPONENTS)
2-3-1-WHEELS
WHEEL MOUNTING
• Use bolts and nuts according to the vehicle manufacturers instructions (flat, spherical, conical, thread).
• Tighten bolts in sequence per the following design up to the prescribed torque.
• Use the special key with centrifugal weight for loosening only, not for tightening.
• Check the torque of wheel screws app. 50km after the mounting and at regular intervals.
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-3-01

WSP-900
BLANK PAGE
2-3-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-4-REPAIR
2-4-1-TIGHTENING TORQUE
GENERAL
The following reference charts and tables are included in this manual to assist the equipment user in the
performance of repairs, maintenance procedures, and the diagnosis of problems.
The information provided covers fastener torque values.
Observe the following precautions when installing fasteners:
CAUTION: DO NOT USE THESE VALUES IF A DIFFERENT TORQUE VALUE OR TIGHTENING

PROCEDURE IS LISTED FOR A SPECIFIC APPLICATION.
THE TORQUE VALUES LISTED ARE FOR GENERAL USE ONLY.
FASTENERS SHOULD BE REPLACED WITH THE SAME OR HIGHER GRADE AND TIGHTENED TO
THE STRENGTH OF THE ORIGINAL.
MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE FASTENER THREADS ARE CLEAN AND PROPERLY ENGAGED TO
AVOID POSSIBLE FAILURE WHEN TIGHTENED.
NOTE: "LUBRICATED" MEANS COATED WITH ENGINE OIL OR OTHER LUBRICANT

"DRY" MEANS PLAIN OR ZINC PLATED WITHOUT ANY LUBRICATION.
TORQUES VALUES
When working on the equipment it is important to follow general mechanic's guidelines.
Chart shows the proper torque required on several different types of bolts.
This chart should be used when any repairs are made to the unit or its components.
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-4-01

WSP-900
2-4-2-RECOMMANDED TORQUE FOR HYDRAULIC

CONNECTIONS
M-daN
1 Mkg = 9.81 Nm (10 Nm)
1 Nm = 0.102 Mkg (0.1 Mkg)
CLOSING TORQUE OF CONNECTIONS
Diameter in mm Diameter in inches Mini torque in daN.m Maxi torque in

daN.m
6 1/4 1 1.5
8 5/16 1.5 2.4
10 3/8 2.3 3.5
12 1/2 3.2 4.8
14 4.2 6.4
15 4.7 7.1
16 5/8 5.2 8
18 6.4 10
20 3/4 7.7 12
22 7/8 9.3 14
25 1 11.9 18
30 16 25
32 1-1/4 18 28
38 1-1/2 22 35
Table 9 : Tightening torque for adapters and connections
RECOMMANDED TORQUE FOR HYDRAULIC CONNECTIONS

Lbs-ft
CLOSING TORQUE OF CONNECTIONS
Diameter in mm Diameter in inches Mini torque in Lbs-ft Maxi torque in Lbs-

ft
6 1/4 7.376 11.064
8 5/16 11.064 17.7024
10 3/8 16.9648 25.816
12 1/2 23.6032 35.4048
14 30.9792 47.2064
15 34.6672 52.3696
16 5/8 38.3552 59.008
18 47.2064 73.76
20 3/4 56.7952 88.512
22 7/8 68.5968 103.264
25 1 87.7744 132.768
30 118.016 184.4
32 1-1/4 132.768 206.528
38 1-1/2 162.272 258.16
Table 10 : Torque for hydraulic connection
WARNING: THE VALUES ARE INDICATED FOR WET MOUNTING.
2-4-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-4-3- STANDARD SCREWS

2-4-3.1.1.CHARACTERISTICS
CHc Screw H Screw Head

Head
d- mm (ISO) mm mm mm
M1.6 0.35 _ 3.2
M2 0.4 1.5 4
M2.5 0.45 2 5
M3 0.50 2.5 5.5
M3.5 0.60 _
M4 0.70 3 7
M5 0.80 4 8
M6 1 10 10
M7 1 _
M8 1.25 6 13
M10 1.50 8 16
M12 1.75 10 18
M14 2 12 21
M16 2 14 24
M18 2.5 14 27
M20 2.5 17 30
M22 2.5 17 34
M24 3 19 36
M27 3 _ 41
M30 3.5 _ 46
M33 3.5 _ 50
M36 4 _ 55
M39 4 _ 60
M42 4.5 _ 65
M45 4.5 _ 70
M48 5 _ 75
M52 5 _ 80
Table 11 : Screw characteristics
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-4-03

WSP-900
2-4-3.1.2.WHICH TIGHTENING TORQUE?
1. Always respect manufacturer specifications for the assembly material.
2. If this specification is not indicated they can be determinate by testing.
3. If the test is not possible, refer to country regulations.
2-4-3.1.3.GENERALITIES
1. Which coefficient of friction?

Friction coefficient influences on tightening. It depends on screw condition and assembled elements.
The following tables show 3 friction coefficients corresponding to:
a) Dry assembly for covered or not-covered screws and bolts.
b) Simple lubrication for black or zinc-coated screws and bolts.
c) Good quality lubrication for phosphates screws and bolts.
2. Which "quality grade" for screw?

Screws characteristics depend on their quality grade (screws 12.9 are "most powerful").
The standard class is the class 8.8 except other specifications.
Fig 55 : Screw class
2-4-3.1.4. WHAT IS A TIGHTENING TORQUE (CS) (CS)?
The couple is a force applied at end of a lever.

For each type of screw this torque is indicated in decaNewton X meter (daN.m).
Fig 56 : Tightening torque - Theorical
2-4-04 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-4-3.1.5.TORQUE TIGHTENING OPERATION
a) Approach the screw (with the hand), WITHOUT TIGHTENING.
b) Set the requested value on the torque wrench.
c) Tighten the screw until release of the wrench.
CAUTION: value obtained while loosening the screws is not correct. Tightening must always go in the
same direction.
2-4-3.1.6. TIGHTENING TORQUE ACCURACY CLASS
Tightening torques are calculated to 85 % of screw elastic limit, however there are 3 tightening torque
accuracy classes depending on material used:
CLASS TOOLS TORQUE USE
A Electronic torque wrenches < 40 daN.m

Torque wrenches with automatic
rearmament
< 80 daN.m
Fig 57 : Torque wrench with rearmament

B
Torque wrenches with direct reading on dial
< 200 daN.m
Fig 58 torque wrench with dial
Simple torque wrenches
C < 40 daN.m
Fig 59 : Simple torque wrenches
2-4-3.1.7.CONVERSION TABLE:
Conversion: N.m daN.m m.kg

1 N.m - 0.1 0.102
1 daN.m 10 - 1.02
1 m.kg 9.81 0.98 -
Table 12 : Conversion table
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-4-05

WSP-900
QUALITY CLASS OF BOLTS 8.8
SCREW TH AND CHC
Tightening torque Tightening torque for
Tightening torque for
Nominal diameter Tightening torque for assembly assembly with
assembly with correct
(mm) accuracy class without lubrication superficial lubrication
lubrication (daN.m)
(daN.m) (daN.m)
A 0.14 0.12 0.095
3 B 0.13 0.11 0.091
C 0.12 0.1 0.083
A 0.32 0.28 0.22
4 B 0.31 0.26 0.21
C 0.28 0.24 0.19
A 0.64 0.55 0.43
5 B 0.61 0.52 0.41
C 0.56 0.48 0.38
A 1.11 0.95 0.75
6 B 1.06 0.91 0.72
C 0.97 0.83 0.66
A 2.7 2.3 1.82
8 B 2.5 2.2 1.74
C 2.3 2 1.59
A 5.3 4.6 3.6
10 B 5.1 4.4 3.4
C 4.6 4 3.1
A 9.2 7.9 6.2
12 B 8.8 7.6 5.9
C 8.1 6.9 5.4
A 14.8 12.7 9.9
14 B 14.1 12.1 9.4
C 12.9 11.1 8.6
A 23.2 19.8 15.3
16 B 22.1 18.9 14.6
C 20.3 17.3 13.4
A 31.9 27.4 21.3
18 B 30.5 26.1 20.3
C 27.9 23.9 18.6
A 45.4 38.8 30
20 B 43.4 37 28.6
C 39.7 34 26.2
A 62.6 53.3 40.9
22 B 59.8 50.9 39.1
C 54.8 46.6 35.8
A 78.1 66.7 51.6
24 B 74.6 63.7 49.2
C 68.4 58.4 45.1
A 116.2 98.9 75.9
27 B 110.9 94.4 72.4
C 101.6 86.5 66.4
A 157.3 134.1 103.1
30 B 150.1 128 98.4
C 137.6 117.3 90.2
A 214.3 182.2 139.5
33 B 204.6 173.9 133.1
C 187.5 159.4 122
A 274.7 233.9 179.4
36 B 262.3 223.2 171.3
C 240.4 204.6 157
A 357.8 303.8 232.1
39 B 341.5 290 221.6
C 313.1 265 203.1
Table 13 : Screw quality 8.8
2-4-06 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
QUALITY CLASS OF BOLTS10.9
SCREW TH AND CHC
Tightening Tightening torque for Tightening torque for
Nominal diameter assembly with
torque accuracy assembly without assembly with correct
(mm) superficial lubrication
class lubrication (daN.m) lubrication (daN.m)
(daN.m)
A 0.21 0.18 0.14
3 B 0.2 0.17 0.13
C 0.18 0.16 0.12
A 0.47 0.41 0.32
4 B 0.45 0.39 0.31
C 0.41 0.36 0.28
A 0.94 0.81 0.63
5 B 0.89 0.77 0.6
C 0.82 0.71 0.55
A 1.63 1.4 1.1
6 B 1.55 1.34 1.05
C 1.42 1.23 0.97
A 3.9 3.4 2.6
8 B 3.7 3.2 2.5
C 3.4 2.9 2.3
A 7.8 6.7 5.2
10 B 7.5 6.4 5
C 6.8 5.9 4.6
A 13.6 11.6 9.1
12 B 13 11.1 8.7
C 11.9 10.2 7.9
A 21.8 18.7 14.5
14 B 20.8 17.8 13.9
C 19 16.3 12.7
A 34.1 29.1 22.5
16 B 32.5 27.8 21.5
C 29.8 25.5 19.7
A 46.9 40.2 31.3
18 B 44.8 38.4 29.8
C 41 35.2 27.3
A 66.7 57 44
20 B 63.7 54.4 42
C 58.4 49.9 38.5
A 92 78.3 60.2
22 B 87.8 74.8 57.4
C 80.5 68.5 52.6
A 114.8 98.1 75.8
24 B 109.6 93.6 72.3
C 100.4 85.8 66.3
A 170.6 146.2 111.4
27 B 162.9 138.6 106.4
C 149.3 127.1 97.5
A 231.1 196.9 151.5
30 B 220.5 188 144.6
C 202.2 172.3 132.6
A 314.8 267.6 204.8
33 B 300.5 255.4 195.5
C 275.5 234.2 179.2
A 403.6 343.5 263.6
36 B 385.2 327.9 251.6
C 353.1 300.6 230.6
A 525.5 446.3 341
39 B 501.6 426 325.5
C 459.8 390.5 298.4
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-4-07

WSP-900
QUALITY CLASS OF BOLTS12.9
SCREW TH AND CHC
Tightening Tightening torque for Tightening torque for
Nominal diameter assembly with
torque accuracy assembly without assembly with correct
(mm) superficial lubrication
class lubrication (daN.m) lubrication (daN.m)
(daN.m)
A 0.24 0.21 0.16
3 B 0.23 0.2 0.15
C 0.21 0.18 0.14
A 0.55 0.48 0.38
4 B 0.52 0.46 0.36
C 0.48 0.42 0.33
A 1.1 0.96 0.74
5 B 1.05 0.9 0.71
C 0.96 0.83 0.65
A 19.1 1.64 1.29
6 B 18.2 1.57 1.23
C 16.7 1.44 1.13
A 4.6 4 3.1
8 B 4.4 3.8 2.9
C 4 3.5 2.7
A 9.2 7.9 6.1
10 B 8.8 7.5 5.9
C 8 6.9 5.4
A 15.9 13.6 10.6
12 B 15.2 13 10.1
C 13.9 11.9 9.3
A 25.5 21.9 17
14 B 24.3 20.9 16.2
C 22.3 19.1 14.9
A 39.9 34.1 26.3
16 B 38.1 32.5 25.1
C 34.9 29.8 23
A 54.9 47.1 36.6
18 B 52.4 44.9 34.9
C 48 41.2 32
A 78.1 66.7 51.5
20 B 74.5 63.7 49.2
C 68.3 58.4 45.1
A 107.7 91.7 70.4
22 B 102.8 87.5 67.2
C 94.2 80.2 61.6
A 134.5 114.8 88.7
24 B 128.2 109.5 84.6
C 117.8 100.4 77.6
A 199.7 170 130.4
27 B 190.6 162.2 124.6
C 174.7 148.7 114.1
A 270.4 230.5 177.3
30 B 258.1 220 169.2
C 236.6 201.6 155.1
A 368.4 313.2 239.7
33 B 351.7 298.9 228.8
C 322.4 274 209.7
A 472.3 402 308.5
36 B 450.8 383.7 294.4
C 413.2 351.7 269.9
A 615 522.3 399
39 B 587 498.5 380.9
C 538.1 457 349.1
2-4-08 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-4-4-WELDING
Before any welding on a TLD vehicle it is IMPERATIVE to respect the following instructions :
- to get information and respect the legislation in force of the country of use;
- any impacted modification being able resistance structural of the equipment must be submitted
beforehand for approval of TLD;
- welding must be carried out by qualified personnel;
After having respected these instructions, to disconnect the batteries and to disconnect any significant
equipment (electronic charts, ...).
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-4-09

WSP-900
2-4-5-ADJUSTING PARKING HAND BRAKE CABLE TENSION
1 - Lift up the rear wheels assembly (to get rear wheels away from ground).
2 - Put the hand brake lever at the 2nd tooth from lower position.
3 - Adjust the brake cable tension up to have the paddings smoothly touching the drum.
NB : check this procedure white turning by hands left and right rear wheels.
4 - Check the efficiency of the hand brake lever on static condition in a > 7% slope to keep the
vehicle parked.
IMPORTANT:
IT IS IMPERATIF TO CONTROL STATE OF HAND BRAKE CABLE A EACH REGLAGE OF TENSION
Check these hand parking brake cable tension during maintenance schedule when oil refilling.
2-4-010 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

WSP-900
2-4-6-LIFTING-STRUCTURE OPERATION MAINTENANCE
Chain adjustment
An extension of the chain could be observed, leading to malfunctions of the lifting-system. It

could even lead to break some components.
Notice: Please, check the length of each chain once per 3 months.
Notice: Each driving chain is associated with the three moving-stages of the lifting-structure.
Notice: When you adjust the length of a chain, make sure which stage you adjust. And when
you tight the adjusting screw, it will make the first stage of the lifting structure to move up. After
adjustment, tight adjusting screw and make sure there isn’t any residual movement of the lifting
structure.
Warning: Each stage of the lifting-structure contains two chains. As safety factor of each chain
is more that 4, the total safety factor is more than 8. If one chain doesn’t work properly, one
chain is able to support the whole platform. When you adjust those chains, please make sure
each chain has the same tightness. The way to judge the tightness of chain: use your hands to
press chain and feel the force.
Lubrication
In order to limit abrasion, put regularly lubricant into moving components.
Notice: For chain wheel and wheel axle, use oil gun to fill mechanical oil into driving friction. The
oil cup is beside of chain wheel, you can raise lifting structure a little if necessary: you will find
the oil cup.
Notice: For lifting-structure slide, use one brush to smear grease on the friction plates, when
lifting structure is raised.
Creation : 07.16 – 2007 2-4-011

WSP-900
BLANK PAGE
2-4-012 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

10004989_REL
This PDF is a maintenance for the lifting system on LSP/WSP (TLD P/N
1036937)
THE ADJUSTMENT OF THE CHAIN
Why we need to adjust the chain

After using for 3 moths,the mechanical wear of the chain lead directly to
the extending of the chain. So when the equipment falls, the frontal mast will
be lower than the latter one while reaching the bottom,which strains the cable
fixed on the latter mast.This may lead to the cable broken.
So the equipment should be checked carefully every 3 months.The
extending of the chain will make the masts lower than its original position,then
the top of the masts may be not at the same plane. This can be observed
directly.
NOTE
Every section of the chain is relational with 3
masts.Below picture shows the relationship of the
chain and the mast:
1-next mast; 2-mid-mast; 3-chain; 4-adjusting screw
rod; 5-adjusting nut; 6-wheel; 7-shaft; 8-past mast
Adjustment
Operate the platform to keep the mast be a
suitable height when no loading.Then adjust the nut to
shorten the chain.Make sure that both chains in one
mast should be adjust together.After finishing
adjustment,lower the mast and check it, to make sure
the past mast is not lower than the mid-mast.
NOTE
Do not confuse the relationship of the chain and the mast. For
example,after adjusting the Num.5 nut,the past mast(Num.8) will rise.
NOTE
Do keep the double nuts(Num.5) together after adjustment.
Caution
Every mast is pulled by two chains,it’s very important to keep this two
chains the same tightness.
To judge the tightness on the site: Sense the strength of the chain when
you press it with finger while the platform rose.
Chapter 4 - Illustrated Parts List
Model: WSP-900
Description: Lavatory and Water Trucks , WSP-900
*** Automaticaly Generated from CBOM#620029 On the
2011-08-05 ***
Published Date: 2011-08-05
Language: EN
Table of Contents
Part Number Description Page Number

Accessories and Options
1038461 FINAL PREP. PACKAGE, LSP 1
1039027 OPTION, LIGHTGUARDS 3
1039122 FINAL PREP, WSP PACKAGE 5
1041398 OPTION, BASKET SIDE GUARD 7
1041402 OPTION, SPECIAL DOME LAMP 27W 9
1041403 DOME LAMP WITH SWITCH 11
1041501 OPTION, LOW FUEL WARN/SHUT DWN 13
1041502 OPTION, ELECTRICAL BOX GUARD 15
1041504 OPTION, ILLUMINATED CONTROL BO 17
1041601 OPTION, SUSPENDED SEAT 19
1041695 DELIVERY HOSE SYSTEM - CWK 21
1041862 FLOWMETER ASSY, REMOTE DISPLAY 23
503107 BOX DOCUMENTATION ASSY 25
Body-Chassis
1039104 ENGINE COVER ASSEMBLY 27
1040249 TANK ASSEMBLY, WSP 29
Body/Chassis
PM1037235_C CHASSIS EQUIPMENT PACKAGE 31
Electrical System
1037695 CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLY, LAV 33
1039253 RELAY BOARD ASSEMBLY, CHASSIS 35
1039356 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, CHASSIS 37
1040603 ELECTRICAL ASSY, CHASSIS 39
1040697 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, DU PST-2 41
7600198 HEADLIGHT;LEFT 43
7600199 HEADLIGHT;RIGHT 45
7633153 5 FUNCTION REAR LIGHT 47
Elevator
1036937 LIFTING SYSTEM 49
1038919 BASKET ASSEMBLY 51
1039137 MAST COVER ASSEMBLY 53
Hydraulic System
1036980 MANHOLE 55
1037070 TANK, HYDRAULIC ASSEMBLY 57
1037258 FILTER, RETURN 59
1037301 STEERING SYSTEM 61
1038804 PUMP, WATER 63
1039013 WATER PLUMBING PACKAGE 65
1039222 HYD. TUBING PACKAGE, CHASSIS 67
1039282 KIT, LIFT HYDRAULIC 69
1041837 FLOWMETER, NYLON, 1", LCD DISP 71
1042083 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM, PST2 CRADLE 73
4233129 COMPLETE STEERING WHEEL D400 - 36 SLOTS 75
6033002 BRAKE FLUID TANK 77
Lifting/Scissors System
1039136 ASSEMBLAGE;NACELLE 79
LIFT;SYSTEM
Power Plant
041327 DEUTZ F4M2011 ENGINE,SAE 4 81
058114 F4M2011 ENGINE & TRANS ASSY 83
1040692 COOLING SYSTEM, DU PST-2 85
1040693 AIR INTAKE SYSTEM, DU PST-2 87
1040694 EXHAUST SYSTEM, DU PST-2 89
1040695 ENGINE SUPPORT SYSTEM, DU PST2 91
1040698 THROTTLE CONTROL SYST, DU PST2 93
1041428 DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY, PST2 95
1041451 FUEL SYSTEM, PROTECTOSEAL (FUE 97
1042134 THROT./DIPST. ASSY,FM2011/PST2 99
1042421 DRIVESHAFT ASSEMBLY 101
1042900 FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY 103
504378 GEARBOX 105
504379 GEARBOX 107
504380 GEARBOX 109
Suspension, Tires and Brakes
054738 BRAKE SYSTEM LSP/WSP 111
054739 FRONT AXLE ASSY 113
1037300 VACUUM PUMP, BRAKE ASSEMBLY 115
1040958 WHEEL ASSY 117
1041480 REAR AXLE ASSEMBLY 119
1041487 PARKING BRAKE ASSY, ORSCHELIN 121
5300026-008 BRAKE ASSY (RIGHT) 123
5300034 REAR;AXLE 125
5400053 FRONT AXLE 131
5400061 AXLE, FRONT, DOUBLE CALIPER 135
9208272 BRAKE;PEDALE;ASSEMBLY 137
User Interfaces and Cab
039129 LOWER SEAT PAN 139
1037302 CAB ASSEMBLY 141
1037327 DASHBOARD ASSEMBLY, CAB 143
1037329 CAB, EQUIPED 145
1040953 RHS FIXED WINDOW ASSY 147
1041500 OPTION,NEUTRAL LOCK SPEED LEV. 149
1041582 OPTION, KEYLESS IGNITION SWITC 151
4200440 SEAT 153
5933204 CAB SS PORTE TYPE THX LARG1 4 12VPIPO 155
5933217-100 WIPER, FRONT, ASSY 157
1038461_A
FINAL PREP. PACKAGE, LSP
Page 1
1038461_A
FINAL PREP. PACKAGE, LSP
Item PN Qty Description P M O C
1038461 FINAL PREP. PACKAGE, LSP
1 1006251 3 LOGO, TLD
2 503107 1 BOX DOCUMENTATION ASSY
3 1031472 1 LABEL, SALES-SERVICE-PARTS
4 1004375-158 1 LABEL, DIESEL
5 4501070 4 LABEL, TIRE PRESSURE, 8BAR
6 4501072 1 LABEL, BRAKE FLUID, DOT4
7 4501083 1 LABEL, WARNING, MANUAL
8 1039044 1 LABEL, LIFT DOWN
9 1019947-01 2 LABEL, HEARING PROTECTION REQU
10 1019947-16 1 LABEL, EYE PROTECTION
11 1019947-17 1 LABEL, HAND PROTECTION
12 4500588 1 LABEL,CLOSED ACCES
13 1019947-03 1 LABEL, RISK OF ELEC SHOCK, 4"
14 1019947-02 1 LABEL, RISK OF ELEC SHOCK, 1"
15 1019947-09 4 LABEL, PINCH POINT, 4" SIZE
16 1019947-05 1 LABEL, GENL WARNING, 4" SIZE
17 1038953 1 LABEL, HYD OIL (GENERAL)
18 1019947-08 1 LABEL, CAUTION: HOT SURFACE, 1
19 4500273 4 LABEL, NO STEP
20 1001838 2 REFLECTOR, AMBER
21 1002299 4 REFLECTOR, RED
22 1019947-11 1 LABEL, SECURITY BELT, 4" SIZE
23 1038954 1 LABEL, LIFT MAX LOAD
24 1038956 1 LABEL, EMERGENCY LOWERING
25 1039048 1 LABEL, WARNING, LIFT
Page 2
1039027_A
OPTION, LIGHTGUARDS
Page 3
1039027_A
OPTION, LIGHTGUARDS
1039027 OPTION, LIGHTGUARDS
1 9433140 6 GUARDS, LIGHT
Page 4
1039122_REL.
FINAL PREP, WSP PACKAGE
Page 5
1039122_REL.
FINAL PREP, WSP PACKAGE
1039122 FINAL PREP, WSP PACKAGE
1 1023252 2 DECAL, DRINKING
2 1023253 2 DECAL, WATER ONLY
3 1039124 1 LABEL, WAT TANK CAPACITY
Page 6
1041398_B
OPTION, BASKET SIDE GUARD
Page 7
1041398_B
OPTION, BASKET SIDE GUARD
1041398 OPTION, BASKET SIDE GUARD
1 1041399 1 SIDE GUARD, BASKET GUARD
4 042318 1 BASKET GUARD BRACKET WLDMT
Page 8
1041402_REL
OPTION, SPECIAL DOME LAMP 27W
Page 9
1041402_REL
OPTION, SPECIAL DOME LAMP 27W
1041402 OPTION, SPECIAL DOME LAMP 27W
1 1041403 1 DOME LAMP WITH SWITCH
Page 10
1041403_REL.
DOME LAMP WITH SWITCH
Page 11
1041403_REL.
DOME LAMP WITH SWITCH
1041403 DOME LAMP WITH SWITCH
1 7600036 1 BULB 12V 21W BA15S M
2 1041403-002 1 LENS, REPLACEMENT FOR 1041403
Page 12
1041501_A
OPTION, LOW FUEL WARN/SHUT DWN
Page 13
1041501_A
OPTION, LOW FUEL WARN/SHUT DWN
1041501 OPTION, LOW FUEL WARN/SHUT DWN
1 1041456 1 FUEL TANK, MODIF,2ND FUEL SEND
2 1039512 0 SENDER, FUEL LEVEL M
3 1041668 1 ALTERED FUEL SENDER M
4 7400171 1 RELAY;TIMER M
5 7249770 1 CONNECT MALE 4 VOIES MINIFIT M
6 7033264 1 MINIFIT FEMALE TERMINAL
7 7400173 1 RELAY POWER 12V 30A C
8 038760 1 PUSH BUTTON HEAD C
9 7300373 1 CONTACT BODY C
10 1041747 1 LABEL, LOW FUEL BYPASS
Page 14
1041502_REL
OPTION, ELECTRICAL BOX GUARD
Page 15
1041502_REL
OPTION, ELECTRICAL BOX GUARD
1041502 OPTION, ELECTRICAL BOX GUARD
1 1041395 1 ELECTRICAL BOX GUARD
2 1041396 1 CLIP BOARD, MODIFIED
Page 16
1041504_A
OPTION, ILLUMINATED CONTROL BO
Page 17
1041504_A
OPTION, ILLUMINATED CONTROL BO
1041504 OPTION, ILLUMINATED CONTROL BO
1 041273 1 BLACK LICENSE PLATE LAMP
2 027260 1 BULB, LIC.PLATE LAMP M
3 1037264 0 BRACKET, CONTROL BOX
4 1041604 1 SUPPORT, CONTROL BOX LAMP
Page 18
1041601_REL
OPTION, SUSPENDED SEAT
Page 19
1041601_REL
OPTION, SUSPENDED SEAT
1041601 OPTION, SUSPENDED SEAT
1 4200440 1 SEAT
Page 20
1041695_C1
DELIVERY HOSE SYSTEM - CWK
Page 21
1041695_C1
DELIVERY HOSE SYSTEM - CWK
1041695 DELIVERY HOSE SYSTEM - CWK
1 1041894 1 HOSE 1018971-020 lg 1.5m O
2 1041895 1 HOSE 1018971-020 LG 4.6 M O
3 1041696 1 BRACKET - DELIVERY HOSE
4 1038408 1 HOSE REEL C
7 1041698 1 STREET ELBOW 90 1 1/4NPT M/F
8 1037638-020 1 NIPPLE,COMBINATION,SS316,1"1/4
9 1037627-020 1 ELBOW, 90
10 591B1-020 4 CLAMP, HOSE
11 055544 1 HOSE REEL COVER CORNER PART
12 055545 1 HOSE REEL COVER STRAIGHT CORNE
13 042099 3 NUT INSERT M6X1
14 042344 102 INSULATION FLEX FOIL-FACED
15 042930 0 LOCKNUT M6 STAINLESS STEEL
16 3100304 8 SCREW
17 3300082 13 WASHER
Page 22
1041862_C1
FLOWMETER ASSY, REMOTE DISPLAY
Page 23
1041862_C1
FLOWMETER ASSY, REMOTE DISPLAY
1041862 FLOWMETER ASSY, REMOTE DISPLAY
1 1041837 1 FLOWMETER, NYLON, 1", LCD DISP C
2 1041913 1 REMOTE DISPLAY, ALTERED C
3 1041914 1 CABLE, EXTENSION O
4 1041915 1 ELECTRICAL BOX, ALT.
5 1041917 1 BRACKET, FLOWMETER DISPLAY
6 1041918 1 BRACKET, DISPLAY LIGHT
7 041273 1 BLACK LICENSE PLATE LAMP
8 027260 1 BULB, LIC.PLATE LAMP M
9 1041988 1 RESISTOR, WIREWOUND, 25W,15OHM M
10 1037788-1620 1 BUSHING, REDUCING, SS316
11 1037923-1620 1 COUPLING,REDUC,SS316,1"-1 1/4"
12 1037626-1616 2 NIPPLE, HEX, 1", SS316
13 1042235 1 LABEL, DIGITAL FLOWMETER
14 038217 120 CORRUG. LOOM HIGH TEMP. 1/2
Page 24
503107_A
BOX DOCUMENTATION ASSY
Page 25
503107_A
BOX DOCUMENTATION ASSY
503107 BOX DOCUMENTATION ASSY
1 4233434 1 MANUAL PAK
2 4501095 1 LABEL, DOCUMENTS BOX
3 4533692 1 TLD LOGO SMALL STICKER
Page 26
1039104_E2
ENGINE COVER ASSEMBLY
Page 27
1039104_E2
ENGINE COVER ASSEMBLY
1039104 ENGINE COVER ASSEMBLY
1 1039114 1 ENGINE COVER STRUCTURE
2 1033496 7 HINGE, POLYAMIDE
3 1039173 2 DOOR, ENGINE COVER
4 1019340 4 LATCH, LEVER, ADJUSTABLE
5 4100160 2 PLASTIC BLACK HANDLE
6 055501 1 HINGE FLAT BAR
7 055502 1 RADIATOR ACCESS DOOR
8 1039177 4 GAS SPRING
9 4200020 4 BUFFER
10 042909 4 FLAT HEAD M6X1.X30MM SS
11 042910 1 DRAW LATCH 1364A11
12 042905 4 SHCS 6-32 X 1/2'' SST
13 108973 4 WASHER, FLAT-SAE #6 NOM SS
14 140533 4 NUT,HEX SLF-LKG 6-32UNC
15 042930 0 LOCKNUT M6 STAINLESS STEEL
16 3300082 4 WASHER
Page 28
1040249_K2
TANK ASSEMBLY, WSP
Page 29
1040249_K2
TANK ASSEMBLY, WSP
1040249 TANK ASSEMBLY, WSP
1 1039487 1 WSP TANK STRUCTURE
2 1036954 4 GAS SPRINGS
3 1033496 4 HINGE, POLYAMIDE
4 041916 1 PROTECTOSEAL CAP,3"NPT,BLU/WHI
5 1038836 2 DOOR, STRUCTURE
6 1005170-339 1 NIPPLE, SS316, 2", LG:200MM
7 1037288 2 MOUNT, RUBBER
9 1037684 1 SENSOR, WATER LEVEL (SIDE-MTD)
10 9503780 1 MIRROR SUPPORT
11 4200390 1 MIRROR,PANORAMIC C
12 1040974 1 GAUGE, LIQUID LEVEL M
13 3300069 8 WASHER, BELLEVILLE
14 1019340 4 LATCH, LEVER, ADJUSTABLE
15 1038382 1 VALVE, BALL, SS316, 2"
16 1041884 1 CAP, 1/2" NPT
17 1042167 1 PLUG, 2"
19 042002 1 ANTI-SPLASH BREATHER 1/2 NPT
20 042326 1 TANK NUMBER PLATE
21 140928 4 RIVET SST 0.19, BUTTON HD
22 042916 4 SHCS M6X0.1 X 16MM LG SS
23 3300082 4 WASHER
Page 30
PM1037235_C_C
CHASSIS EQUIPMENT PACKAGE
Page 31
PM1037235_C_C
CHASSIS EQUIPMENT PACKAGE
1037235 CHASSIS EQUIPMENT, PACKAGE / EQUIPEMENT CHASSIS
1 1037229 2 MUDGUARDS, FRONT / GARDE-BOUE
2 4200180 2 BUMPER, RUBBER / BUTOIR
3 4200397 2 MUDGUARDS, REAR / GARDE BOUE
4 4200424 4 SUPPORT, REAR MUDGUARD / SUPPORT, GARDE-BOUE
5 1038905 4 MUDGUARD SUPPORT, ALTERED / SUPPORT, GARDE-BOUE
6 AL62200 1 YOKE / CHAPE
7 4200433 2 FITTIN BAND / REGLETTE;BAVETTE;ANTIPROJECTION
8 4200432 2 SPLASH GUARD / BAVETTE;ANTIPROJECTION
9 1039063 2 SPLASH GUARD, ALT. / BAVETTE
Page 32
1037695_B
CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLY, LAV
Page 33
1037695_B
CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLY, LAV
1037695 CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLY, LAV
1 1037143 1 CIRCUIT BOARD C
2 7400173 19 RELAY POWER 12V 30A C
3 7533049 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER 10A M
4 7400023 2 RELAY PLUG M
Page 34
1039253_F
RELAY BOARD ASSEMBLY, CHASSIS
Page 35
1039253_F
RELAY BOARD ASSEMBLY, CHASSIS
1039253 RELAY BOARD ASSEMBLY, CHASSIS
1 7700126 1 CARD RELAY (RP 7733185) C
2 7400173 22 RELAY POWER 12V 30A C
3 7400222 1 FLASHER;UNIT M
4 7400170 2 RELAY, 12VDC, 70A C
5 7533048 4 6A FUSE (CIRCUIT BREAKER) M
8 7533078 1 FUSE 50A M
9 7900002 1 RESISTOR 2W 100 OHMS M
10 7400187 2 RELAY;BISTABLE M
11 7400196 1 RELAY;CONTROL M
13 7533054 1 25A CIRCUIT BREAKER M
14 042666 1 STICKER 20A
15 1010751-0300 12 FUSE, BLADE TYPE M
Page 36
1039356_C1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, CHASSIS
E
UR
CT
PI
NO
Y,
RR
SO
Page 37
1039356_C1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, CHASSIS
1039356 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, CHASSIS
1 1039253 1 RELAY BOARD ASSEMBLY, CHASSIS
2 1039439 1 HARNESS, FRONT CHASSIS O
3 1039438 1 HARNESS, REAR CHASSIS O
4 1039441 1 HARNESS, CAB O
5 1039442 1 HARNESS, ENGINE INTERFACE O
6 7633119 1 FLOODLAMP
7 7600027 1 BULB, 12 VOLT,55W, H3 M
8 139333 300 ELECT CABLE 16-4 O
9 3100026 2 SCREW HM6X50
10 04076 0 WASHER M6
11 3200003 0 NYLON LOCKNUT, M6x1
Page 38
1040603_B
ELECTRICAL ASSY, CHASSIS
Page 39
1040603_B
ELECTRICAL ASSY, CHASSIS
1040603 ELECTRICAL ASSY, CHASSIS
1 7600198 1 HEADLIGHT;LEFT
2 7600199 1 HEADLIGHT;RIGHT
3 7633153 2 5 FUNCTION REAR LIGHT
4 AL71005 1 HORN
5 7600117 1 BUZZER 97DB 12/24V C
6 024572 60 TRIM, PROTECTIVE 3/8"
Page 40
1040697_B
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, DU PST-2
Page 41
1040697_B
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, DU PST-2
1040697 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, DU PST-2
1 7300490 1 SENSOR;INDUCTIVE M
2 058124 1 ENGINE HARNESS, DU-F4M2011 O
3 AL27744 2 BRAID, 300MM HOLE 10.5
4 051523 1 CABLE, ALTERNATOR O
6 1040662 1 SENSOR BRACKET, PST2
7 1043457 1 BATTERY HARNESS DEUTZ O
Page 42
7600198_B
HEADLIGHT;LEFT
Page 43
7600198_B
HEADLIGHT;LEFT
7600198 HEADLIGHT;LEFT
1 7600198-001 1 OUTSIDE LENS C
2 7600198-002 1 COVER, HEADLIGHT C
3 7600198-003 1 INSIDE LENS(AMBER)
4 7600198-004 1 LAMP, HEADLIGHT
5 7600208 1 BULB;LED M
6 7600206 1 BULB;LED M
7 7600202 1 BULB;12V M
8 7600204 1 BULB;12V M
9 7600198-005 1 REFLECTOR
10 7600198-006 1 MAIN BODY OF LIGHT
11 7200744 0 CONNECTOR;6;WAYS
12 7200745 0 WIRE SEAL, BULB 6 CONTACT CONN
13 7249650 0 UNIVERSAL PIN, AMP CONNECTOR
14 7600198-007 1 MOUNTING BOLT
Page 44
7600199_B
HEADLIGHT;RIGHT
Page 45
7600199_B
HEADLIGHT;RIGHT
7600199 HEADLIGHT;RIGHT
1 7600198-001 1 OUTSIDE LENS C
2 7600198-002 1 COVER, HEADLIGHT C
3 7600198-003 1 INSIDE LENS(AMBER)
4 7600198-004 1 LAMP, HEADLIGHT
5 7600208 1 BULB;LED M
6 7600206 1 BULB;LED M
7 7600202 1 BULB;12V M
8 7600204 1 BULB;12V M
9 7600198-005 1 REFLECTOR
10 7600198-006 1 MAIN BODY OF LIGHT
11 7200744 0 CONNECTOR;6;WAYS
12 7200745 0 WIRE SEAL, BULB 6 CONTACT CONN
13 7249650 0 UNIVERSAL PIN, AMP CONNECTOR
14 7600198-007 1 MOUNTING BOLT
Page 46
7633153_REL
5 FUNCTION REAR LIGHT
Page 47
7633153_REL
5 FUNCTION REAR LIGHT
7633153 5 FUNCTION REAR LIGHT
1 7633153-028 2 LIGHT LENS
Page 48
1036937_A1
LIFTING SYSTEM
Page 49
1036937_A1
LIFTING SYSTEM
1036937 LIFTING SYSTEM
1 1036937-001 2 CYLINDER, LIFT C
2 1036937-002 2 LIMIT SWITCH C
3 1036937-003 2 BUTTERFLY VALVE C
4 1036937-004 2 HOUSING, BUTTERFLY VALVE
5 1036937-005 2 CABLE, ELECTRICAL O
6 1036937-006 4 PULLEY, SMALL
7 1036937-007 2 PULLEY, LARGE
8 1036937-008 2 COVER, LARGE PULLEY
9 1036937-009 1 BRACKET, LIMIT SWITCH
10 1036937-010 1 MANIFOLD
11 1036937-011 4 CHAIN, LIFT C
12 1036937-012 4 PULLEY, CHAIN, LIFT
13 1036937-013 4 RUBBER GROMMET
14 1036937-014 3 CABLE CLASP
15 1036937-015 2 SLEEVE, CABLE PULLEY
16 10004989 0 MAINTENANCE FOR LIFTING SYSTEM
Page 50
1038919_F
BASKET ASSEMBLY
Page 51
1038919_F
BASKET ASSEMBLY
1038919 BASKET ASSEMBLY
1 1038930 1 BASKET STRUCTURE
2 1038629 1 BRACKET, HOSE
3 1038926 1 PLATE
4 1039120 1 DOOR, BASKET
5 1038929 1 SPRING, GATE C
6 1041061 1 BRACKET, MIRROR
7 1041400 1 GUARD, FLEXIBLE, BASKET
8 1041401 1 MOUNTING PLATE, FLEXIBLE GUARD
9 042099 4 NUT INSERT M6X1
10 3300082 4 WASHER
11 3100024 0 SCREW HM6X20
Page 52
1039137_H
MAST COVER ASSEMBLY
Page 53
1039137_H
MAST COVER ASSEMBLY
1039137 MAST COVER ASSEMBLY
1 1037260 1 COVER
2 1039150 1 YOKE ASSEMBLY
3 1037264 1 BRACKET, CONTROL BOX
6 055574 1 RETAINNING FLAT BAR
7 9407241 1 BAVETTE CENT AR SUR BRIDGE (A3) FAFS
8 1041728 2 GUARD DEFLECTOR
9 054795 1 BASKET REINFORCEMENT BRACKET
Page 54
1036980_B
MANHOLE
Page 55
1036980_B
MANHOLE
1036980 MANHOLE
1 1036980-001 1 SEAL, MANHOLE M
2 1036980-002 1 HANDLE, MANHOLE
3 1036980-007 1 COVER ASSEMBLY, MANHOLE
4 1036980-006 1 LATCH, MANHOLE
Page 56
1037070_D
TANK, HYDRAULIC ASSEMBLY
Page 57
1037070_D
TANK, HYDRAULIC ASSEMBLY
1037070 TANK, HYDRAULIC ASSEMBLY
1 1037071 1 TANK, HYDRAULIC
2 1037076 1 DOOR, COMPARTMENT
3 6800071 1 VISUAL LEVEL
4 6800019 1 MAGNETIC DRAIN PLUG M
5 1014935 1 GASKET, COVER O
6 1011389 1 COVER, ACCESS
7 1004909 1 FILTER ASSEMBLY
8 1037725 1 DOOR, FRONT ASSEMBLY
11 584G7-032 1 PLUG, SQUARE HEAD, STEEL
12 1037804 1 SUPPORT, RETURN FILTER
Page 58
1037258_A.
FILTER, RETURN
Page 59
1037258_A.
FILTER, RETURN
1037258 FILTER, RETURN
1 1037258-P1 1 ELEMENT, RETURN FILTER P
2 1037258-P2 1 INDICATOR, RETURN FILTER M
Page 60
1037301_B
STEERING SYSTEM
Page 61
1037301_B
STEERING SYSTEM
1037301 STEERING SYSTEM
1 9207970 1 STEERING COLUMN, ALTERED C
2 4233129 1 COMPLETE STEERING WHEEL D400 - 36 SLOTS
3 AL71298 1 STEERING UNIT C
4 6233055 0 FIT MJ7/8-M1/2BSPP
5 6233040 0 FIT MJ9/16-M1/2BSPP
6 6300950 1 FLEX R2T10 (FJ90-FJ)9/16 2600 O
7 6300951 1 FLEX R2T10 (FJ90-FJ)9/16 2900 O
8 6300505 1 FLEX R2T16 (MJ-FJ)7/8 LG:2500 O
9 6300949 1 FLEX R2T16 (FJ90-FJ)7/8 2400 O
Page 62
1038804_C
PUMP, WATER
Page 63
1038804_C
PUMP, WATER
1038804 PUMP, WATER C
1 1038804-P1 2 BEARING, BALL M
3 1038804-P3 1 SEAL, MECHANICAL O
4 1038804-P4 1 O-RING M
5 1038804-P5 1 SLINGER O
6 1038804-006 1 GUARD,WATER PUMP COULPING
7 1038804-007 1 BRACKET,WATER PUMP
Page 64
1039013_D
WATER PLUMBING PACKAGE
Page 65
1039013_D
WATER PLUMBING PACKAGE
1039013 WATER PLUMBING PACKAGE
1 1037627-024 3 ELBOW, 90
2 1037626-2424 4 NIPPLE, HEX, 1 1/2", SS316
3 1038049-024 1 UNION, SS316, 1 1/2"
4 1036938 1 VALVE, BALL, 1 1/2", SS316
5 1037626-1616 1 NIPPLE, HEX, 1", SS316
6 1039295 1 RELIEF VALVE, ALTERED C
8 1036939 1 STRAINER
9 1043019 1 NIPPLE, 1"1/2
10 1038804 1 PUMP, WATER C
11 1037626-0404 1 NIPPLE, HEX, 1/4" SS316
12 1037633 1 VALVE, BALL, 1/4", SS316
13 042070 1 BARB FITTING, 1/4 NPT, 1/2 ID
14 4200001 4 SILENT BLOCK
16 1037625 1 BRACKET, WATER PUMP
17 1037638-016 1 NIPPLE,COMBINATION,SS316,1"
19 1037631 1 TEE, ALTERED
20 1043346 1 PRESSURE GAUGE
21 1037628-020 1 ELBOW, STREET 90
22 1018971-016 15 HOSE, REINFORCED (CLEAR) O
24 1037626-2020 1 NIPPLE, HEX, 1 1/4", SS316
25 1017773 1 MOTOR, HYDRAULIC C
26 6200416 2 FIT 90 MJ9/16-M3/4UNF2A
28 015095 1 HOSE CLAMP 1/4 TO 7/8
29 042535 0 LOCTITE 55, FITTING SEALANT
Page 66
1039222_REL
HYD. TUBING PACKAGE, CHASSIS
Page 67
1039222_REL
HYD. TUBING PACKAGE, CHASSIS
1039222 HYD. TUBING PACKAGE, CHASSIS
1 1039218 2 HYD. TUBING ASSEMBLY
2 1039219 1 TUBING ASSEMBLY, 10MM
3 1039220 1 HYD. TUBINE ASSEMBLY, 10MM
4 1039221 1 HYD. TUBING ASSEMBLY, 10MM
5 3600056 12 DOUBLE COLLAR CLAMP D.10
6 3600053 6 SIMPLE COLLAR CLAMP D.16
Page 68
1039282_REL1
KIT, LIFT HYDRAULIC
Page 69
1039282_REL1
KIT, LIFT HYDRAULIC
1039282 KIT, LIFT HYDRAULIC
1 6200458 1 FIT 90° CLOISON MJ9/16-MJ9/16
2 1039019 1 TUBING ASSEMBLY, 10MM
3 6200048 0 FIT 90 FJ9/16-MJ9/16
4 6200342 0 FIT JIC M9/16-MD16x150
Page 70
1041837_REL
FLOWMETER, NYLON, 1", LCD DISP
Page 71
1041837_REL
FLOWMETER, NYLON, 1", LCD DISP
1041837 FLOWMETER, NYLON, 1", LCD DISP C
1 1041837-001 1 BATTERY KIT (2 INCLUDED) M
2 1041837-002 1 O-RING, COMPUTER, GPI FLOWMTR
3 1041837-003 4 SCREW, GPI NYLON METER
Page 72
1042083_B
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM, PST2 CRADLE
Page 73
1042083_B
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM, PST2 CRADLE
1042083 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM, PST2 CRADLE
1 6500187 1 GEAR PUMP, 16CC, 13TH, METRIC C
2 6233905 1 FIT JIC. MJ1"5/16-MD 22X150
3 6200037 1 FIT MJ7/8-MD18x150
4 6800391 1 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE C
5 6233055 0 FIT MJ7/8-M1/2BSPP
6 6200061 0 FIT T(FJ-MJ-MJ)7/8
7 6200040 1 FIT FJ7/8-F1/4BSPP
8 6800016 1 PRESSURE TEST PORT M1/4BSPP
9 1041793 1 FLEX R2T13 (FJ90-FJ)7/8 LG1550 O
10 6300677 1 HOSE (FJ90-FJ)1"5/16 LG:2000 O
11 1041218 1 FLANGE
Page 74
4233129_REL
COMPLETE STEERING WHEEL D400 - 36 SLOTS
Page 75
4233129_REL
COMPLETE STEERING WHEEL D400 - 36 SLOTS
4233129 COMPLETE STEERING WHEEL D400 - 36 SLOTS
1 4233129-004 1 NUDE STEERING WHEEL
2 4233251-002 1 FLYWHEEL CAP
4 4233129-003 1 NUT
Page 76
6033002_REL1
BRAKE FLUID TANK
Page 77
6033002_REL1
BRAKE FLUID TANK
6033002 BRAKE FLUID TANK C
1 6033002-001 1 CONFLICT ITEM, SEE TEXT
2 6033002-002 1 CAP
3 AL71214 0 CONFLICT ITEM, SEE TEXT
Page 78
1039136_
ASSEMBLAGE;NACELLE
LIFT;SYSTEM
Page 79
1039136_
ASSEMBLAGE;NACELLE
LIFT;SYSTEM
1039136 ASSEMBLAGE;NACELLE
LIFT;SYSTEM
1 1036937 1.000 SYSTEME;ELEVATEUR PIPO
LIFTING;SYSTEM
2 1038919 1.000 NACELLE;ASSEMBLEE
BASKET;ASSEMBLY
3 1039137 1.000 ASSEMBLAGE;COUVERCLE;NACELLE
MASTER;COVEER;ASSEMBLY
Page 80
041327_A2
DEUTZ F4M2011 ENGINE,SAE 4
Page 81
041327_A2
DEUTZ F4M2011 ENGINE,SAE 4
041327 DEUTZ F4M2011 ENGINE,SAE 4 C
1 041327-001 1 OIL COOLER C
2 041327-002 3 VIBRATION DAMPER, OIL COOLER
3 041327-003 1 SILENCER MANIFOLD
4 041327-004 1 AIR FILTER ASSEMBLY
5 041327-005 1 HOLDER, FUEL FILTER
6 041327-006 1 FUEL FILTER ELEMENT P
7 041327-007 1 AIR FILTER MAIN ELEMENT P
8 041327-008 1 AIR FILTER SAFETY ELEMENT P
9 041327-009 1 OIL FILTER ELEMENT P
10 041327-010 1 BELT, ALTERNATOR P
11 041327-011 1 THERMOSTAT M
12 041327-012 1 GASKET, AIR INTAKE MANIFOLD
13 041327-013 1 ALTERNATOR C
14 041327-014 1 GASKET, AIR INTAKE FLANGE
Page 82
058114_A1
F4M2011 ENGINE & TRANS ASSY
Page 83
058114_A1
F4M2011 ENGINE & TRANS ASSY
058114 F4M2011 ENGINE & TRANS ASSY
1 041327 1 DEUTZ F4M2011 ENGINE,SAE 4 C
2 1038736 1 TRANSMISSION, PST2 C
3 1038712 1 FLEXPLATE, 3.15008.3, PST2
4 041500 6 SPECIAL WASHER
5 103781 6 SCREW CAP-HX 5/16-18x5/8
6 042936X65 3 THREADED ROD M10X1.5X65 ZINC
Page 84
1040692_REL
COOLING SYSTEM, DU PST-2
Page 85
1040692_REL
COOLING SYSTEM, DU PST-2
1040692 COOLING SYSTEM, DU PST-2
1 051127 1 RAD. SUPT. WELD. DEUTZ F4M2011
2 041225 1 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER, PST-2 C
3 1040690 2 OIL COOLER BRACKET, DU F4M2011
4 041224 4 VIBRATION DAMPER,1"x1.38"
5 6200427 2 FIT MJ7/8-M1"1/16UNF2A
6 6200284 2 FIT MJ7/8-MD22x150
7 058132 1 FLEX R1T16 (FJ90-FJ)7/8 LG1970 O
8 058133 1 FLEX R1T16 (FJ90-FJ)7/8 LG1725 O
Page 86
1040693_REL
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM, DU PST-2
Page 87
1040693_REL
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM, DU PST-2
1040693 AIR INTAKE SYSTEM, DU PST-2
1 9407094 1 SUPPORT, AIR FILTER
2 1037097 1 BRACKET, AIR FILTER
3 1040702 1 AIR INTAKE DUCT, DU-PST2 O
Page 88
1040694_A
EXHAUST SYSTEM, DU PST-2
Page 89
1040694_A
EXHAUST SYSTEM, DU PST-2
1040694 EXHAUST SYSTEM, DU PST-2
1 1037461 1 EXHAUST PIPE, DU PST-2, FRONT
2 1037462 1 EXHAUST PIPE, DU PST-2, REAR
3 AL71104 2 EXHAUST PIPE COLLAR
4 3600108 2 EXHAUST PIPE COLLAR
5 1037459 1 FLEXIBLE EXHAUST PIPE
6 037514 48 EXHAUST WRAP TAPE
Page 90
1040695_REL
ENGINE SUPPORT SYSTEM, DU PST2
Page 91
1040695_REL
ENGINE SUPPORT SYSTEM, DU PST2
1040695 ENGINE SUPPORT SYSTEM, DU PST2
1 1039472 1 ENGINE CRADLE, PST2, LSP
2 4200199 2 SILENT BLOCK
3 1037115 2 BRACKET, GEARBOX
4 038928 2 HEX BOLT M16X2.0X40mm 10.9 PLT
5 041227 4 HEX HD BOLT,M14x1.5x30,Gr8.8
Page 92
1040698_NC
THROTTLE CONTROL SYST, DU PST2
Page 93
1040698_NC
THROTTLE CONTROL SYST, DU PST2
1040698 THROTTLE CONTROL SYST, DU PST2
1 5833846 1 THROTTLE PEDAL C
2 5800157 1 ACCELERATION CABLE LENGTH 4000 C
3 5733200 1 BALL PIVOT
4 9207353 1 BRACKET, THROTTLE CABLE
5 5800432 1 CLAMP, CONTROL CABLE
Page 94
1041428_A1
DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY, PST2
Page 95
1041428_A1
DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY, PST2
1041428 DRIVE SHAFT ASSEMBLY, PST2
1 1040704 1 DRIVE SHAFT, PST2 C
2 038721 8 SKT HD CAP SRW,M10x35,12.9 PLT
3 042994 8 NUT M10X1.5, CL10,ZNC,ESNA
4 038526 16 FLAT WASHER, M10, ZN
Page 96
1041451_REL
FUEL SYSTEM, PROTECTOSEAL (FUE
Page 97
1041451_REL
FUEL SYSTEM, PROTECTOSEAL (FUE
1041451 FUEL SYSTEM, PROTECTOSEAL (FUE
1 1041445 1 FUEL TANK MODIFIED, THRD NECK
3 080722 1 CAP ASSY.,FUEL*1274
Page 98
1042134_A
THROT./DIPST. ASSY,FM2011/PST2
Page 99
1042134_A
THROT./DIPST. ASSY,FM2011/PST2
1042134 THROT./DIPST. ASSY,FM2011/PST2
1 1039484 1 SHORT;DIPSTICK;KIT;PST1/2
2 051134 1 CABLE STOP WELDMENT, F4M2011
3 1040699 1 THROTTLE CABLE BRACKET
4 1042265 1 OIL DIPSTICK, DEUTZ 2011 (STD)
Page 100
1042421_A1
DRIVESHAFT ASSEMBLY
Page 101
1042421_A1
DRIVESHAFT ASSEMBLY
1042421 DRIVESHAFT ASSEMBLY
1 1040704 1 DRIVE SHAFT, PST2 C
2 038721 8 SKT HD CAP SRW,M10x35,12.9 PLT
3 042994 4 NUT M10X1.5, CL10,ZNC,ESNA
Page 102
1042900_B
FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY
Page 103
1042900_B
FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY
1042900 FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY
1 1043449 1 FUEL TANK ALT.
2 042223 1 GASKET FUEL TANK O
3 042224 1 COVER GASKET FUEL TANK
5 1041668 1 ALTERED FUEL SENDER M
6 116411 5 MACH SCREW RD HD PPH 10-32X1"
7 128155 5 WASHER LOCK # 10 NOM I.D
8 5833173 1 CAP PLUG, D8
9 041890 1 RESERVOIR CAP
Page 104
504378_REL
GEARBOX
Page 105
504378_REL
GEARBOX
504378 GEARBOX
1 1038692-006 1 SEAL KIT, TRANSMISSION O
2 1038692-007 1 SEAL KIT, DISTRIBUTOR O
3 5200075-018 1 OIL LEVEL ROD
4 5200075-001 1 CARTRIDGE FILTER P
5 5200075-045 2 SEAL
6 5200075-040 1 GROMMET
8 5200075-020 1 SEAL
9 5200075-038 1 GROMMET
10 5200075-037 4 GAUGE
11 5200075-017 4 THRUST BEARING
12 5200075-006 2 SPRING
13 5200075-028 2 KIT;CLUTCH
14 5200075-041 2 SEAL
15 5200075-036 2 SEAL;OR
16 5200075-019 1 PISTON
18 5200075-024 1 SWITCH
Page 106
504379_A
GEARBOX
Page 107
504379_A
GEARBOX
504379 GEARBOX
19 5200075-016 1 SEAL
20 5200075-009 1 FILTER
21 5200075-010 1 SPRING
22 5200075-047 1 SEAL
23 5200075-015 1 PLUG
24 5200075-046 3 SEAL
25 1038692-011 3 SEAL
26 1038692-001 3 SOLENOID VALVE
27 1038692-012 1 SEAL
28 1038692-010 2 SEAL
29 5200075-045 7 SEAL
31 1038692-003 1 SEAL
32 1038692-004 3 COWL
33 1038736-009 1 DRIVE SHAFT,PST2 TRANSMISSION
Page 108
504380_REL
GEARBOX
Page 109
504380_REL
GEARBOX
504380 GEARBOX
33 1038692-005 1 COMPLETE DISTRIBUTOR
34 1038692-015 1 GROMMET
35 1038692-008 1 COMPLETE OIL PUMP
37 1038692-014 1 TORQUE CONVERTER
38 1038736-004 4 HEX BOLT M10*18
39 1038736-005 4 CONICAL WASHER
40 1038736-002 1 RE-INFORCING RING
Page 110
054738_E
BRAKE SYSTEM LSP/WSP
Page 111
054738_E
BRAKE SYSTEM LSP/WSP
054738 BRAKE SYSTEM LSP/WSP
10 9208272 1 BRAKE;PEDALE;ASSEMBLY
20 9406334 1 BRACKET, BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR
30 9344030 1 BRACKET, BRAKE FLUID TANK
40 6033002 1 BRAKE FLUID TANK C
50 1039328 1 HOSE, BRAKE FLUID O
60 1039329 1 HOSE, BRAKE FLUID O
70 1039331 1 TUBE, BRAKE LINE
80 9208282 1 TUBE;4,2M;10X100(OP1)-3/8(OP2)
90 9208252 1 BRAKE;PIPE
100 5500237 1 BRAKE;CORRECTOR
110 1037300 1 VACUUM PUMP, BRAKE ASSEMBLY
120 055466 1 TUBE;0,17M;10X100(OP1)-3/8(OP2
130 042272 1 UNION M10x1.0 INVERTED FLARE
140 042243 4 WASHER M8 SN657187ZP
150 042045 6 SCREW HEX M8 X 1.25 X 30
160 042048 5 WASHER, M8
170 038525 2 NYLON LOCKNUT, M8x1.25
180 015095 5 HOSE CLAMP 1/4 TO 7/8
190 9411518 1 SUPPORT;CORRECTEUR
200 9208231 1 TIGE DE LIAISON
210 9208230 1 ARTICULATION
220 9208281 1 SPACER
230 3200014 0 ECROU HU 8.8 D.8 ZING.934
240 138860 1 WASHER, FLAT-USS 1/2 NOM
250 042401 1 CAP SCRW HEX HD M8X1.25 X 55
260 AL71214 1 CONFLICT ITEM, SEE TEXT
Page 112
054739_NC
FRONT AXLE ASSY
Page 113
054739_NC
FRONT AXLE ASSY
054739 FRONT AXLE ASSY
1 1040786 12 WHEEL NUT M
2 AL71219 2 HOSE M C
3 1036944 2 SPRING KEY STEERING
4 1036949 2 SPRING FIXING
5 1037709 8 SCREW, CHC M16x170 12.9
6 3100092 8 VIS;H;M16X2;L060-38;8,8;ZING
7 3300028 8 WASHER ZINC COATED
8 3800003 6 COPPER SEAL O
9 5400061 1 AXLE, FRONT, DOUBLE CALIPER
10 5500005 1 HOSE O
11 5500029 1 TEE 10X100 PT6257 SATMO (55334
12 5500136 1 CLIP
13 5500195 2 BOLT, BANJO, 10X100
14 1039467 2 LEAF SPRING, ALTERED
15 5833737 2 SPRING AXLE M
16 6200335 0 FIT MJ9/16-M3/8BSPP
18 9406789 1 PIPE
19 9406790 1 PIPE
20 9207848 2 SHIM;ALT
21 5500240 2 HOSE O
Page 114
1037300_REL
VACUUM PUMP, BRAKE ASSEMBLY
Page 115
1037300_REL
VACUUM PUMP, BRAKE ASSEMBLY
1037300 VACUUM PUMP, BRAKE ASSEMBLY
1 5100271 1 VACUUM PUMP C
2 9408716 1 HOSE ASSEMBLY, BRAKE VAC PUMP O
Page 116
1040958_REL
WHEEL ASSY
Page 117
1040958_REL
WHEEL ASSY
1040958 WHEEL ASSY
1 1040960 1 RIM, 17.5x6.75 C
2 1040959 1 TIRE, 215/75R17.5 M
Page 118
1041480_B
REAR AXLE ASSEMBLY
Page 119
1041480_B
REAR AXLE ASSEMBLY
1041480 REAR AXLE ASSEMBLY
1 5300034 1 REAR;AXLE
2 1041722 2 LEAF SPRINGS
3 1040512 4 U-BOLT, LEAF SPRINGS
4 5833737 2 SPRING AXLE M
5 1043335 1 TEE FITTING M10 X 1
6 1040786 12 WHEEL NUT M
7 1043334 1 BRAKE HOSE LSP/WSP O
8 5500136 1 CLIP
9 9408787 1 BRAKE TUBE, REAR AXLE
10 9408788 1 BRAKE TUBE, REAR AXLE
Page 120
1041487_A
PARKING BRAKE ASSY, ORSCHELIN
Page 121
1041487_A
PARKING BRAKE ASSY, ORSCHELIN
1041487 PARKING BRAKE ASSY, ORSCHELIN
1 1009018 1 LEVER, BRAKE C
2 1041422 1 CABLE BRACKET, PARK BRAKE
3 1041423 1 BRACKET, LHS, PARKING BRAKE
4 1041424 1 BRACKET, RHS, PARKING BRAKE
5 AL64293 1 PARKING BRAKE CABLE LENGTH 4080/3760
6 9206505 1 BRAKE EQUALISER
7 1017989 1 BRACKET, PARK BRAKE SWITCH
8 1041425 1 SWITCH ASSEMBLY, PARKING BRAKE M
9 7200731 1 CONNECTOR,MALE,2 CONTACTS
10 7200733 1 2 WAYS WIRE SEAL
11 7200734 1 2PIN CONN. INTERFACE SEAL
12 7249651 2 FEMALE CONTACT
13 140580X.63 2 HYD TUBE 16MM X 0.65
Page 122
5300026-008_A
BRAKE ASSY (RIGHT)
Page 123
5300026-008_A
BRAKE ASSY (RIGHT)
5300026-008 BRAKE ASSY (RIGHT) O
1 5300026-0081 4 SADDLE;PRESSURE;SPRING
2 5300026-0082 2 SPRING
3 5300026-0083 2 PULL;ROD
4 5300026-0084 1 PULL;ROD;PARKING;BRAKE
5 5300026-0085 2 PIN
6 5300026-0086 1 PIN
7 5300026-0087 1 SPRING
8 5300026-0088 1 PIN
9 5300026-0089 1 BRAKE;CHAMBER;ASSEMBLY
10 5300026-00810 2 BOLT
11 5300026-00811 2 SPRING;WASHER
12 5300026-00812 1 PIN
13 5300026-00813 1 PUSH;ROD;PARKING;BRAKE
14 5300026-00814 1 PIN
15 5300026-00815 1 PUSH;ROD;PARKING;BRAKE
16 5300026-00816 1 SPRING
17 5300026-00817 1 ROCKER
18 5300026-00818 1 WASHER
19 5300026-00819 1 SPLINT;PIN
20 5300026-00820 1 PIN
21 5300026-00821 1 RIVETED;ASSEMBLY;SPRING
22 5300026-00822 1 COVER
23 5300026-00823 1 PARKING;BRAKE;ASSEMBLY
24 5300026-071 1 PARKING BRAKE CABLE, RHS M
25 5300026-00825 1 PAWL
26 5300026-00826 1 SPRING
27 5300026-00827 1 REGULATOR;ASSEMBLY
28 5300026-00828 1 SPRING
29 5300026-00829 2 FRICTION;PLATE;ASSEMBLY
30 5300026-00830 1 BACKPLANE;BRAKE
31 5300026-00831 4 BOLT
32 5300026-00832 4 SPRING;WASHER
Page 124
5300034_REL
REAR;AXLE
Page 125
5300034_REL
REAR;AXLE
5300034 REAR;AXLE
1 5300026-001 2 SHAFT
2 5300026-002 2 INNER OIL SEAL O
3 5300034-003 4 BOLT
4 5300034-004 4 SPRING WASHER
5 5300026-004 2 LOCK WASHER
6 5300026-003 2 NUT
7 5300026-062 2 OUTER BEARING C
8 5300026-063 2 REAR HUB
9 5300026-006 2 REAR BRAKE DRUM ASSY C
10 5300026-064 2 INNER BEARING C
11 5300026-065 2 INNER OIL SEAL O
12 5300026-061 2 OIL FENDER
13 5300026-014 2 BUSH C
14 5300034-001 16 TAPER SLEEVE
15 5300026-009 16 SHAFT NUT
16 5300026-010 16 HEAVY SPRING WASHER
17 5300026-011 16 BOLT
18 1040786 12 WHEEL NUT M
19 5300026-066 12 WHEEL STUD M
20 5300034-002 12 INNER WHEEL NUT
21 5300026-007 1 BRAKE ASSY (LEFT) O
22 5300026-008 1 BRAKE ASSY (RIGHT) O
23 5300026-023 16 BOLT
24 5300026-020 1 BACK BRIDGE SHELL ASSEMBLY
25 5300026-018 1 GASKET O
26 5300026-019 1 STOPPER
27 5300026-015 1 OPEN WIDE AEREAT STOPPER
29 5300026-021 16 NUT
30 5300026-017 1 GASKET O
31 5300026-016 1 MAGNETISM WHORL STOPPER
32 5300026-431 2 COVER BEARING
33 5300034-005 2 BOLT
Page 126
5300034_REL
REAR;AXLE
Page 127
5300034_REL
REAR;AXLE
34 5300034-006 2 SPRING WASHER

35 5300034-007 1 SHIM FOR ADJUSTING NUT,RIGHT
36 5300034-008 1 SHIM FOR ADJUSTING NUT,LEFT
37 5300026-024 4 SCREW
38 5300026-025 4 SPRING;WASHER
39 5300026-427 1 DRIVE GEAR
40 5300026-028 1 DISPATCH
41 5300026-412 12 BOLT
42 5300026-434 1 AXLE;GEAR
43 5300026-433 4 GEAR
44 5300034-009 4 SHIM
45 5300026-426 2 GEAR
46 5300026-425 2 SHIM
47 5300026-429 12 NUT
48 5300026-423 12 WASHER
49 5300034-010 12 WASHER
50 5300026-422 12 SCREW
51 5300026-421 2 BEARING
52 5300026-420 2 NUT
53 5300026-424 1 REDUCER SHELL;LEFT
54 5300026-294 1 BEARINGE KNOT
55 5300026-292 1 BEARING SEAT ADJUST FLAKE
56 5300026-293 1 PRINCIPLE BEARING
57 5300026-297 2 BEARING
58 5300026-442 1 SEAL
59 5300026-440 1 COVER
60 5300026-443 1 NUT
61 5300026-445 1 FLANGE
62 5300026-296 6 BOLT
64 5300026-441 1 O RING
65 5300034-011 2 BOLT
67 5300026-439 2 NUT
Page 128
5300034_REL
REAR;AXLE
Page 129
5300034_REL
REAR;AXLE
68 5300026-438 1 BAFFLE;BEARING
69 5300026-437 1 DRIVE GEAR
70 5300026-436 1 BEARING
71 5300026-435 1 SPACER
72 5300026-201 0 SHIM
73 5300026-026 9 SCREW
74 5300026-299 1 REDUCER SHELL ASSEMBLY
75 5300026-446 4 SCREW
76 5300026-027 13 WASHER
77 5300026-410 4 NUT
78 5300034-DOC 0 MAINTENANCE MANUEL, REAR AXLE
Page 130
5400053_A
FRONT AXLE
Page 131
5400053_A
FRONT AXLE
5400053 FRONT AXLE
1 5400053-001 2 CAP
2 5400053-002 2 NUT
3 5400053-003 2 WASHER
4 5400053-004 2 BEARING C
5 1040786 12 LUG NUT M
6 5400053-006 2 HUB;ASSY
7 5400053-007 2 BEARING C
8 5400053-008 2 SEAL O
9 5400053-009 1 CALIPER;LH C
10 5400053-010 4 WASHER
11 5400053-011 4 SCREW
12 5400053-012 2 PIN;SWIVEL
13 5400053-013 4 CAP;HUB
14 5400053-014 4 GREASER
15 5400053-015 1 AXLE;STRUCTURE
16 5400053-016 4 WASHER
17 5400053-017 4 SCREW
18 5400053-018 1 RIGHT STEERING KNUCKLE
19 5400053-019 2 PIN
20 5400053-020 1 LEFT STERRING KNUCKLE
21 5400053-021 4 WASHER
22 5400053-022 4 BUSH C
23 5400053-023 2 WASHER
24 5400053-024 2 NUT
25 5400053-025 2 SCREW
26 5400053-026 2 LH STEERING ROD
27 5400053-027 4 NUT
28 5400053-028 1 CYLINDER C
29 5400053-029 2 RH STEERING ROD
30 5400053-036 1 CALIPER;RH C
31 5400053-030 1 PADS;BRAKE M O
32 5400053-031 1 SEALS;KIT M O
33 5400053-032 2 DISC;BRAKE C
Page 132
5400053_A
FRONT AXLE
Page 133
5400053_A
FRONT AXLE
34 5400053-033 2 HUB
35 5400053-034 12 WHEEL STUD M
36 5400053-035 12 SCREW
Page 134
5400061_A
AXLE, FRONT, DOUBLE CALIPER
Page 135
5400061_A
AXLE, FRONT, DOUBLE CALIPER
5400061 AXLE, FRONT, DOUBLE CALIPER
10 5400053 1 FRONT AXLE
20 9208276 1 MOD; LHS ROCKET ASSEMBLY
30 9208277 1 MOD; RHS ROCKET ASSEMBLY
40 5400053-009 1 CALIPER;LH C
50 5400053-036 1 CALIPER;RH C
60 5400053-010 4 WASHER
70 5400053-011 4 SCREW
80 5400053-030 1 PADS;BRAKE M O
90 1039197 2 FRT SCHOCK ABSORBER YOKE
Page 136
9208272_C1
BRAKE;PEDALE;ASSEMBLY
Page 137
9208272_C1
BRAKE;PEDALE;ASSEMBLY
9208272 BRAKE;PEDALE;ASSEMBLY
1 5500241 1 BOOSTER C
2 5500239 1 MAITRE;CYLINDRE;43,4;CM3 C
3 9208271 1 ADAPTOR
4 9411382 1 BRAKE;PEDAL;SUPPORT
5 3800088 2 O'RING JT 1 1/2 (47 6X3
6 9208273 1 ROD
7 6200498 2 SCRW BANJO18X150LG 27 27057SAT
8 6200499 2 FITTING BANJO REF28038 SATMO
9 3800056 2 18X24X1,5 COPPER SEAL
10 3833215 2 19 X 24 X 1.5 COPPER SEAL
11 9411381 1 PEDAL, WELDMENT
12 9208268 1 ROD
13 4233077 1 PROGRESSIVE STOP
14 7333066 1 SWITCH, FOOT BRAKE C
15 1037123 2 BUSH C
16 9251351 1 SPRING C
17 1037155 1 ROD AXLE
18 1039211 1 AXLE
19 1039326 1 PEDAL
20 3833255 1 COPPER SEAL O 10 X 15 X 1
21 3800089 2 COPPER SEAL1612 14X18X1.5 7603
22 5533447 2 RAC M14.5/F10X100
23 5500103 1 VIS BOUCHON 10X100
24 042245 4 SOCKET HEAD M8 x35
25 042046 2 SCREW HEX M8 X 1.25 X 35
26 042048 2 WASHER, M8
27 3200004 2 NYLON LOCKNUT, M8x1.25
28 042244 1 NYLON NUT M6 LN400006
29 3233048 1 NUT M12 X 1.5 NF, ZINC
30 042278 1 WASHER M6, ZINC PLATED
31 042277 2 COTTER PIN 1/16'', L=3/4, ZINC
32 042280 2 BICONNICAL ADAPTER
Page 138
039129_NC1
LOWER SEAT PAN
Page 139
039129_NC1
LOWER SEAT PAN
039129 LOWER SEAT PAN
10 054743 1 LOWER SEAT PAN
20 105098 14 SCR,CAP BUTTON .38-16X1.0
30 107381 14 LOCK WASHER 3/8, REGULAR SST
40 138114 14 NUT, HEX ESNA 3/8-16
50 054783 1 SEAT TRAY MODIFICATION
Page 140
1037302_B
CAB ASSEMBLY
Page 141
1037302_B
CAB ASSEMBLY
1037302 CAB ASSEMBLY
1 1037329 1 CAB, EQUIPED
2 1037327 1 DASHBOARD ASSEMBLY, CAB
3 1042660 1 SEAT ASSEMBLY, LSP, STANDARD
4 1040953 1 RHS FIXED WINDOW ASSY
5 024296 2 CAP, GREASE NIPPLE
Page 142
1037327_REL
DASHBOARD ASSEMBLY, CAB
Page 143
1037327_REL
DASHBOARD ASSEMBLY, CAB
1037327 DASHBOARD ASSEMBLY, CAB
1 4533752 1 ICON, FRONT WIPER SWITCH
2 7233044 2 MOUNTING 3 SWITCH
3 7300362 1 EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON C
4 7300432 1 SWITCH, 2 POSITIONS C
5 7300433 1 SWITCH,ON-OFF,HAZARD LIGHT,12V C
6 7300434 1 SWITCH 3POS C
7 7300437 1 PICT, HAZARD LIGHTS SWITCH
8 7300438 1 LABEL, WORKING LIGHT
9 7333054 1 IGNITION KEY, KIT C
10 7533034 3 COVER, DASHBOARD SWITCH
11 7600016 1 BULB 12V 2W M
12 7600155 1 GREEN;INDICATOR-LIGHT M
13 7700099 4 BRACKET, CAB INDICATORS
14 7700112 1 INDICATOR 8 FUNCTIONS 50x100 C
15 7700114 1 CONFLICT ITEM, SEE TEXT C
16 7700119 1 KIT, INDICATOR C
Page 144
1037329_B
CAB, EQUIPED
Page 145
1037329_B
CAB, EQUIPED
1037329 CAB, EQUIPED
1 1040651 1 COVER, CAB
2 7300491 1 SWITCH, STEERING COLUMN C
3 4100045 1 LOCK + KEY
4 7300001 1 BATTERY DISCONNECTOR C
5 1038010 1 TRAY BELOW SEAT, CAB
6 AL27744 1 BRAID, 300MM HOLE 10.5
7 5933044 1 WINDSHIELD WASHER TANK C
8 4200259 3 HOSE, WINDSHIELD WASHER
9 1040665 1 BRACKET, MIRROR
10 9410179 0 CARPET
Page 146
1040953_A
RHS FIXED WINDOW ASSY
Page 147
1040953_A
RHS FIXED WINDOW ASSY
1040953 RHS FIXED WINDOW ASSY
1 9406771 1 RIGHT HAND SIDE PANEL
2 AL61472 3.2 SEAL, RHS CAB
3 4600260 1 WINDOW, RHS CAB
Page 148
1041500_B
OPTION,NEUTRAL LOCK SPEED LEV.
Page 149
1041500_B
OPTION,NEUTRAL LOCK SPEED LEV.
1041500 OPTION,NEUTRAL LOCK SPEED LEV.
1 177388 1 JOYSTICK
2 1041499 1 BRACKET, SPEED LEVER
3 1041856 1 LABEL, FWD
4 1041857 1 LABEL, REV
5 1041952 1 ELECTRICAL BOX, ALTERED
6 041559 1 STRAIN RELIEF 1/2 NPT, .24-.47
Page 150
1041582_REL
OPTION, KEYLESS IGNITION SWITC
Page 151
1041582_REL
OPTION, KEYLESS IGNITION SWITC
1041582 OPTION, KEYLESS IGNITION SWITC
1 013252 1 SWITCH, IGNITION*31-608 C
Page 152
4200440_A
SEAT
Page 153
4200440_A
SEAT
4200440 SEAT
1 4233360-002 1 BELT KIT WITH RETRACTOR C
2 4200393-002 1 CUSHION
3 4200393-003 1 BACKREST
4 4200393-001 1 SEAT SLIDING RAIL
5 4200440-100 1 SUSPENSION
6 4200441-001 1 APPUI;TETE
Page 154
5933204_A
CAB SS PORTE TYPE THX LARG1 4 12VPIPO
Page 155
5933204_A
CAB SS PORTE TYPE THX LARG1 4 12VPIPO
5933204 CAB SS PORTE TYPE THX LARG1 4 12VPIPO
1 5933217 1 CAB
2 5933217-100 1 WIPER, FRONT, ASSY
3 5933217-300 1 MIRROR REAR RIGHT KIT C
4 5933217-400 1 MIRROR, REAR, LEFT C
5 5933217-500 1 TRAP DOOR, KIT
Page 156
5933217-100_REL
WIPER, FRONT, ASSY
Page 157
5933217-100_REL
WIPER, FRONT, ASSY
5933217-100 WIPER, FRONT, ASSY
1 5933202-100 1 WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR C
2 5933187-902 1 PARALLELE WIPER ARM C
3 5933187-903 1 BLADE, FRONT WIPER BUISARD CAB M
Page 158
Rev. a
GRAZIANO
TRASMISSIONI
GROUP
MANUALE NORME DI
RIPARAZIONI
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
FOR TRANSMISSION
REPARATURANLEITUNG
NORMES DE REPARATION
PST2
D344r1 - P.N.3VT00583
Edizione n° 5 - 2005
5th Edition - 2005
5. Auflage - 2005
5 éme Edition - 2005
PST2
I PREFAZIONE
Il presente manuale, destinato alla clientela ed al personale addetto alla manutenzione, contiene le infor-
mazioni e istruzioni per la manutenzione e la riparazione della trasmissione GRAZIANO Trasmissioni.
È tassativamente raccomandato ai meccanici di leggere attentamente le istruzioni riprese nel presente
manuale, al fine di familiarizzarsi con i vari elementi della trasmissione, con il funzionamento delle parti,
con la procedura da adottarsi, per la ricerca di guasti e delle messe a punto da effettuare; i meccanici
sono inoltre invitati a riferirsi al presente manuale ogni volta che eseguiranno operazioni di manutenzione
o di riparazione.
Nel caso che si necessiti di pezzi per la riparazione o la sostituzione di elementi, si dovranno utilizzare
soltanto pezzi approvati per GRAZIANO Trasmissioni, cioè i pezzi indicati nella nomenclatura dei pezzi
di ricambio in vigore. L’impiego di pezzi approssimativamente equivalenti o non approvati può portare
pregiudizio al funzionamento ed alle prestazioni del materiale. GRAZIANO Trasmissioni Equipment
Company non garantisce i pezzi utilizzati per la riparazione o la sostituzione che non siano quelli da lei
forniti o approvati; inoltre la sua garanzia non interverrà in caso di incidenti provocati dall’impiego di tali
pezzi.
! Importante:
Ad ogni ordine di pezzi, indicare al concessionario il numero di serie ed il numero della
trasmissione.
GB FOREWORD
This manual has been prepared to provide the customer and the maintenance personnel with information
and instructions on the maintenance and repair of the transmission GRAZIANO Trasmissioni.
In order to become familiar with the various parts of the transmission, its principle of operation, trouble
shooting and adjustments, it is important for the mechanic to study the instructiotns of in this manual
carefully and use it as a reference when performing maintenance and repair operations.
Whenever repair or replacement of component parts is required, only GRAZIANO Trasmissioni appro-
ved spares as listed in the applicable spare catalogue should be used. Use of “will-fit” or non-approved
parts may endanger proper operation and performance of the equipment.
GRAZIANO Trasmissioni Equipment Company does not warrant repair or replacement not original parts;
nor failures resulting from the use thereof, which are not supplied by or approved by the GRAZIANO
Trasmissioni Equipment Company.
! Important:
Always furnish the Distributor with the transmission serial and model number when ordering
parts.
D VORWORT
Diese Handbuch soll dem Kunden und dem Wartungspersonal zur Information und Hilfestellung in Bezug
auf Wartung und Instandsetzung des GRAZIANO Trasmissioni -Getriebes dienen.
Der Aufwand für die regelmässige Wartung und Überprüfung des Ölstandes und der Einstellungen zahlt
sich durch störungsfreien Betrieb aus. Es ist zu empfehlen, dass die Mechaniker sich mit dem Handbuch
und der Funktion des Getriebes vertraut machen, sowie die Anweisungen befolgen. Bei der Instandsetzung
oder dem Austausch von Einzelteilen müssen ausschliesslich GRAZIANO Trasmissioni -Originalteile
verwendet werden, die im Ersatzteilverzeichnis aufgeführt sind.
Bei Verwendung von Nicht- GRAZIANO Trasmissioni -Originalteilen ist die optimale Funktion nicht
gewährleistet. Fernerhin erlischt jeglicher Garantieanspruch.
! Wichtig:
Bei der Bestellung von Ersatzteilen bitten wir Gerätetyp und Seriennummer des Getriebes
anzugeben. Technische Änderungen vorbehalten.
iii
PST2
F PREFACE
Ce manuel, destiné à la clientèle et au personnel préposé à l’entretien, contient tous les renseignements
et les instructions pour l’entretien et la réparation de la transmission GRAZIANO Trasmissioni.
C’est rigoureusement récommandé aux mécaniciens de lire soigneusement les instructions reprises dans
ce manuel, pour mieux comprendre les plusieurs éléments qui composent la transmission, le fonctionne-
ment del pièces, la procédure plus propre à suivre, pour la recherche de dérangements et des mises au
point à effectuer; en outre, les mécaniciens sont invités à consulter ce manuel en vue de chaque opéra-
tion d’entretien ou de réparation. Pour éventuelles réparations ou substitutions d’éléments, on devra utili-
ser uniquement des pièces approuvées pour GRAZIANO Trasmissioni, c’est à dire les pièces indiquées
dans la nomenclature des pièces de rechange en vigueur.
L’emploi de pièces approximativement équivalentes ou pas approuvées, peut compromettre le fonction-
nement et les performances du matériel. GRAZIANO Trasmissioni Equipment Company ne garanti
pas les pièces utilisées pour la réparation ou la substitution qui ne soient pas celles par elle fournies ou
approuvées; en outre, sa garantie n’est pas valable en cas d’incidents causés de l’emploi de ces pièces.
! Important:
Dans chaque ordre de pièces, indiquer au concessionaire le numéro de série et le numéro de la
transmission.
iv
PST2
INDICE I
NORME DI SICUREZZA ix
!
DATI TECNICI 1
1 Dati Tecnici 2
Schema elettrico della trasmissione 4
Schema cinematico della trasmissione 5
Descrizione generale della trasmissione 6
Viste generali PST2 con Presa di Forza 13
Sezione generale PST2 con Presa di Forza 15
Viste generali PST2 Axle Mount senza Presa di Forza 17
Sezione generale PST2 Axle Mount senza Presa di Forza 19
CIRCUITO IDRAULICO DELLA TRASMISSIONE 20

2 Descrizione circuito idraulico 24
Schema circuito idraulico 25
3
SMONTAGGIO E MONTAGGIO DELLA TRASMISSIONE 36
Istruzioni Generali 36
Conservazione ed utilizzo del prodotto 44
Attrezzi speciali 47
Smontaggio e montaggio trasmissione 48
Smontaggio coperchio Presa di Forza - versione “A” 51
Smontaggio coperchio Presa di Forza - versione “B” 53
Smontaggio trasmissione 55
Revisione frizioni marcia avanti e marcia indietro 61
Smontaggio e rimontaggio distributore 67
Rimontaggio frizioni 80
Rimontaggio della trasmissione 85
Rimontaggio gruppo Presa di Forza 88
Rimontaggio coperchio Presa di Forza - versione “A” 89
Rimontaggio coperchio Presa di Forza - versione “B” 91
TIPO OLIO 97
4 ISTALLAZIONE DELLA TRASMISSIONE 98
Controllo accoppiamento motore-cambio 99
Montaggio Della Trasmissione Sul Carrello 102
Schema accoppiamento motore con P. d. F. 103
Schema accoppiamento motore senza P.d.F. 110
DATI TECNICI - Prelievo pressione 112
RODAGGIO 116
5 Procedura di controllo del livello olio 116
MANUTENZIONE PERIODICA 120
6
RICERCA DIFETTI DI FUNZIONAMENTO 122
A - Indicazioni generali 122
B - Indicazioni di intervento 122
C - Diagnostica 126
Difetti di funzionamento comuni a tutte le marce 128
Anomalie di funzionamento a marce innestate 132
Problemi vari 134
Cattivo funzionamento in Folle 136
Surriscaldamento della trasmissione 137
7 ATTREZZI SPECIALI - DISEGNI 139
v
PST2
GB INDEX
SAFETY RULES xi
!
1
TECHNICAL DATA 1
Technical Data 2
Circuitry of the transmission 4
Kinematic diagram of the transmission 5
General description of the transmission 6
General views PST2 with Power take-off 12
General section PST2 with Power take-off 14
General views PST2 Axle Mount without Power take-off 15
General section PST2 Axle Mount without Power take-off 16
TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 21

2 Hydraulic diagram description 24
Hydraulic diagram 25
DISASSEMBLING AND RE-ASSEMBLING OF TRANSMISSION 38

3 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 38
Storage and service instructions 44
Specific tools 46
Dismantle and assemble transmission 48
Dismantling of Power take-off cover - version “A” 51
Dismantling of Power take-off cover - version “B” 53
Dismantle transmission 55
Forward and reverse clutch overhauling 61
Distributor valve disassembly and re-assembly 67
Clutches re-assembly 80
Transmission re-assembly 85
Power take-off re-assembly 88
Re-assembling of Power take-off cover - version “A” 89
Re-assembling of Power take-off cover - version “B” 91
OIL SPECIFICATIONS 97
4 TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION 98
Engine flywheel - housing installation check 99
INSTALLING TRANSMISSION INTO TRUCK 104
Engine with P. T. O. coupling diagram 105
Engine without P.T.O. coupling diagram 110
TECHNICAL DATA - Pressure measurement 112
5
RUNNING-IN 117
PROCEDURE TO CHECK OIL LEVEL 117
PERIODIC SERVICING 120
6 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
A - General information
123
123
B - Diagnosis of problems 123
C - Diagnosis 126
Common running faults in all gears 129
Running faults with gears engaged Forward and Reverse Gear 132
Further problems 134
Bad working in idle 136
Transmission overheating 137
7 SPECIFIC TOOLS - DRAWINGS 139
vi
PST2
INHALTSVERZEICHNIS D
SICHERHEITS VORSCHRIFTEN xiii

!
1
TECHNISCHE DATEN 1
Technische Daten 3
Schatlplan des Getriebes 4
Kinematikdiagramm des Getriebes 5
Allgemeine Beschreibung 6
Generelle Ansicht PST2 mit Nebenabtrieb 12
Allgemeine Hinweise PST2 mit Nebenabtrieb 15
Generelle Ansicht PST2 Axle Mount ohne Nebenabtrieb 17
Allgemeine Hinweise PST2 Axle Mount ohne Nebenabtrieb 19
2
GETRIEBE HYDRAULIK SYSTEM 22
Beschreibung Hydraulikschema 24
Hydraulikschema 25
3
GETRIEBE DEMONTAGE UND MONTAGE 40
Haupt Instruktionen 40
Lager - und Service Hinweise 45
Spezialwerkzeug 47
Getriebe Demontage und Montage 48
Nebenantriebsdeckeldemontage Version“A” 51
Nebenantriebsdeckeldemontage Version“B” 53
Getriebe Demontage 55
Ausprüfung der Vorwärts- und Rückwärtsgang Kupplungen - Demontage 61
Steuerblock - Demontage und Montage 67
Kupplungsmontage 80
Getriebe Montage 85
Einbau Nebenabtrieb 88
Nebenantriebsdeckelmontage Version “A” 89
Nebenantriebsdeckelmontage Version “B” 91
ÖLSPEZIFIKATION 97
4 INSTALLATION GETRIEBE 100
Rundlaufkontrolle 101
MONTAGE DES GETRIEBES AM FAHRGESTELL 106
Einbau-Schema Motor mit Nebenabtrieb 107
Einbau-Schema Motor ohne Nebenabtrieb 110
TECHNISCHE DATEN - Druckmessung 114
INBETRIEBNAHME 118
5 VERFAHREN ÖLSTAND PRÜFEN
REGELMÄßIGE WARTUNG
118
121
6
FEHLERSUCHE 124
A - Allgemeines 124
B - Schadenssuche bzw. - Behebung 124
C - Untersuchung 127
Gilt für alle funktionsstörungen 130
Funktionsstörungen bei eingelegtem gang Vorwärts- und Rückwärtsgang 133
Sonstige probleme 135
Schlechter leerlaufbetrieb 136
Getriebeüberhitzung 138
7 SPEZIALWERKZEUG - ZEICHNUNG 139
vii
PST2
F INDEX
NORMES DE SURETE xv
!
DONNEES TECHNIQUES 1
1 Donnees Techniques 3
Schéma électrique 4
Schéma cinématique 5
Description générale 6
Vues générales PST2 avec Prise de Force 13
Section générales PST2 avec Prise de Force 15
Vues générales PST2 sans Prise de Force 17
Section générales PST2 sans Prise de Force 19
CIRCUIT HYDRAULIQUE DE LA TRANSMISSION 23

2 Description du circuit hydraulique
Schema du circuit hydraulique
24
25
DEMONTAGE ET MONTAGE DE LA TRANSMISSION 42

3 Généralites 43
Conservation et utilisation du produit 45
Outils spéciaux 47
Démontage et rémontage de la Transmission 48
Demontage couvercle prise de force - version “A” 51
Demontage couvercle prise de force - version “B” 53
Démontage de la Transmission 55
Révision des embrayages Marche Avant et Marche Arrière 61
Demontage et Remontage du Distributeur 67
Remontage embrayages 80
Remontage de la transmission 85
Rémontage du groupe Prise de force 88
Rémontage couvercle prise de force - version “A” 89
Rémontage couvercle prise de force - version “B” 91
TYPE HUILE 97
4 INSTALLATION DE LA TRANSMISSION 100
Contrôle accouplement moteur-boîte 101
Montage de la Transmission sur le Chariot 108
Schéma d’accouplement moteur avec P. d. F. 109
Schéma d’accouplement moteur sans P. d. F. 110
DONNEES TECHNIQUES - Prelevement de pression 114
RODAGE 119
5 Procedure de controle du niveau d’huile
ENTRETIEN PERIODIQUE
119
121
6
RECHERCHE DE PANNES DE FONCTIONNEMENT 125
A- Généralites 125
B- Indications d’intervention 125
C- Diagnostic 127
Defauts de fonctionnement pour toutes les vitesse 131
Anomalies de fonctionnement avec marches mises 133
Problemes divers 135
Mauvais fonctionnement au point mort 136
Surcharge de la transmission 138
7 OUTILS SPECIAUX - PLAN 139
viii
PST2
I NORME DI SICUREZZA !
ATTENZIONE A QUESTO SIMBOLO
Questo simbolo di avvertimento segnala messaggi importanti che interessano la vostra sicurezza.
Leggete attentamente le norme di sicurezza riportate ed attenetevi alle precauzioni consigliate al fine di
evitare pericoli potenziali e salvaguardare la vostra salute ed incolumità personale.
EVITARE GLI INCIDENTI

La maggior parte degli incidenti ed infortuni che si verificano nelle officine sono causati dalla manca-
ta osservanza di qualche semplice e fondamentale regola di prudenza e sicurezza.
Per questa ragione nella maggior parte dei casi essi possono essere evitati: basta prevederne le possi-
bili cause ed agire di conseguenza con la necessaria cautela e prudenza.
Con qualsiasi tipo di macchina, per quanto ben progettata e costruita, non è possibile escludere in
assoluto ogni eventualità di incidente.
Un meccanico attento e prudente è la migliore garanzia contro gli incidenti.
L’osservanza scrupolosa di una sola ed elementare norma di sicurezza sarebbe già suffi-ciente ad evi-
tare molti infortuni gravi.
PERICOLO! Non eseguire mai alcun intervento di pulizia, lubrificazione o manutenzione

con il motore in moto.
NORME DI SICUREZZA
GENERALITÀ
Seguire attentamente le procedure di manutenzione e di riparazione prescritte.
Non indossare anelli, orologi da polso, gioielli, capi di vestiario slacciati o penzolanti quali ad
esempio: cravatte, indumenti strappati, sciarpe, giacche sbottonate o bluse con chiusura a
lampo aperte che possono impigliarsi nelle parti in movimento. Si consiglia invece di usare capi
appropriati ai fini antinfortunistici, ad esempio: scarpe antiscivolo, guanti, occhialidi sicurezza, elmetti,
ecc...
Non eseguire alcun intervento assistenziale sulla macchina con persone sul sedile conduttore,
salvo che siano operatori abilitati e coadiuvino all’operazione da svolgere.
Non far funzionare la macchina od usare i relativi attrezzi da altra posizione che non sia quella a
sedere del posto di guida.
Non eseguire mai alcun intervento sulla macchina quando il motore è in moto, salvo che ciò risulti
prescritto.
Arrestare il motore ed accertarsi che non vi sia più pressione prima di staccare tubazioni, cappel-
lotti, coperchi, valvole, etc.
Tutti gli interventi assistenziali devono essere eseguiti con la massima cura ed attenzione.
Scollegare le batterie ed etichettare tutti i comandi per segnalare che un intervento è in corso.
Bloccare la macchina e ogni attrezzatura che deve essere sollevata.
I freni sono inattivi quando vengono rilasciati manualmente per interventi assistenziali: in tali casi
occorre provvedere a mantenere il controllo della macchina mediante opportuni bloccaggi o
simili.
ix
PST2
I NORME DI SICUREZZA
!
Dovendo sollevare o trasportare delle parti pesanti, servirsi di paranchi e simili di adeguata capa-
cità.
Prestare particolare attenzione alla presenza di persone nelle vicinanze.
Non versare mai benzina o gasolio in recipienti aperti, ampi e bassi.
Non utilizzare mai benzina, gasolio od altri liquidi infiammabili come detergenti: ricorrere invece ai
solventi commerciali ininfiammabili e non tossici.
Impiegando aria compressa per la pulizia dei particolari, proteggersi con occhiali aventi ripari
laterali.
Limitare la pressione ad un massimo di 2,1 bar secondo le norme vigenti locali o nazionali.
Non servirsi di fiamme come mezzo di illuminazione quando si procede ad operazioni o si ricer-
cano perdite sulla macchina.
Spostarsi con ogni cautela quando si debbano eseguire lavori sotto la macchina, indossare gli
equipaggiamenti di sicurezza previsti: elmetti, occhiali e scarpe speciali.
La zona dove si svolgono operazioni di manutenzione deve essere tenuta sempre PULITA ed
ASCIUTTA. Eliminare immediatamente eventuali pozze d’acqua o macchie d’olio.
x
PST2
GB SAFETY RULES !
WATCH FOR THIS SIGN
This sign identify important messages devoted to your safety.

Read carefully safety rules reported here and follow with the greatest care all recommended sugges-
tion to avoid potential dangers and protect your health and personal safety.
AVOID CAUSALITIES
Most of all injuries and accidents that are encountered in workshops are caused by disregarding
some simple and basic caution and safety rule.
For this reason most of these events can be avoided. To anticipate possible causes will suffice and
acting accordingly with proper care and caution.
Each kind of operating machine, even if correctly planned and assembled, cannot be absolutely
safe.
A cautious and careful operator is the best warrant against injuries.
Following scrupulously safety rules will be sufficient to prevent many dangerous injuries.
DANGER! Don’t clean, lubricate or service with engine running.
SAFETY RULES
GENERAL
Follow strictly directions reported for servicing and repair operations.
Don’t wear rings, wrist watches, loose clothes, i.e.: neckties, torn clothing, scarves, unbuttoned
jackets or overall with open zip that could be entangled in moving parts. It is recommended use
of proper accident preventing clothing, i.e.: anti-slip shoes, gloves, goggles helmets, etc.
Don’t start any servicing operation on machine with anyone on driver seat, except for authorized
operator that cooperate for the work to be done.
Don’t operate machine or use relevant equipment from position other than driver’s seat.
Don’t service machine with engine running, if not specified by repair instructions.
Stop engine and make sure there is no pressure when disconnecting piping, caps, covers, valves,
etc.
All servicing operations must be performed with best attention and care.
Disconnect batteries and mark all controls to point out that servicing operations are on course.
Lock machine, all equipment must be lifted up and mechanically secured accordingly, with the
appropriate device.
Brakes are inoperative when hand released for servicing operations: in such a condition machine
control should be provided by proper blocks or similar equipment.
Should heavy components be displaced or moved, use proper hoist or similar equipment.
Care for people near operation areas.
Never pour gasoline or diesel fuel in open, large and low vessels.
xi
PST2
GB SAFETY RULES
!
Never use gasoline, diesel fuel or other inflammable fluids as detergent. Use only commercial
non toxic, uninflammable cleaning compounds.
When using compressed air for cleaning purposes wear goggles with side shields.
Pressure must be limited to 2.1 bar max., according current safety rules.
Never use free flame for illumination when operations are devoted to repair or locate leaks.
Caution when repair shall be carried out working under machine, wear safety equipment: hel-
mets, goggles and safety shoes.
Area where servicing operations are carried out must be always kept CLEAN and DRY.
Clean and dry immediately any oil or water puddle.
xii
PST2
D SICHERHEITS VORSCHRIFTEN !
BEACHTE DIESES ZEICHEN
Dieses Zeichen bedeutet wichtige Information bezüglich Sicherheit. Lese und Beachte unbedingt
die Sicherheitsbestimmungen die hier beschrieben sind und folge mit größter Aufmerksamkeit allen
Anweisungen um potentielle Gefahren zu vermeiden sowie zum Schutz von Gesundheit und persönli-
cher Sicherheit.
VERMEIDE KAUSALITÄTEN
Die meisten Unfälle und Verwundungen in Werkstätten entstehen durch Ignoranz und Nichtbeachtung
der einfachsten und grundlegenden Vorsichts- und Sicherheitsbestimmungen.
Die meisten dieser Vorkommnisse können vermieden werden. Durch Abschätzung möglicher
Gefahren kann entsprechend verfahren werden und richtiges Verhalten vermeidet Gefahr.
Jede Art von Maschine, selbst wenn richtig geplant und gebaut, kann nicht absolut sicher sein.
Ein Verantwortungsvoller und Sicherheitsbewußter Fahrer ist die beste Garantie gegen Unfälle.
Die strikte Anwendung einfacher elementarer Sicherheitsregeln ist ausreichend um viele gefährliche
Unfälle zu vermeiden.
GEFAHR! Alle Reinigungs-Abschmier-oder Service Arbeiten sollen nicht bei Laufendem Motor
vorgenommen werden.
SICHERHEITS BESTIMMUNGEN
GENERELL
Folge strikt den Anweisungen für Service - und Reparaturarbeiten.
Trage keine Ringe, Armbanduhren, lose Kleidung, wie zum Beispiel Krawatten, zerrissene
Kleidung, Schales, ungeknöpfte Jacken oder Overalls mit offenem Reißverschluß welche durch
rotierende / bewegte Teile erfasst werden können.
Beginne keine Service Arbeiten, wenn jemand im Fahrersitz ist, Ausnahme nach Absprache
für Funktionen zur Durchführung einer Arbeit.
Bewege keine Maschine oder Komponenten von einer Position anders als vom Fahrersitz.
Führe keine Service Arbeiten durch wenn der Motor läuft, es sei denn es ist in den
Reparaturanweisungen spezifiziert.
Stelle den Motor ab und stelle sicher, daß kein Druck vorhanden ist wenn Rohre, Schläuche,
Kappen, Deckel, Ventile oder ähnliches abgeschraubt wird.
Alle Service Operationen müssen mit der größtmöglichen Aufmerksamkeit und Vorsicht ausge-
führt werden.
Trenne Batterie Verbindungen und markiere alle Kontroll Instrumente um anzuzeigen, daß Service
Arbeiten ausgeführt werden.
Blockiere die Maschine, alle Anbauten müssen in oberste Stellung gebracht werden und mecha-
nisch gesichert mit den entsprechenden Stützen.
xiii
PST2
D SICHERHEITS VORSCHRIFTEN
!
Bremsen sind nicht in Funktion wenn durch Hand freigegeben für Service arbeiten. In diesem
Zustand muß die Maschine durch entsprechende vorgeschriebene Keile oder Blöcke gesichert
sein.
Zum Bewegen von schweren Teilen wenn erforderlich, muß das entsprechende Hebezeug
verwendet werden.
Vorsicht für Leute die in unmittelbarer Umgebung arbeiten.
Benütze und fülle niemals Benzin oder Diesel in offenen großen und niedrigen Behältern.
Benütze niemals Benzin, Diesel oder andere entzündbare Flüssigkeiten als Reinigungsmittel,
benütze nur kommerzielle, ungiftige, nichtbrennbare Reinigungsmittel.
Bei Benützung von Druckluft zur Reinigung trage Schutzbrille mit Seitenschutz.
Druck muß reduziert sein auf 2,1 bar Maximum, entsprechend der momentanen
Sicherheitsvorschriften.
Benütze niemals eine offene Flamme zur Beleuchtung wenn Arbeiten notwendig sind um
Leckagen zu finden oder zu Reparieren.
Vorsicht wenn Arbeiten unter der Maschine notwendig sind, trage Sicherheitskleidung wie Helm,
Sicherheitsbrille und Sicherheitsschuhe.
Der Arbeitsplatz wo Service Arbeiten durchgeführt werden muß immer sauber und trocken sein.
Beseitige unmittelbar Öl oder Wasser Pfützen.
xiv
PST2
F NORMES DE SURETE !
ATTENTION A CE SYMBOL
Ce symbol d’avertissement signale des messages importants concernants votre sûreté. Lire soigneu-
sement les normes de sûreté mentionnées et se conformer aux précautions conseillées au but d’éviter
dangers éventuels et sauvegarder votre santé et votre sûreté personnelles.
EVITER LES ACCIDENTS

Les accidents les plus fréquents dans les usines se vérifient à cause de la manquée observation de
quelques simples et fondamentales règles de prudence et sûreté.
Pour cette raison presque toujours est possible de les éviter: il suffit prévoir les causes possibles et
agir par conséquent avec la prudence nécessaire.
Pour tous les modèles de machine, même si bien projetée et construite, il n’est pas possible d’ex-
clure du tout les éventualités d’accident.
Un mécanicien diligent et prudent est la meilleure garantie contre les accidents.
L’observation scrupuleuse d’une seule et élementaire norme de sûreté serait déjà suffisante à éviter
beaucoup d’accidents graves.
DANGER! Ne jamais exécuter aucune intervention de nettoyage, lubrification ou

entretien à moteur en marche.
NORMES DE SURETE
GENERALITES
Suivre soigneusement les procédures d’entretien et de réparation prescrittes.
Ne pas mettre de bagues, montres, bijoux, pièces déboutonnés ou pendillantes, par exemple:
cravates, vêtements déchirés, écharpes, vestes déboutonnées ou blouses avec charnieres
ouvertes qui peuvent s’accrocher dans les parties en mouvement. Il est conseillé plutôt d’utiliser
des pièces appropriées anti-accidents, par exemple chaussures antiglisse, gants, lunettes de
sûreté, casques, etc.
N’exécuter aucune intervention d’assistance sur la machine avec des personnes à la place du
conducteur à moins qu’ils soyent des opérateurs certifiés coadjuvants à l’opération à effectuer.
Ne pas actionner la machine ou utiliser les relatifs outils d’une position différente de la place du
conducteur.
Ne jamais exécuter aucune intervention sur la machine à moteur en marche si non demandé.
Arrêter le moteur et s’assurer qu’il n’y a plus de pression avant de détacher tuyauteries, capu-
chons, couvercles, soupapes, etc.
Toutes les interventions d’assistance doivent être effectuées avec le plus grand soin et attention.
Disjoindre les batteries et étiquetter toutes les commandes pour signaler qu’une intervention est
en cours. Bloquer la machine et tous les outillages qui doivent être soulevés.
Les freins sont inactifs quand on les rêlache manuelment à cause d’interventions d’assistance:
dans ces cas il faut s’occuper de maintenir le contrôle de la machine au moyen d’ opportuns
blocages ou similaires.
xv
PST2
F NORMES DE SURETE
!
Pour soulever ou transporter des parties lourdes se servir de palans et similaires d’adéquate
capacité.
Faire beaucoup d’attention à la présence de personnes dans les voisinages.
Ne jamais verser d’essence ou gaz-oil dans des récipients ouverts, amples et bas.
Ne jamais utiliser d’essence, gaz-oil ou autres liquides inflammables comme détergents: utiliser
plutôt des solvants commerciaux ni inflammables ni toxiques.
En employant de l’air comprimé pour le nettoyage des éléments, se protéger par des lunettes
avec protection de chaque côté.
Limiter la pression à un maximum de 2,1 bar selon les lois en vigueur du lieu ou nationales.
Ne pas se servir de flammes comme moyen d’éclairage quand on procède à opérations ou on

recherche des pertes sur la machine.
Se déplacer avec beaucoup de prudence quand on doit exécuter des travaux sous la machine,
utiliser les équipements de sûreté prévus: casques, lunettes et chaussures spéciales.
La zone ou se déroulent les opérations d’entretien doit être tenue toujours propre et seche.
Éliminer immédiatement éventuelles flaques d’eau ou taches d’huile.
xvi
PST2
DATI TECNICI
TECHNICAL DATA
TECHNISCHE DATEN
DONNEES TECHNIQUES
1
Trasmissione PST2 con Presa di Forza
Transmission PST2 with Power take-off
Getriebe PST2 mit Nebenabtrieb
Transmission PST2 avec Prise de Force
A C
B D
Trasmissione PST2 Axle Mount senza Presa di Forza

Transmission PST2 Axle Mount without Power take-off
Getriebe PST2 Axle Mount ohne Nebenabtrieb
Transmission PST2 sans Prise de Force
E G
F H
1
PST2
DATI TECNICI
TECHNICAL DATA
I Trasmissione PST2
Frizioni cambio powershift: pressione di comando min. 8,5 bar, max. 9,5 bar
Convertitore: ■ pressione ingresso min. 4 bar, max. 5 bar
■ pressione uscita min. 2 bar, max. 3 bar
Lubrificazione: pressione 0,8 ÷ 1 bar
Nota: i dati riportati sono riferiti alla trasmissione in condizioni di temperatura di regime (80 - 100° C)
e regime motore di circa 2.000 giri al minuto e comunque prossimo al regime massimo.
Temperatura: ■ funzionamento di regime: 80 - 100° C
■ picco: 120° C
Tipo e qualità d’olio: vedere pag. 97
Filtro olio: ■ grado di filtraggio nominale = 25 µm
■ pressione taratura by-pass 1,6 ÷ 1,8 bar
■ pressione di scoppio ≥ 30 bar
Impianto elettrico: ■ tensione: 12 V C. C. (24 V C. C.)
■ potenza: 10 W
GB Transmission PST2
Powershift transmission clutches: operational pressure min. 8.5 bar, max 9.5 bar
Converter: ■ input pressure min. 4 bar, max. 5 bar
■ output pressure min. 2 bar, max. 3 bar
Lubrication: pressure 0.8 ÷1 bar
Note: the above mentioned data refer to an operative temperature of 80 - 100° C and a engine speed
of about 2000 r.p.m.
Temperature: ■ normal operation: 80 - 100° C
■ peak: 120° C
Oil type and quality: see page 97
Oil filter: ■ nominal filtration ratio = 25 µm
■ by-pass setting pressure 1.6 ÷ 1.8 bar
■ burst pressure ≥ 30 bar
Electrical installation: ■ voltage: 12 V d.c. (24 V d.c.)
■ power: 10 W
2
PST2
TECHNISCHE DATEN
DONNEES TECHNIQUES
1
Getriebe PST2 D
Lastschaltgetriebe-Kupplungen: Betriebsdruck min. 8,5 bar, max. 9,5 bar

Drehmomentwandler: ■ Eingangsdruck min. 4 bar, max. 5 bar
■ Ausgangsdruck min. 2 bar, max. 3 bar
Schmierung: Druck 0,8 ÷ 1 bar
Anmerkung: obige Daten beziehen sich auf eine Getriebeöltemperatur von ~ 80 - 100°C
und eine Motordrehzahl ~ 2000 U/min
Temperatur: ■ normale Betrebsbedingunge: 80 - 100°C
■ max.: 120° C
Ölsorte und Ölqualität: Siehe Seite 97
Ölfilter: ■ Filterfeinheit = 25 µm
■ By-Pass Eichungsdruck 1,6 ÷ 1,8 bar
■ Berstdruck ≥ 30 bar
Elektrische Installation: ■ Spannung: 12 V Gleichstrom (24 V Gleichstrom)
■ Leistung: 10 W
Transmission PST2 F
Embrayages: pression de commande 8,5 bar mini, 9,5 bar maxi

Convertisseur: ■ pression d’entrée 4 bar mini, 5 bar maxi
■ pression sortie 2 bar mini, 3 bar maxi
Lubrification: pression 0,8 à 1 bar
Note: les données susmentionnées se rapportent à la transmission utilisée dans des conditions
de température normales (100°C) et à un régime moteur maxi de 2000 tr/min.
Température: ■ fonctionnement en régime constant 80 - 100°C
■ en charge: 120°C
Type d’huile, genre et quantité: voir page 97
Filtre à huile: ■ degré de filtration = 25 µm
■ pression d’étalonnage avec dérivation 1,6 ÷1,8 bar
■ pression d’explosion supérieure ou égale à 30 bar
Equipment électrique: ■ Tension: 12 V C.C. (24 V C.C.)
■ Puissance: 10 W
3
PST2
Schema elettrico
Circuitry
Schaltplan
Schéma électrique
2
I 1 - Commutatore
2 - Fusibile
3 - Lampadina
4 - Elettrovalvola
Tensione 12/24 V CC/DC
1 1 Potenza 5W max.
1a 5 - Distributore
Marcia Avanti Retromarcia
Forward Clutch Reverse Clutch 2a GB 1 - Commutator
Vorwärts Rückwärts 2 - Fuse
Marche Avant�� Marche Arrière�� 3 - Electric Bulb
4 - Solenoid valves
Voltage12/24 V CC/DC
Power 5W max.
5 - Valves body
D 1 - Schalter
2 - Sicherung
3 - Kontrolleuchte
4 - Magnetventil
5 Spannung 12/24 V CC/DC
Leistung 5W max.
4 4 4 5 - Steuerblock
3 3
F 1 - Commutateur
2 - Fusible
3 - Ampoule
P. P. P. 4 - Electrovannes
Tension 12/24 V CC/DC
MA RM Puissance 5 W
1a - 2 a
Forward Reverse 5 - Distributeur
Vorwärts Rückwärts
Marche Avant�� Marche Arrière��
TABELLA CONDIZIONI COMANDO

DRIVING CONDITION SCHEDULE
ELEKTROBEDIENUNGSTABELLE
TABLEAU CONDITIONNES COMMANDE
M. AVANTI RETROMARCIA CONDIZIONI DI MARCIA
FORWARD REVERSE OUTPUT CONDITION
VORWÄRTS RÜCKWÄRTS
1-2 GANGBEDINGUNGEN
MARCHE AVANT MARCHE ARRIÈRE CONDITIONS DE MARCHE
ON 1a MARCIA AVANTI
1st FORWARD GEAR
ON 1. VORWÄRTSGANG
OFF 1ére MARCHE AVANT
ON 1a MARCIA RETRO
1st REVERSE GEAR
ON 1. RÜCKWÄRTSGANG
OFF 1ére MARCHE ARRIÈRE
ON 2a MARCIA AVANTI
2nd FORWARD GEAR
OFF 2. VORWÄRTSGANG
OFF 2éme MARCHE AVANT
ON 2a MARCIA RETRO
2nd REVERSE GEAR
OFF 2. RÜCKWÄRTSGANG
OFF 2éme MARCHE ARRIÈRE
4
PST2
1
Schema cinematico della trasmissione con P.d.F.
Kinematic diagram of the transmission with P.T.O.
Kinematikdiagramm des Getriebes mit Nebenabtrieb
Schéma cinematique de la transmission avec prise de force
Presa di Forza
Power take off
Nebenabtrieb
Prise de force
Entrata
Input
Eingang
Entrée
Uscita
Output
Pompa Ausgang
Pump Sortie
Pumpe
Pompe
Schema cinematico della trasmissione senza P.d.F.

Kinematic diagram of the transmission without P.T.O.
Kinematikdiagramm des Getriebes ohne Nebenabtrieb
Schéma cinematique de la transmission sans prise de force.
Entrata
Input
Eingang
Entrée
Uscita
Output
Pompa Ausgang
Pump Sortie
Pumpe
Pompe
5
PST2
I Descrizione generale
La trasmissione è dotata di convertitore monostadio con ruota libera per ottenere i massimi ren-
dimenti con bassi rapporti di slittamento. Ha quattro frizioni idrauliche (una per ogni marcia: 1a
avanti, 2a avanti, 1a indietro, 2a indietro) a dischi multipli in bagno d’olio con ingranaggi sempre
in presa, aventi rapporti uguali per l’avanti e per l’indietro.
La selezione del senso di marcia è ottenuta per mezzo di selettori idraulici servocomandati elet-
tricamente. Il gruppo è racchiuso in una scatola nella quale sono incorporati sistemi idraulici per
l’attuazione delle frizioni e la coppa dell’olio.
GB General description
The transmission is equipped with a single-stage torque converter with free wheel. Thus a high
efficiency over the whole range of operation is achieved. It has four hydraulic clutches (one for
each gear: 1st forward gear, 2nd forward gear, 1st reverse gear, 2nd reverse gear) with multiple wet
disks, while the constant mesh gears have the same ratio in forward and reverse gear. The selec-
tion of direction is effected by hydraulic selectors, which are controlled electrically.
The group is fitted into a housing equipped with hydraulic pistons for the actuation of the clutch-
es and the oil sump.
D Allgemeine Beschreibung
Das Getriebe ist mit einem einstufigen Wandler mit Leitradfreilauf ausgerüstet. Damit wird ein
hoher Wirkungsgrad über den gesamten Betriebsbereich erreicht. Es hat vier hydraulische
Lamellen Kupplungen (eine für jeden Gang: 1. Vorwärtsgang, 2. Vorwärtsgang, 1. Rückwärtsgang,
2. Rückwärtsgang), wobei die ständig im Eingriff befindlichen Zahnräder für Vorwärts- und
Rückwärtsgang dasselbe Übersetzungsverhältnis haben.
Die Lamellenkupplungen werden hydraulisch geschlossen.
Die Schaltung erfolgt über elektrisch betätigte Magnetventile.
F Description générale
La trasmissione comprend un convertisseur de couple monoétage, une boîte à inverseur mono-
vitesse, embrayable sous charge grâce à 4 embrayages hydrauliques multi-disques (un pour
tout les marche: 1ère Marche Avant, 2ème Marche Avant, 1ère Marche Arrière, 2ème Marche
Arrière). Les engrenages sont tous en prise constante et supportés par des roulements tournants.
La sélection du sens de marche s’effectue au moyen de sélecteurs hydrauliques électro-pilotés.
I Accoppiamento al motore
Un accoppiamento al motore mediante piatto flessibile collega direttamente il convertitore di
coppia con il volano motore (vedi pag. 103 - 110).
GB Connection engine - converter

The converter is connected to the engine flywheel via flexible drive plate (see page 105 - 110 ).
D Verbindung Motor - Wandler

Der Drehmomentwandler wird mit einer axial-elastischen Membrane am Motorschwungrad
angeflanscht (siehe Seite 107 - 110).
F Accouplement au moteur
Un accouplement à plateau élastique relie directement le convertisseur de couple au volant-
moteur (voir page 109 - 110).
6
PST2
1
I Convertitore di coppia
Il convertitore monostadio è studiato per ottenere la massima flessibilità e le massime prestazioni
in accoppiamento al motore termico. Esso è in grado di trasmettere coppie ben superiori a quelle
fornite dal motore e di conseguenza garantisce la massima affidabilità.
GB Torque converter
The single-stage converter has been designed to obtain maximum flexibility when being con-
nected to different engines with different performances. It is able to transmit considerable power
and guarantees maximum reliability.
D Drehmomentwandler
Der einstufige Drehmomentwandler wurde so ausgelegt, daß größtmögliche Flexibilität beim
Anbau an verschiedene Motoren unterschiedlicher Leistung erreicht wird.
F Convertisseur de couple
Le convertisseur mono-étage à roue libre est conçu pour obtenir une souplesse, un rendement, et
des performances optima, dans son accouplement au moteur thermique. Cet organe, qui permet
de transmettre des couples supérieurs à ceux fournis par le moteur, garantit donc une fiabilité
maximale.
1a MARCIA AVANTI / 1st FORWARD GEAR / 2a MARCIA AVANTI / 2nd FORWARD GEAR /
1. VORWÄRTSGANG / 1ère MARCHE AVANT 2. VORWÄRTSGANG / 2ème MARCHE AVANT
1a RETROMARCIA / 1st REVERSE GEAR / 2a RETROMARCIA / 2nd REVERSE GEAR /

1. RÜCKWÄRTSGANG / 1ère MARCHE ARRIERE 2. RÜCKWÄRTSGANG / 2ème MARCHE ARRIERE
7
PST2
I Funzionamento
1) Cambio di marcia: un selettore idraulico elettropilotato provvede a comandare l’inserimento
della frizione prescelta, mentre una valvola antishock e una valvola modulatrice regolano la
salita della pressione solo sulla frizione 1a Marcia Avanti e 1a Retromarcia in modo graduale,
permettendo cambi di direzione, di velocità e avviamenti graduali senza urti.
2) Inching control: la pressione di comando delle marce può essere regolata tra zero ed il valore
massimo permettendo così di modulare la coppia trasmessa dalla frizione con conseguente
perfetta regolazione dell’avviamento del carrello; l’Inching control agisce su tutte le marce.
3) Capacità: la coppia dinamica trasmissibile dalle frizioni risulta superiore a quella in ingresso al
cambio dopo il convertitore e questo garantisce la vita delle stesse.
GB Operation
1) Gear shifting: an electrically actuated solenoid controls the corresponding valve for releasing
oil pressure on the clutch piston, while an anti-shock valve and a modulating valve regulate the
pressure increase to the 1st Forward and Reverse Gear gradually, allowing direction changes
and soft gear shifts.
2) Inching control: the Inching valve, allows truck movement at a very low speed with constant
speed of the engine. Inching control works on all gears.
3) Capacity: the dynamic torque transmissible by the clutches is higher than the transmission
input torque after the converter. Thus a long service life of the clutches is guaranteed.
D Arbeitsweise
1) Gangwechsel: Ein elktrisch erregter Magnet steuert das entsprechende Ventil zur
Beaufschlagung der gewünschten Kupplung. Ein Anti-Stoß-und ein Modulationsventil
regeln den zur Kupplung des 1. Vorwärts und Rückwärtsgang und ermöglichen, daß der
Fahrtichtungswechsel und das Anfahren sanft erfolgen.
2) Inching: Das Inchventil, das für mechanische Betätigung ausgelegt ist, ermöglicht ein Fahren
mit geringster Geschwindigkeit bei konstanter Motordrehzahl. Ein Ventil für hydraulische
Betätigung kann angebaut werden. In jedem Gang ist Inching möglich.
3) Listungsfähigkeit: Das von den Kupplungen übertagbare dynamische Drehmoment ist höher
als das Getriebeeingangsmoment nach dem Wandler. Dadurch wird eine lange Lebensdauer
der Kupplungen sichergestellt.
F Fonctionnement
1) Changement de vitesses: un sélecteur hydraulique électro-piloté commande l’embrayge élu,
alors qu’ une vanne antichoc et une vanne régulatrice reglert l’augmentation de la pression sur
l’embrayage 1ère Marche Avant et 1ère Marche Arrière graduellement, en pemettant change-
ments de direction, de vitesse et démarrages graduels et sans coups.
2) Inching contrôle: la pression de commande des marches peut être reglée entre zéro et la
valeur maximum en permettant ainsi de moduler le couple transmis par l’embrayage avec con-
séquente régulation parfaite de l’avancement du chario; l’Inching contrôle agit sur toutes les
marches.
3) Capacité: le couple dynamique transmissible par les embrayages résulte supérieur à celui en
entrée à la boîte après le convertisseur en assurant ainsi la vie des mêmes.
8
PST2
1
I Frizioni
Sono ad azionamento idraulico. La trasmissione del moto avviene tramite 6 dischi (12 superfici
di attrito attive) a lubrificazione e raffreddamento forzati. Oltre ad una elevata capacità di coppia
trasmissibile statica e dinamica, dispongono di una elevata capacità di assorbimento di energia
cinetica durante i cambi di marce. L’impacchettamento delle frizioni viene effettuato dallo spo-
stamento assiale di un pistone sotto la spinta di olio in pressione, mentre il ritorno del pistone, e
quindi di distacco dei dischi, è assicurato da una molla.
GB Clutches
These are hydraulically operated. The drive is transmitted via force-lubricated, force-cooled
plates (12 active friction surfaces). In addition to high static and dynamic transmissible torque
capacity, they also have a high kinetic energy absorption capacity during gearchanges. Clutch
engagement is through piston displaced axially under fluid pressure. A spring pushes the piston
back and the plates are then released.
D Kupplungen
Sie werden hydraulisch beaufschlagt. Die zwangsgeschmierten und gekühlten 6 Lamellen (12
Reibflächen) sind für die Übertragung der holen statischen und dynamischen Drehmomente
ausgelegt.
Die Kupplungen werden durch Druckkolben mit Druckflüssigkeit geschlossen und durch Federkraft
wieder geöffnet.
F Embrayages
Seulement hydrauliques. La transmission du mouvement est assurée par 6 disques (12 surfa-
ces de friction actives), à graissage et refroidissement forcés. En plus d’une capacité élevée de
couple statique et dynamique transmissible, les embrayages possèdent une capacité également
élevée d’absorption d’énergie cinétique, pendant les changements de marche. L’empaquetage
des embrayages est réalisé par déplacement axial d’un piston sous la poussée de l’huile sous
pression, alors que le retour au repos du piston et des disques est assuré par un ressort.
I Presa di forza
È azionata direttamente dal motore termico e da una catena silenziosa. Alla presa di forza è flan-
giata la pompa idraulica per l’impianto idraulico di sollevamento e di sterzatura. La coppia mas-
sima trasmissibile è di 192 Nm.
GB Power take-off
It is driven by the thermic motor and by a silent chain. The rotating direction as well as the speed
corresponds to that of the engine. The hydraulic pump for the lifting and steering system is flang-
ed to the PTO. The P.T.O. can transmit an engine power of 192 Nm (transmission ratio 1:1).
D Nebenabtrieb (PTO)
Er wird über die Wärmerkraftmaschine und über eine geräuscharme Zahnkette angetrieben. Die
Drehzahl, sowie die Drehrichtung entsprechen denen des Motors. Die Hydraulikpumpe für das
Hub- und Lenksystem kann an den Nebenabtrieb angeflanscht werden. Der Nebenabtrieb kann
max. 192 (Nm) übertragen.
F Prise de force
Elle est actionnée directement par le moteur termique et par une chaîne silencieuse. A la prise de
force est bridée la pompe hydraulique pour l’installation hydraulique de soulèvement et de coup
de volant. La couple plus grande est du 192 Nm.
9
PST2
I Albero di uscita
L’accoppiamento tra ponte-differenziale e trasmissione è ottenuto tramite giunto cardanico o
albero scanalato. La libertà assiale del sistema è garantita dall’albero scorrevole sull’uscita dalla
trasmissione ±6 mm.
GB Output shaft
The coupling between transmission and axle is obtained throught a cardan shaft or splined shaft.
The sliding shaft on the transmission output allows a small axial movement of ±6 mm.
D Abtriebswelle
Es können verschiedene Abtriebflansche geliefert werden. Die Flansche sind axial um ±6 mm
verschiebbar.
F Arbre de sortie
L’accouplement entre le ponte différentiel et la boîte de vitesse est obtenu avec un arbre cardan.
Le jeu axial est obtenu par l’arbre coulant à la sortie de la boîte de vitesse ±6 mm.
I Pompa
Una pompa olio a ingranaggi con velocità di rotazione pari a quella del motore è montata
coassiale all’albero di ingresso all’esterno della trasmissione per facilitare la manutenzione.
L’aspirazione dell’olio dalla coppa avviene tramite condotto ricavato nel coperchio della trasmis-
sione con filtro a rete.
GB Pump
A gear oil pump that rotates at the same speed as the engine, is mounted coaxially with the
direct drive shaft outside the transmission so as to facilitate maintenance. Oil is sucked from the
sump via a gallery in the transmission case casting and passes through a mesh filter.
D Pumpe
Koaxial (hinter dem Nebenabtrieb) ist eine Zahnradpumpe angebracht, die über den Wandler und
einer Welle in Abhängigkeit der Motordrehzahl angetrieben wird. Die Ölansaugung vom Sumpf
erfolgt über einen Filter.
F Pompe
Une pompe à huile à engrenages à vitesse de rotation égale à celle du moteur est montée
coaxialement sur l’arbre d’entrée, estérieurment à la boîte de vitesse pour faciliter l’entretien.
L’aspiration de l’huile dans le carter est assurée par un conduit venu de fonderie du carter de
transmission, avec filtre à tamis.
10
PST2
1
I Distributore di comando e controllo
Il distributore è situato esternamente sul carter della trasmissione. Riceve la portata di olio dalla
pompa e incorpora dispositivi che controllano il flusso e la pressione della medesima per il cor-
retto funzionamento del convertitore, delle frizioni delle marce, dell’Inching control e della lubrifi-
cazione. È dotato di valvola modulatrice e valvola antishock che permettono cambi di direzione e
avviamenti graduali senza urti.
GB Control distributor
The distributor is situated on the outside of the transmission case. It receives the oil delivered by
the pump and incorporates devices that control the flow and pressure of the oil to ensure that
the converter, the clutches, the Inching control and the lubrication system all operate correctly. It
is provided with a modulator valve and anti-shock valve, which ensure gradual, shock-free gear
changes and start-ups.
D Getriebesteuerung
Das Steuerventil ist außen auf dem Getriebegehäuse angebracht. Es leitet den Ölstrom von der
Pumpe über einen Filter. Es hat Meßstellen für Ölfluß und Drücke, damit der korrekte Betrieb
des Wandlers, der Schaltkupplungen, der Inchsteuerung und des Schmiersystems kontrolliert
werden kann. Es ist mit einem Modulations- und einem Anti-Schock-Ventil ausgerüstet, welche
Fahrtrichtungswechsel und Anfahren ohne Stöße ermöglichen.
F Distributeur de commande et de contrôle
Le distributeur est placé extérieurement au carter de la trasmission. Il reçoit le débit d’huile de la
pompe par le filtre et incorpore des dispositifs qui contrôlent le flux et les pressions du fluide pour
assurer un correct fonctionnement du convertisseur, des embrayages, de l’Inching contrôle et
de la lubrification. Il est équipé d’une vanne modulatrice et d’une vanne anti-choc qui permettent des
changements de direction et démarrages graduels et sans coups.
11
PST2
Descrizioni Viste generali PST2 con P.d.F.

Generals views description PST2 with P.T.O.
Generelle Ansicht PST2 mit Nebenabtrieb
Description Vues générales PST2 avec Prise de Force
I A - Introduzione olio trasmissione D A - Getriebeöleinfüllstutzen

B - Elettrovalvola Marcia Avanti B - Elektromagnetventil Vorwärtsgang
C - Elettrovalvola Retromarcia C - Elektromagnetventil Rückwärtsgang
D - Elettrovalvola 1a - 2a marcia D - Elektromagnetventil erstev und zweitev Gang
E - Presa di Forza E - Nebenabtrieb
F - Comando Inching idraulico F - Hydraulische inchsteuerung
G - Comando Inching meccanico G - Mechanische Inchsteuerung
H - Convertitore H - Wandler
J - Tappo scarico olio trasmissione e J - Ölablaßschrauben für Getriebe und Saugfilter
filtro aspirazione K - Ölablaßschrauben für Nebenabtrieb
K - Tappo scarico olio P.d.F. L - Ölpeilstab - Entlüfter
L - Asta livello olio con sfiato M- Vom Kühler
M - Ritorno scambiatore N - Zum Kühler
N - Mandata scambiatore P - Ölfilter mit by-pass
P - Filtro olio con by-pass R - Anschluß für Zusatzölmeßstab
R - Attacco asta livello olio supplementare S - Modulationsventil
S - Valvola modulatrice T - Antischockventil
T - Valvola antishock U - Temperaturfühler 115° ± 3° C
U - Interruttore termometrico 115 ± 3 °C V - Druckfuehler (auf Wunsch)
V - Pressostato (Optional) W- Typenschild
W - Targhetta di identificazione Y - Zusatzbügel Ölstand (auf Wunsch)
Y - Asta livello olio supplementare (Optional) Z - Antischockventil zweitev Gang (auf Wunsch)
Z - Valvola antishock 2a marcia (Optional)
GB A - Transmission oil filler F A - Bouchon de remplissage d’huile boîte

B - Forward gear solenoid valve B - Electro-vanne Marche Avant
C - Reverse gear solenoid valve C - Electro-vanne Marche Arrière
D - 1st and 2nd speed selection solenoid valve D - Electro-vanne 1ère - 2ème marche
E - Power take-off E - Prise de force
F - Hydraulic Inching control F - Commande Inching hydraulique
G - Mechanical Inching control G - Commande Inching mecanique
H - Converter H - Convertisseur
J - Oil drain plug for transmission and J - Bouchon de vidange d’huile et
suction filter filtre d’aspiration
K - P.T.O. Oil drain plug K - Bouchon de vidange d’huile Prise de Force
L - Dipstick with breather L - Jauge d’huile avec reniflard
M - Exchanger return M- Retour échangeur
N - Exchanger delivery N - Alimentation échangeur
P - Filter with by-pass P - Filtre à huile avec dérivation
R - Connection additional oil level rod R - Raccordement jauge d’huile supplémentaire
S - Modulating valve S - Valve modulatrice
T - Anti-shock valve T - Vanne antichoc
U - Temp. switch 115 ± 3 °C U - Interrupteur thermométrique 115 ± 3 °C
V - Pressure switch (Optional) V - Pressostat (en option)
W - Identification plate W- Plaquette de plieuse
Y - Additional oil level rod (Optional) Y - Jauge niveau huile supplémentaire (en option)
Z - 2nd speed Antishock valve (Optional) Z - Vanne antichoc 2ème marche (en option)
12
PST2
1
Viste generali PST2 con P.d.F.
Generals views PST2 with P.T.O.
Vues générales PST2 avec Prise de Force
P T M L E H A V Z
R Y K U J
W
TIPO - TYPE
PST 2
DISEGNO - DRAWING
3.XXXXX.3
GRAZIANO MATRICOLA - SERIAL
Trasmissioni
XXX - XX - XX
S
E M A
E M A
N E M A
EM I EM I
G
E M I
B D T F
13
PST2
Descrizioni Sezione generale PST2 con P.d.F.

Generals Section description PST2 with P.T.O.
Description Section générales PST2 avec Prise de Force
I D
1 - Convertitore 1 - Wandler
2 - Albero turbina 2 - Turbinenwelle
3 - Ingranaggio conduttore Presa di Forza 3 - Nebenabtriebszahnrad treibend
4 - Ingranaggio condotto Presa di Forza 4 - Nebenabtriebszahnrad getrieben
5 - Presa di Forza 5 - Nebenabtriebswelle
6 - Pompa trasmissione 6 - Innenzahnradpumpe
7 - Ingranaggio conduttore 2a RM 7 - Treibende zähnrader 2. Rückwärtsgang
8 - Frizione 2a RM 8 - Lamellenkupplung für den 2. Rückwärtsgang
11 - Ingranaggio condotto 2a 11 - Getriebene zähnrader 2.
13 - Albero uscita 13 - Abtriebswelle
14 - Catena silenziosa 14 - Kette
15 - Sfiato 15 - Entlüfter
16 - Ingranaggio conduttore 1a MA 12 - Treibende zähnrader 1. Vorwärtsgang
17 - Frizione 1a MA 13 - Lamellenkupplung für den 1. Vorwärtsgang
18 - Frizione 2a MA 14- Lamellenkupplung für den 2. Vorwärtsgang
20 - Valvola di sicurezza lubrificazione 20 - Schmierdruckventil
GB 1 - Converter F 1 - Convertisseur
2 - Turbine shaft 2 - Arbre turbine
3 - Driving gear for Power take off 3 - Engrenage conducteur prise de force
4 - Driven gear for Power take off 4 - Engrenage conduit prise de force
5 - Power take off 5 - Prise de force
6 - Transmission pump 6 - Pompe transmission
7 - Driving gear 2nd Reverse Gear 7 - Engrenage conducteur 2ème Marche Arrière
8 - Clutch 2nd Reverse Gear 8 - Embrayage de 2ème Marche Arrière
9 - Driven gear 1st Reverse Gear 9 - Engrenage conducteur 1ère Marche Arrière
10 - Clutch 1st Reverse Gear 10 - Embrayage de 1ère Marche Arrière
11 - Driven gear 2nd 11 - Engrenage conduit 2ème
12 - Driven gear 1st 12 - Engrenage conduit 1ère
13 - Output shaft 13 - Arbre sortie
14 - Silent chain 14 - Chaîne silencieuse
15 - Breather 15 - Reniflard
16 - Driving gear 1st forward gear 16 - Engrenage conducteur 1ère
17 - Clutch 1st forward gear 17 - Embrayage de 1ère Marche Avant
18 - Clutch 2nd forward gear 18 - Embrayage de 2ème Marche Avant
19 - Driving gear 2nd forward gear 19 - Engrenage conducteur 2ème Marche Avant
20 - Lubrication safety valve 20 - Vanne de sûreté de graissage
14
PST2
1
Sezione generale PST2 con P.d.F.
General section PST2 with P.T.O.
Allgemeine Hinweise PST2 mit Nebenabtrieb
Section générales PST2 avec Prise de Force
4 14
15 6 7 8 10 20 9
13
2
12
1 3 11
Scatola P.d.F - versione "B" Scatola P.d.F - versione "A"

P.T.O. housing - version "B" P.T.O. housing - version "A"
Nebenabtriebgehäuse - Version "B" Nebenabtriebgehäuse - Version "A"
Boîte Prise de Force��- Version "B" Boîte Prise de Force��- Version "A"
19 18 17 16
15
PST2
Descrizioni viste generali PST2 Axle Mount senza P.d.F.

General views description PST2 Axle Mount without P.T.O.
Generelle Ansicht PST2 Axle Mount ohne Nebenabtrieb
Description vues générales PST2 sans Prise de Force
I A - Elettrovalvola marcia avanti D A - Elektromagnetventil Vorwärtsgang

B - Elettrovalvola retromarcia B - Elektromagnetventil Rückwärtsgang
C - Elettrovalvola 1a - 2a marcia C - Elektromagnetventil erstev und zweitev Gang
D - Convertitore di coppia D - Wandler
E - Tappo scarico olio trasmissione e E - Ölablaßschrauben für Getriebe und Saugfilter
filtro aspirazione
F - Ölpeilstab - Entlüfter - Getriebeöleinfüllstutzen
F - Asta livello olio con sfiato e introduzione
olio cambio G - Vom Kühler
G - Ritorno scambiatore H - Zum Kühler
H - Mandata scambiatore J - Ölfilter mit by-pass
J - Filtro olio con by-pass K - Inchsteuerung
K - Asse Inching L - Anschluß für Zusatzölmeßstab
L - Attacco asta livello olio supplementare M - Modulationsventil
M - Valvola modulatrice N - Antischockventil
N - Valvola antishock P - Temperaturfühler 115 ± 3 °C
P - Interruttore termometrico 115 ± 3 °C Q - Getriebesteuerung
Q - Distributore di comando e controllo R - Typenschild
R - Targhetta di identificazione
GB A - Forward gear solenoid valve F A - Electro-vanne Marche Avant

B - Reverse gear solenoid valve B - Electro-vanne Marche Arrière
C - 1st and 2nd speed selection solenoid valve C - Electro-vanne 1ère - 2ème marche
D - Torque Converter D - Convertisseur
E - Oil drain plug for transmission and E - Bouchon de vidange d’huile et
suction filter filtre d’aspiration
F - Dipstick with breather and gear box oil inlet F - Jauge d’huile avec reniflard et remplissage
d’huile boîte
G - Exchanger oil inlet
G - Retour échangeur
H - Exchanger oil outlet (cooler)
H - Alimentation échangeur
J - Oil filter with by-pass
J - Filtre à huile avec dérivation
K - Inching control
K - Axe contrôle Inching
L - Connection additional oil dipstick
L - Raccordement jauge d’huile supplémentaire
M - Modulating valve
M - Valve modulatrice
N - Anti-shock valve
N - Vanne antichoc
P - Temp. switch 115 ± 3 °C
P - Interrupteur thermométrique 115 ± 3 °C
Q - Control distributor
Q - Distributeur de commande et de contrôle
R - Identification plate
R - Plaquette de plieuse
16
PST2
1
Viste generali PST2 Axle Mount senza P.d.F.
General views PST2 Axle Mount without P.T.O.
Generelle Ansicht PST2 Axle Mount ohne Nebenabtrieb
Vues générales PST2 sans Prise de Force
J N K G F D Q
L P E
R
B TIPO - TYPE
PST 2
DISEGNO - DRAWING
M GRAZIANO
3.XXXXX.3
MATRICOLA - SERIAL
Trasmissioni
XXX - XX - XX
A C N
17
PST2
Descrizioni sezione generale PST2 Axle Mount senza P.d.F.

General section description PST2 Axle Mount without P.T.O.
Allgemeine Hinweise PST2 Axle Mount ohne Nebenabtrieb
Description section générales PST2 sans Prise de Force
I D
1 - Convertitore 1 - Wandler
2 - Albero turbina 2 - Turbinenwelle
3 - Pompa trasmissione 3 - Innenzahnradpumpe
4 - Sfiato 4 - Entlüfter
9 - Valvola di sicurezza lubrificazione 9 - Schmierdruckventil
11 - Albero uscita 11 - Abtriebswelle
GB 1 - Converter F 1 - Convertisseur
2 - Turbine shaft 2 - Arbre turbine
3 - Transmission pump 3 - Pompe transmission
4 - Breather 4 - Reniflard
5 - Driving gear 2nd reverse gear 5 - Engrenage conducteur 2ème Marche Arrière
6 - Clutch 2nd reverse gear 6 - Embrayage de 2ème Marche Arrière
7 - Clutch 1st reverse gear 7 - Embrayage de 1ère Marche Arrière
8 - Driven gear 1st reverse gear 8 - Engrenage conducteur 1ère Marche Arrière
9 - Lubrication safety valve 9 - Vanne de sûreté de graissage
10 - Driven gear 1st 10 - Engrenage conduit 1ère
11 - Output shaft 11 - Arbre sortie
12 - Driving gear 1st forward gear 12 - Engrenage conducteur 1ère
13 - Clutch 1st forward gear 13 - Embrayage de 1ère Marche Avant
14 - Clutch 2nd forward gear 14 - Embrayage de 2ème Marche Avant
15 - Driving gear 2nd forward gear 15 - Engrenage conducteur 2ème Marche Avant
16 - Driven gear 2nd 16 - Engrenage conduit 2ème
18
PST2
1
Sezione generale PST2 Axle Mount senza P.d.F.
General section PST2 Axle Mount without P.T.O.
Allgemeine Hinweise PST2 Axle Mount ohne Nebenabtrieb
Section générales PST2 sans Prise de Force
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
11
16
15 14 13 12
19
PST2
2 CIRCUITO IDRAULICO DELLA TRASMISSIONE
I Il corretto funzionamento di tutta la trasmissione è essenzialmente affidato ai vari organi costituenti il

circuito idraulico che provvedono a:
- Garantire una determinata pressione all’interno del convertitore.
- Garantire un continuo ricambio dell’olio nel convertitore ed al suo raffreddamento mediante lo
scambiatore di calore.
- Fornire olio in pressione al pacco frizione di trasmissioni 1a / 2a MA e 1a / 2a RM.
- Lubrificare i dischi della frizione di trasmissione 1a / 2a MA e 1a / 2a RM.
Le principali parti costituenti l’impianto idraulico sono:
a. POMPA OLIO DELLA TRASMISSIONE
Una pompa olio del tipo a dentatura interna è montata internamente alla trasmissione ed ha una
velocità di rotazione pari a quella del motore. L’aspirazione dell’olio dalla coppa avviene tramite un
condotto con filtro a rete.
b. FILTRO OLIO
Montato sul condotto tra pompa e distributore assicura il filtraggio dell’olio destinato ai vari organi,
con una capacità di 25 micron.
c. CONVERTITORE IDRODINAMICO DI COPPIA
Montato fra il motore e l’inversore, permette mediante l’azione dinamica di un fluido (olio) di molti-
plicare la coppia in uscita dal motore, adeguandola alle richieste di lavoro del carrello.
d. SCAMBIATORE DI CALORE
Situato sul condotto in uscita al convertitore provvede ad asportare il calore sviluppatosi durante il
funzionamento del cambio.
e. INVERSORE
Il gruppo di inversione è costituito da quattro pacchi di frizioni a dischi multipli in bagno di olio
comandate idraulicamente mediante l’azionamento dell’elettrovalvole.
f. GRUPPO DISTRIBUTORE
È montato all’esterno della scatola cambio, ed in esso sono incorporati:
Valvola massima pressione
Tale valvola ha il compito di controllare il valore della pressione di impacco delle frizioni di tra-
smissione.
Valvola modulatrice
Posta sul circuito d’alimentazione delle frizioni ha il compito di controllare l’incremento del valo-
re della pressione di impacco, allo scopo di ottenere un graduale impaccamento della frizione
interessata all’atto del comando indipendentemente dalla rapidità della manovra.
Valvola Inching
Ha il compito di intercettare la pressione di impacco frizioni e di disimpegnare gradualmente la
frizione innestata. Viene quindi ridotta, in modo continuo e senza cambiare il regime del motore,
la velocità di marcia fino al punto da poter avanzare con il veicolo in modo lentissimo.
Elettrovalvole selettrici
Situate sui condotti di alimentazione dei pacchi frizione permettono di inviare o intercettare l’olio
in pressione per il posizionamento dei cassetti di distribuzione.
Cassetti di distribuzione
Le diverse posizioni che i cassetti possono assumere in seguito alla spinta dell’olio proveniente
dalle elettrovalvole determinano le condizioni di 1a / 2a marcia avanti - folle - 1a / 2a retromarcia.
Valvola sicurezza convertitore
Posta sul condotto in entrata al convertitore provvede a regolare la pressione in ingresso e a
salvaguardare da accidentali aumenti di pressione.
Valvola antishock
Abbinata alla valvola modulatrice ha lo scopo di annullare l’urto che si viene a creare sugli orga-
ni della trasmissione all’inserzione delle marce.
Valvola antishock 2a Marcia (a secondo della versione)
Abbinata alla valvola modulatrice ha lo scopo di annullare l’urto che si viene a creare sugli orga-
ni della trasmissione all’inserzione delle marce.
Valvola sicurezza lubrificazione
Situata sul circuito di lubrificazione provvede ad eliminare in tale circuito eventuali aumenti di
pressione.
20
PST2
TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

2
GB The whole transmission system relies for its trouble-free operation on the various components of the
hydraulic system which perform the following functions:
- Ensure specific pressure inside the converter.
- Ensure continuous exchange of converter oil and cooling through heat exchanger.
- Provide oil pressure to 1st / 2nd forward and reverse clutch pack.
- Lubricate 1st / 2nd forward and reverse clutch plates.
The main components of the hydraulic system are:
a. TRANSMISSION OIL PUMP
An internal-tooth oil pump is fitted inside the transmission and has the same speed as the
engine. Oil suction from the sump is through a line incorporating a mesh filter.
b. OIL FILTER
One 25-micron filter, fitted between pump and control valve, filters the oil for the various compo-
nents.
c. HYDRAULIC TORQUE CONVERTER
Fitted between engine and clutch the converter uses the dynamic action of the oil to multiply
engine output torque in line with truck requirements.
d. HEAT EXCHANGER
Fluid from the converter charges the exchanger and dissipates the heat produced during gearbox
operation.
e. CLUTCHES
The clutch units consist of four oil bath, multiplate clutch packs controlled hydraulically through
the electrovalves.
f. CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY
This unit is fitted on the main case and incorporates:
Max pressure valve (regulator)
This valve regulates clutch pressure.
Modulating valve
Located on the clutch supply circuit, this valve controls the increase in clutch pressure so that
the clutch in question is fed gradually regardless of speed of manoeuvre.
Inching valve
It cuts off clutch pack pressure and gradually disengages the engaged clutch. Running speed
is constantly reduced without changing engine speed so that the vehicle can be moved forward
very slowly.
Selector solenoid valves
Located on the clutch pack supply lines, these valves control the oil pressure to be supplied or
cut off for valve spool position.
Selector spools
The valve spools can be in one of three positions, as result of the oil pressure coming from the
solenoid valve. They represent 1st / 2nd forward - neutral - 1st / 2nd reverse.
Converter safety valve
Located on converter inlet line, this valve controls the input pressure and protects the converter
from accidental over pressure.
Anti-shock valve
Linked to the pressure modulating valve, this valve is designed to eliminate the impact created on
the transmission components when the gears are engaged.
2nd speed Antishock valve (according to various configuration)
Linked to the pressure modulating valve, this valve is designed to eliminate the impact created on
the transmission components when the gears are engaged.
Lubrication safety valve
Located on the lubrication circuit this valve eliminates increases in pressure in this circuit.
21
PST2
GETRIEBE HYDRAULIKSYSTEM
D Die einwandreie Funktion des Getriebes ist von dem Hydraulik-Kreislauf abhängig, der folgendes
gewährleistet:
- Wandlerdruck.
- Ständiger Ölkühlkreislauf.
- Druckölbereitstellung und Schmierung für die 1./2. Vorwärtsgang-und 1./2. Rückwärtsgangkupplung.
Folgend die für das Hydrauliksystem erforderlichen Bauelemente:
a. ZAHNRADPUMPE
Die Pumpe ist als Innenzahnradpumpe ausgeführt und ist Motordrehzahl abhängig. Die
Ölansaugung vom Sumpf erfolgt durch einer Filter.
b. ÖLFILTER
Der Ölkreislauf ist mit 2 Filtern gegen Schmutz abgesichert. 1 Filter mit einer Filterfeinheit von 50
my ist im Ölsumpf für die Ansaugung der Zahnradpumpe der zweite Filter mit 30 my Filterfeinheit
ist zwischen Pumpe und Wandler eingebaut (dieser Filter muß nach einer Getriebe Einlaufzeit
von 60-80 Bh wieder entfernt werden).
c. HYDRODYNAMISCHER DREHMOMENTWANDLER
Ist zwischen Motor und Wenedegetriebe eingebaut, vervielfacht über die mit der Wandlerpumpe
und der Betriebsflüssigkeit (Öl) erzeugten Flüssigkeitsstrom angetriebene Turbine und dem
Reaktionsglied das Motordrehmoment. Der Drehmomentwandler gewährleistet eine stoßfreies
beschleunigen und selbsttätige Anpassung an die Belastung.
d. KÜHLER
Der Anschluss für den Kühler ist in der Zuleitung des Wandlers installiert.
e. WENDEGETRIEBE
Der Fahrtrichtungswechsel wird durch 4 im Ölbad laufende Lamellenpakete, die über ein
Elektromagnetventil hydraulisch beaufschlagt werden und dessen verbundenen Zahnräder b.z.w.
Wendezahnrad durchgeführt.
f. GETRIEBESTEUERUNG
Die Steuerung ist oben auf dem Getriebegehäuse montiert mit folgenden Funktionen:
Hauptdruckbegrenzungsventil
Dieses Ventil regelt den Druck in den Lamellenkupplungen mit Überdruckabsicherung.
Modulationsventil
Dieses Ventil reguliert drehzahlabhängige Druckschwankungen im Druckaufbau für die
Kupplungen.
Inchventil
Über ein Pedal oder Bremsylinder (bei hydraulischer Ausführung) steuert dieses Ventil stu-
fenlos den Anpressdruck im Kupplungslamellenpaket, damit das Fahrzeug unabhängig von der
Motordrehzahl mit geringer Geschwindigkeit (kriechen) gefahren werden kann.
Elektromagnetventile
Über ein Fußwahlpedal-oder Handwahlschalter wird das für die jeweilige Fahrtrichtung bestim-
mte Magnetventil angesteuert, damit der Druckaufbau zum Beaufschlagen der Lamellenkupplung
erfolgen kann.
Steuerskolben
Regelt in Abhängigkeit von den Elektromagnetventile den Fahrzustand 1./2. Vorwärts - Neutral
- 1./2. Rückwärts.
Wandlerdruckbegrenzungsventil
Absicherung vom Wandler gegen Überdruck.
Antischockventil
Steuert stoßfreies Fahren beim Anfahren und beim Schalten.
Antischockventil 2. Gang (je nach Version)
Steuert stoßfreies Fahren beim Anfahren und beim Schalten.
Schmierdruckventil
Überdruck- und Druckhalteventil für das Ölschmiersystem.
22
PST2
CIRCUIT HYDRAULIQUE DE LA TRANSMISSION

2
F Le bon fonctionnement de toute la transmission est dû aux organes constituant le circuit hydraulique
qui doivent:
- Garantir une pression déterminée à l’intérieur du convertisseur.
- Garantir le renouvellement de l’huile du convertisseur de façon continue et son refroidissement par
l’échangeur de température.
- Fournir de l’huile sous pression au piston de l’embrayage 1ère/2ème marche avant ou 1ère/2ème
marche arrière.
- Lubrifier les disques de l’embrayage 1ère/2ème marche avant ou 1ère/2ème marche arrière.
Les parties principales de l’equipement hydraulique sont:
a. LA POMPE A HUILE DE LA TRANSMISSION
Une pompe à huile, du type à denture intérieure, est montée dans la transmission. Sa vitesse de
rotation est égale à celle du moteur. L’aspiration de l’huile se vérifie par un conduit avec filtre.
b. FILTRE A HUILE
Il est monté sur le conduit entre la pompe et le distributeur et assure le filtrage de l’huile destinée
aux différents organes avec une capacité de 25 microns.
c. CONVERTISSEUR DE COUPLE HYDRAULIQUE
Monté entre le moteur et l’inverseur, il permet par l’action dynamique d’un fluide (I’huile) de multi-
plier le couple à la sortie du moteur en l’adaptant aux demandes de travail du chariot.
d. ECHANGEUR DE TEMPERATURE
Situé sur le conduit de sortie du convertisseur, il pourvoit à retirer la chaleur qui se crée lors du fonc-
tionnement de la boîte de vitesses.
e. INVERSEUR
Le groupe d’inversion est constitué de quatre paquets d’embrayages à disques multiples, à bains
d’huile, commandés hydrauliquement par des électrovannes.
f. LE GROUPE DISTRIBUTEUR STANDARD
Monté à l’extérieur de la boîte, il comprend:
Vanne de pression maxi
Elle doit contrôler la valeur de la pression de blocage des embrayages de la transmission.
Vanne modulatrice
Placée sur le circuit d’alimentation des embrayages, elle doit contrôler l’augmentation de la pres-
sion dans le but d’obtenir une application progressive de l’embrayage intéressé indépendamment
de la rapidité de la manoeuvre.
Vanne d’Inching
Elle a la charge de diminuer la pression de blocage des embrayages et de dégager ainsi les dis-
ques graduellement et donc de réduire de façon continue, sans changer le régime moteur, la
vitesse de marche jusqu’au point de pouvoir avancer très lentement.
Electrovannes sélectrices
Elles sont placées sur les conduits d’alimentation des embrayages et permettent d’envoyer ou
d’intercepter l’huile sous pression pour le positionnement du tiroir distributeur.
Tiroir de distribution
La 1ère/2ème marche avant, le point mort et la 1ère/2ème marche arrière sont déterminés par les
différents positions du tiroir conséquent à la poussée de l’huile provenant des électrovannes.
Vanne de sûreté du convertisseur
Elle est placée sur le conduit à l’entrée du convertisseur et règle la pression d’entrée et le protège
contre les variations excessives de pression.
Vanne antichock
Jumelèe à la vanne modulatrice, cette vanne amortit le choc qui est provoqué sur les organes de
la transmission au moment du changement de vitesse.
Vanne antichock 2ème marche (selon la version)
Jumelèe à la vanne modulatrice, cette vanne amortit le choc qui est provoqué sur les organes de
la transmission au moment du changement de vitesse.
Vanne de sûreté de graissage
Située sur le circuit de graissage, elle amortit la pression excessive dans ce circuit.
23
PST2
Descrizione circuito idraulico

Hydraulic diagram description
Beschreibung Hydraulikschema
Description du circuit hydraulique
I 1 FILTRO DI ASPIRAZIONE D 1 FILTER

2 POMPA 2 PUMPE
3 FILTRO OLIO CON BY-PASS 3 ÖLFILTER MIT BY-PASS
4 VALVOLA MAX. PRESSIONE 4 SCHALTDRUCKVENTIL
5 VALVOLA MODULATRICE 5 MODULATIONSVENTIL
6 STROZZATURA 6 DROSSELVENTIL
7 CONVERTITORE DI COPPIA 7 DREHMOMENTWANDLER
8 SCAMBIATORE DI CALORE 8 KÜHLER
9 VALVOLA DI SICUREZZA CONVERTITORE 9 WANDLERDRUCKVENTIL
10 VALVOLA INCHING MECCANICA 10 INCHVENTIL
11 VALVOLA MARCIA AVANTI E RETROMARCIA 11 VORWÄRTS-UND RÜCKWÄRTSGANGVENTIL
12 VALVOLA SELETTRICE 1a-2a MARCIA 12 STEUERVENTIL 1.-2. GANG
13 VALVOLA ANTISHOCK 13 ANTISCHOCKVENTIL
14 VALVOLA SICUREZZA LUBRIFICAZIONE 14 SCHMIERDRUCKVENTIL
15 VALVOLA PILOTAGGIO ANTI-SHOCK 15 VORSTEUERVENTIL DER ANTISCHOCK
16 VALVOLA ANTISHOCK 2a MARCIA (Optional) 16 ANTISCHOCKVENTIL 2. GANG (auf Wunsch)
GB 1 SUCTION FILTER F 1 FILTRE D’ASPIRATION

2 PUMP 2 POMPE
3 OIL FILTER WITH BY-PASS 3 FILTRE A HUILE AVEC DERIVATION
4 SHIFT PRESSURE VALVE 4 VANNE DE PRESSION MAXIMALE
5 PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE 5 VANNE MODULATRICE
6 THROTTLE VALVE 6 ETRANGLEMENT
7 TORQUE CONVERTER 7 CONVERTISSEUR DE COUPLE
8 HEAT EXCHANGER (COOLER) 8 ECHANGEUR DE CHALEUR
9 CONVERTER SAFETY VALVE 9 VANNE DE SURETE DE CONVERTISSEUR
10 MECHANICAL INCHING VALVE 10 VANNE DE COMMANDE D’APPROCHE LENTE
11 FORWARD AND REVERSE SPEED VALVE 11 VANNE DE MARCHE AVANT ET MARCHE
ARRIERE
12 1st-2nd SPEED SELECTION VALVE
12 VANNE SELECTRICE 1ère-2ème MARCHE
13 ANTISHOCK VALVE
13 VANNE ANTICHOC
14 LUBRICATION SAFETY VALVE
14 VANNE DE SURETE DE LUBRIFICATION
15 ANTISHOCK PILOT VALVE
15 VANNE PILOTAGE ANTICHOC
16 2nd SPEED ANTISHOCK VALVE (Optional)
16 VANNE ANTICHOC 2ème MARCHE (en option)
24
PST2
2
Schema circuito idraulico
Hydraulic diagram
Hydraulikdiagramm
Schéma du circuit hydraulique
LUBRIFICAZIONE
LUBRICATION
SCHMIERUNG
2.5 bar LUBRIFICATION��
14
1ª MA 1. VORWÄRTS
1st F.S. 1ère��MARCHE AVANT��
CADUTA DI PRESSIONE 1,5 bar max.
CHUTE DE PRESSION 1,5 bar max.��

PRESSURE DROP 1.5 bar max.
1ª RM 1. RÜCKWÄRTS
DRUCKABFALL 1.5 bar max.
1st R.S. 1ère��MARCHE ARRIERE
��
2ª MA 2. VORWÄRTS
2nd F.S. 2ème��MARCHE AVANT
2nd R.S. 2ème��MARCHE ARRIERE
4,5 bar
13
12
9
7
16
10
15
11
3
6 4
4-9 bar
1 CORPO DISTRIBUTORE
CONTROL VALVE BLOCK
STEUERBLOCK
CORPS DISTRIBUTEUR��
25
PST2
Cambio in folle / SCHEMA A

Gear in neutral position / SCHEME A
Getriebe in Neutralstellung / SCHEMA A
BoÎte de vitesses au point mort / SCHEMA A
I Condizione di folle
L’olio aspirato dalla pompa viene inviato, dopo essere stato filtrato, alla valvola di massima
pressione e, tramite la strozzatura (6), al convertitore. Da quest’ultimo dopo aver attraversato lo
scambiatore, tramite il circuito di lubrificazione, raggiunge i pacchi frizione marcia avanti e retro-
marcia e dopo averli attraversati cade liberamente nella coppa.
GB Neutral positio
The oil sucked by the pump, is delivered, after having been filtered, to the main pressure control
valve and to the control valve. The oil is also delivered, through a calibrated orifice, to the torque
converter and then to the oil cooler, from there the oil reaches the lubrication system to lubricate
and cool the clutches and bearing.
D Neutralstellung
Das von der Pumpe angesaugte Öl wird durch den Filter zum Hauptdruckventil und zum
Vorwärtsgang- und Rückwärtsgangventil geleitet. Gleichzeitig wird das Öl von der Pumpe
über eine Drossel (6) zum Wandler durch den Kühler zur Schmierung der Kupplungen für den
Vorwärtsgang und den Rückwärtsgang und zurück in den Ölsumpf geleitet.
F Au Point Mort
L’huile aspirée par la pompe est envoyée, après avoir été filtrée, à la vanne de pression maximum
et par l’étranglement (6), au convertisseur, après avoir passé l’échangeur, par le circuit de lubrifi-
cation elle arrive aux packs d’embrayages Marche Avant et Marche Arrière et, une fois les pas-
sés, elle tombe librement dans le carter.
26
PST2
2
SCHEMA A circuito / Cambio in folle
SCHEME A / Gear in neutral position
SCHEMA A / Getriebe in Neutralstellung
SCHEMA A / BoÎte de vitesses au point mort
LUBRIFICAZIONE
LUBRICATION
SCHMIERUNG
2.5 bar
14 LUBRIFICATION��
1ª MA 1. VORWÄRTS

��
2ª MA 2. VORWÄRTS
4,5 bar
13
12
9
7
16
10
15
11
3 Scarico
6 4 Intake pressure
4-9 bar Entlastung
Echappement
Principale impacco frizioni

5 Clutch pressure
Kupplungsdruck
2 Principal groupe embrayage
Entrata convertitore
Converter inlet
Wandlereingang
Entrée convertisseur
CONTROL VALVE BLOCK
STEUERBLOCK
CORPS DISTRIBUTEUR�� Entrata scambiatore
Exchanger inlet
Eingang Austausches
Entrée échangeur
Lubrificazione
Lubrication
Schmierung
Graissage
27
PST2
Marcia 1a avanti - Fase di avvio / SCHEMA B

1st forward gear - Start phase / SCHEME B
1. Vorwärts - Startphase / SCHEMA B
Marche 1ère avant - Démarrage / SCHEMA B
I Condizioni di avviamento
Con l’eccitazione delle relative elettrovalvole vengono posizionati i cassetti di selezione della 1a
Marcia Avanti della velocità restando identiche le condizioni di funzionamento della parte riguar-
dante il circuito convertitore e lubrificazione frizioni. Intervengono durante questa fase la valvola
antishock e la valvola modulatrice. Ambedue con il preciso compito di permettere un graduale
avvio dal carrello. La prima interviene sull’alimentazione frizione quando il valore della pressione
è da 0 a 2,5 bar, la seconda interviene caricando gradatamente la molla della valvola di massima
pressione ed innalzando così gradualmente la pressione di innesto frizioni da 2,5 bar al valore
massimo.
GB Start conditions
The Forward Gear and the 1st Forward Speed are activated by energizing the respective solenoid
spool valves. The torque converter and oil cooler hydraulic circuit remains unchanged. During
this phase the anti-shock valve and the modulation valve control the pressure rise to enhance a
smooth start up.
The antishock valve control the first ramp of the pressure rise from 0 to 2.5 bar, while the modula-
tion valve controls the second ramp of the pressure rise through an accumulator valve.
D Startbedingungen
Durch des Aktivieren des Vorwärtsgangmagnetventiles wird über das vorher anstehende Öl die
1. Vorwärtsgangkupplung mit Druck beaufschlagt. Der Ölkreislauf Pumpe - Wandler - Kühler -
Schmierung bleibt unverändert. Um ein stoßfreies Anfahren zu erreichen, wird der Druckaufbau
der Kupplung erstens von dem Antischockventil und zweitens von dem Modulationsvetil
gesteuert. Das Antischockventil steuert den Druckaufbau von 0 auf 2,5 bar. Das Modulationsventil
steuert über eine Drossel und Feder des Hauptdruckventils ein verzögertes Ansteigen des
Kupplungsdruckes bis zum maximalen Kupplungsdruck.
F Mise en route
Le tiroir de sélection de la Marche Avant est positionné par l’électrisation de l’électrovanne corré-
spondante; en restant inchangées les conditions de fonctionnement du circuit convertisseur et de
lubrification des embrayages. Pendant cette opération la soupape antichoc et la soupape modu-
latrice entrent en fonctionnement, avec la stricte tâche de permettre un graduel départ du chariot.
La soupape antichoc intervient sur l’alimentation des embrayages quand la valeur de la pression
est de 0 à 2,5 bar, la soupape modulatrice charge graduellement le ressort de la soupape de pres-
sion maximum et en élevant ainsi graduellement la pression des embrayages de 2,5 bar à la valeur
maximum.
28
PST2
2
SCHEMA B / Marcia 1a avanti - Fase di avvio
SCHEME B / 1st forward gear - Start phase
SCHEMA B / 1. Vorwärts - Startphase
SCHEMA B / Marche 1ère avant - Démarrage
LUBRIFICAZIONE
LUBRICATION
SCHMIERUNG
2.5 bar
1ª MA 1. VORWÄRTS

��
2ª MA 2. VORWÄRTS
4,5 bar
13
12
9
7
16
10
15
11
Scarico
3 Intake pressure
6 4 Entlastung
4-9 bar Echappement

5 Clutch pressure
Kupplungsdruck
Principal groupe embrayage
2
Converter inlet
Wandlereingang
1 CORPO DISTRIBUTORE Entrée convertisseur
CONTROL VALVE BLOCK
STEUERBLOCK Entrata scambiatore
CORPS DISTRIBUTEUR�� Exchanger inlet
Eingang Austausches
Entrée échangeur
Lubrificazione
Lubrication
Schmierung
Graissage
29
PST2
Marcia 1a avanti - Carrello avviato / SCHEMA C

1st forward gear - Started lift truck / DIAGRAM C
1. Vorwärtsgang - Fahrzustand / SCHEMA C
1ère Marche Avant - Chariot en marche / SCHEMA C
I Marcia
Si ha durante questa fase lʼalimentazione delle frizioni alla massima pressione. Tale valore viene
regolato dalla valvola 4.
GB Running
During this stage the clutches are supplied at maximum pressure. This value is regulated by valve 4.
D Gang
Während dieser Phase hat man im Ölzufuhrkreis für die Kupplungen den höchsten Druck. Dieser
Wert wird vom Ventil 4 geregelt.
F Marche
Pendant cette opération on a l’alimentation des embrayages à la pression maximum. Cette valeur
est reglée par la vanne 4.
30
PST2
2
SCHEMA C / 1a marcia avanti - Carrello avviato
DIAGRAM C / 1st forward gear - Started lift truck
SCHEMA C / 1. Vorwärtsgang - Fahrzustand
SCHEMA C / 1ère Marche Avant - Chariot en marche
LUBRIFICAZIONE
LUBRICATION
SCHMIERUNG
2.5 bar
1ª MA 1. VORWÄRTS

��
2ª MA 2. VORWÄRTS
4,5 bar

13
12
9
7
16
10
15
11
3 Scarico
6 4 Intake pressure
4-9 bar Entlastung
Echappement

5 Clutch pressure
Kupplungsdruck
Converter inlet
Wandlereingang
CONTROL VALVE BLOCK
Exchanger inlet
Eingang Austausches
Entrée échangeur
Lubrificazione
Lubrication
Schmierung
Graissage
31
PST2
Marcia 2a avanti - Fase di avvio / SCHEMA D

2nd forward gear - Start phase / SCHEME D
2. Vorwärts - Startphase / SCHEMA D
Marche 2ème avant - Démarrage / SCHEMA D
I Condizioni di avviamento
Con l’eccitazione della relativa elettrovalvola vengono posizionati i cassetti di selezione della 2a
Marcia Avanti della velocità restando identiche le condizioni di funzionamento della parte riguar-
dante il circuito convertitore e lubrificazione frizioni. Intervengono durante questa fase la valvola
antishock e la valvola modulatrice. Ambedue con il preciso compito di permettere un graduale
avvio dal carrello. La prima interviene sull’alimentazione frizione quando il valore della pressione
è da 0 a 2,5 bar, la seconda interviene caricando gradatamente la molla della valvola di massima
pressione ed innalzando così gradualmente la pressione di innesto frizioni da 2,5 bar al valore
massimo.
GB Start conditions
The 2nd Forward Speed is activated by energizing the respective solenoid spool valves. The
torque converter and oil cooler hydraulic circuit remains unchanged. During this phase the anti-
shock valve and the modulation valve control the pressure rise to enhance a smooth start up.
The antishock valve control the first ramp of the pressure rise from 0 to 2.5 bar, while the modula-
tion valve controls the second ramp of the pressure rise through an accumulator valve
D Startbedingungen
Durch des Aktivieren des Vorwärtsgangmagnetventiles wird über das vorher anstehende Öl die
2. Vorwärtsgangkupplung mit Druck beaufschlagt. Der Ölkreislauf Pumpe - Wandler - Kühler -
Schmierung bleibt unverändert. Um ein stoßfreies Anfahren zu erreichen, wird der Druckaufbau
der Kupplung erstens von dem Antischockventil und zweitens von dem Modulationsvetil gesteu-
ert. Das Antischockventil steuert den Druckaufbau von 0 auf 2,5 bar. Das Modulationsventil
steuert über eine Drossel und Feder des Hauptdruckventils ein verzögertes Ansteigen des
Kupplungsdruckes bis zum maximalen Kupplungsdruck.
F Mise en route
Le tiroir de sélection de la 2ème Marche Avant est positionné par l’électrisation de l’électrovanne
corréspondante; en restant inchangées les conditions de fonctionnement du circuit convertisseur
et de lubrification des embrayages. Pendant cette opération la soupape antichoc et la soupape
modulatrice entrent en fonctionnement, avec la stricte tâche de permettre un graduel départ du
chariot. La soupape antichoc intervient sur l’alimentation des embrayages quand la valeur de la
pression est de 0 à 2,5 bar, la soupape modulatrice charge graduellement le ressort de la soupape
de pression maximum et en élevant ainsi graduellement la pression des embrayages de 2,5 bar à
la valeur maximum.
32
PST2
2
SCHEMA D / Marcia 2a avanti - Fase di avvio
SCHEME D / 2nd forward gear - Start phase
SCHEMA D / 2. Vorwärts - Startphase
SCHEMA D / Marche 2ème avant - Démarrage
LUBRIFICAZIONE
LUBRICATION
SCHMIERUNG
2.5 bar
1ª MA 1. VORWÄRTS

��
2ª MA 2. VORWÄRTS
4,5 bar

13
12
9
7
16
10
15
11
3 Scarico
6 4 Intake pressure
4-9 bar Entlastung
Echappement

5 Clutch pressure
Kupplungsdruck
Converter inlet
Wandlereingang
CONTROL VALVE BLOCK
Exchanger inlet
Eingang Austausches
Entrée échangeur
Lubrificazione
Lubrication
Schmierung
Graissage
33
PST2
Marcia 2a avanti - Carrello avviato / SCHEMA E

2nd forward gear - Started lift truck / DIAGRAM E
2. Vorwärtsgang - Fahrzustand / SCHEMA E
2ème Marche Avant - Chariot en marche / SCHEMA E
I Marcia
Anche in questa fase come nello schema D, si ha la massima pressione sulla frizione interessata.
Da notare che quando viene selezionata la frizione di 2a velocità, la valvola antishock non viene
interessata.
GB Running
As in diagram D, also in this phase the clutch is engaged at maximum pressure. Please note that
the anti-shock valve is not actuated when selecting the clutch of the second speed.
D Gang
Wie in Schema D, wird auch in dieser Phase die Kupplung bis zum maximalen Durck beaufschla-
gt. Bitte beachten, daß beim Ansteuern der Kupplung der zweiten Gänge das Antistoßventil nicht
aktiviert wird.
F Marche
Aussi dans cette phase, comme dans le schème D, l y a la plus grand pression sur l’embrayage
intéressé. Il doit être noté que lorsque l’embrayage de la 2ème est égagée la soupape antichoc ne
travailles pas.
LUBRIFICAZIONE
LUBRICATION
SCHMIERUNG
2.5 bar
1ª MA 1. VORWÄRTS

��
2ª MA 2. VORWÄRTS
4,5 bar

13
12
9
7
10 16 Scarico
15 Intake pressure
Entlastung
Echappement
11
3 Clutch pressure
6 4 Kupplungsdruck
4-9 bar Principal groupe embrayage
5 Converter inlet
Wandlereingang
2 Entrée convertisseur
Entrata scambiatore
Exchanger inlet
1 CORPO DISTRIBUTORE Eingang Austausches
CONTROL VALVE BLOCK Entrée échangeur
STEUERBLOCK
Lubrificazione
Lubrication
Schmierung
Graissage
34
PST2
2
1a marcia avanti in Inching / SCHEMA F
Inching 1st forward gear / SCHEME F
Inching 1. Vorwärtsgang / SCHEMA F
1ére Marche Avant en Inching / SCHEMA F
I Manovra Inching
La manovra del pedale Inching attuata per abbinare piccoli accostamenti del carrello con elevato
regime di rotazione motore parzializza l’alimentazione della frizione interessata, riducendo la pres-
sione di lavoro e quindi la coppia trasmessa.
GB Inching manoeuver
The Inching control allows precise movement of the vehicle, irrespective of engine speed. The
oil feed to the clutch is controlled, lowering the operating pressure, allowing slipping to occur
according to pedal position.
D Inchbetätigung
Durch Betätigung des Inchpedals, wird der Druck der jeweils beaufschlagten Kupplung so gesteu-
ert, dass mit dem Stapler eine Kriechfahrt durchgeführt und stufenlos variiert werden.
F Manoeuvre Inching
La manoeuvre de la pédale Inching réalisée pour jumeler petits rapprochements du chariot à
régime de rotation moteur élevé, partialise l’alimentation de l’embrayage intéressé en réduisant la
pression de travail et donc le couple transmis.
LUBRIFICAZIONE
LUBRICATION
SCHMIERUNG
2.5 bar
1ª MA 1. VORWÄRTS

��
2ª MA 2. VORWÄRTS
4,5 bar

13
12
9
8 Scarico
Intake pressure
Entlastung
7 Echappement
16
10 Principale impacco frizioni
15
Clutch pressure
Kupplungsdruck
3 Entrata convertitore
6 4 Converter inlet
4-9 bar Wandlereingang
Entrata scambiatore
5
Exchanger inlet
Eingang Austausches
2 Entrée échangeur
Lubrificazione
Lubrication
1 CORPO DISTRIBUTORE Schmierung
CONTROL VALVE BLOCK Graissage
STEUERBLOCK
CORPS DISTRIBUTEUR�� Inching
Inching
35
PST2
3 SMONTAGGIO E MONTAGGIO TRASMISSIONE - ISTRUZIONI GENERALI
ATTENZIONE: In caso di avaria il carrello può essere trainato per distanze inferiori a 2 km
a velocità non superiore a 10 km/h. Non è consentito accendere il motore del veicolo in fase
di rimorchio, questo potrebbe causare danno alla trasmissione.
I Istruzioni generali
Prima di iniziare il lavoro di smontaggio e montaggio della trasmissione bisogna tener presente
i seguenti punti:
1) Si raccomanda la massima pulizia durante il lavoro sulla trasmissione, per cui prima del montag-
gio tutti i componenti devono essere accuratamente puliti.
2) Il luogo dove dovrà essere effettuato il lavoro dovrà essere privo di polvere e pulito al massimo.
3) Assicurarsi che si abbiano a disposizione tutti gli attrezzi necessari, ed in particolare quelli riportati
in questo manuale. Particolari non perfettamente montati possono infatti provocare gravi danni,
come anche trucioli o corpi estranei.
4) Durante la revisione dell’assale si consiglia di sostituire con pezzi nuovi le seguenti parti: anelli di
tenuta olio, guarnizioni, ed eventuali particolari danneggiati durante lo smontaggio.
5) Nel caso di rotture all’interno della trasmissione, tutti i condotti, le scatole devono essere accura-
tamente puliti per evitare danni provocati dai residui rimasti nel circuito.
SPESSORI DI REGISTRO
Ad ogni registrazione selezionare gli spessori di registro misurandoli uno ad uno con micrometro e
sommando successivamente i valori rilevati: non fidarsi dell’erronea misurazione del pacco com-
pleto oppure del valore nominale indicato per ciascun anello.
GUARNIZIONI DI TENUTA PER ALBERI ROTANTI

Per il corretto montaggio delle guarnizioni di tenuta per alberi rotanti, attenersi alle seguenti avverten-
ze:
prima del montaggio, mantenere le guarnizioni a bagno per almeno mezz’ora nello stesso olio di
cui faranno tenuta;
pulire accuratamente l’albero ed assicurarsi che la superficie di lavoro dello stesso non risulti dan-
neggiata;
orientare il labbro di tenuta verso il fluido; nel caso di labbro idrodinamico le rigature devono risul-
tare orientate in modo che, considerando il senso di rotazione dell’albero, tendano a riportare il
fluido verso l’interno del mezzo di tenuta;
spalmare sul labbro di tenuta un velo di lubrificante (l’olio è da preferire al grasso) e riempire con
grasso il vano tra labbro di tenuta e labbro parapolvere delle guarnizioni a doppio labbro;
introdurre la guarnizione nella relativa sede pressandola oppure impiegando un punzone con
superficie di contatto piana, evitare in modo assoluto di colpirla con martello o mazzuolo;
durante il piantaggio, assicurarsi che la guarnizione venga introdotta perpendicolarmente rispetto

alla sede ed, a piantaggio ultimato, accertarsi che, nei casi richiesti, risulti a contatto dello spalla-
mento;
ad evitare che il labbro di tenuta della guarnizione possa venire danneggiato dall’albero, interporre
una protezione adeguata durante il montaggio delle due parti.
36
PST2
I ISTRUZIONI GENERALI
3
GUARNIZIONI TOROIDALI O-RING
Lubrificare le guarnizioni O-RING prima di inserirle nelle rispettive sedi per evitare che, durante la
fase di montaggio, rotolino su se stesse ed assumano una posizione attorcigliata che ne pregiudi-
cherebbe la tenuta.
MASTICI DI TENUTA
Sulle superfici da accoppiare applicare il mastice di tenuta LOCTITE 510 o similare.
Prima di procedere all’applicazione del mastice, preparare le superfici nel modo seguente:
asportare eventuali incrostazioni mediante spazzola metallica;
sgrassare accuratamente le superfici
CUSCINETTI
Nel montaggio dei cuscinetti è consigliabile:
riscaldarli ad 80-90° C prima di montarli sui rispettivi alberi;
raffreddarli prima di inserirli nelle relative sedi con piantaggio esterno.
SPINE ELASTICHE
Al montaggio delle spine elastiche a tubo spaccato assicurarsi che l’intaglio delle stesse sia orien-
tato nel senso dello sforzo, sollecitante la spina.
Le spine elastiche a spirale invece non necessitano di alcun orientamento di montaggio.
IMPORTANTE: L’eliminazione fisica dei materiali usurati e sostituiti deve avvenire nel
rispetto delle leggi locali vigenti.
37
PST2
GB DISASSEMBLING AND RE-ASSEMBLING OF TRANSMISSION - GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
In case of problem, towing of vehicle is only allowed for a distance of less than 2 km with
maximum towing speed of 10 km/h. It is not possible to start the engine through towing the
vehicle, this can cause damage to the transmission.
General Instructions
Prior to starting work on the dismantling or assembing of the transmission, bear in mind the
following points:
1) When working on the transmission observe high standards of cleanliness.
All parts should be cleaned throughly prior to assembly.
2) The location where the work is to be carried out should be dust-free clean.
3) Make sure that all the necessary tools are available, particularly those mentioned in this manual.
Parts fitted incorrectly can cause serious damage, in the same way as metal chips or foreign
bodies.
4) During the transmission overhaul, you are advised tu substitute the following with new parts: oil
sealing rings, gaskets, retaining rings and any parts damaged during dismantling.
5) If breakage occurs inside the planetary gears side or transmission, all lines, casing and should be
cleaned thoroughl to prevent damage caused by residues left inside the system.
SHIMS
All adjustments shall be carried out after all adjustment shims have been selected measuring them
one by one with a micrometer gauge and, then, summing up all values measured; do not trust
incorrect measurement of pack as a unit or sum of nominal value printed on each shim.
SEALS FOR REVOLVING SHAFTS

Proceed as follows for proper fitting of oil seals:
prior assembly, seals should be soaked, for at least half an hour, in a bath with the same oil to be
used;
clean thoroughly shaft and make sure that working surface is not damaged; position sealing lip
against the fluid to be sealed; in case of hydrodynamic lip lines should be oriented so as that,
considering direction of revolving shaft, they lead fluid inside of sealing means;
smear sealing lip with a film of lubricant (oil is better than grease) and fill up with grease the space
between sealing lip and dust shield lip, if using double sealing lip type seals;
press seal in relevant position or use a proper fitter with flat contact surface; never use hammer or
mallet to mount seal;
when press fitting seal make sure that it be correctly driven in relevant position, i.e., square with
respect to its position, as fitting is completed make sure, if required, that seal itself be in contact
with relevant shoulder;
to prevent damage of seal lip when inserting shaft, duly protect component during assembly.
O-RING SEALS
Lubricate O-RING seals at assembly to prevent twisting that would impair correct sealing.
38
PST2
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
3
GB
SEALING COMPOUNDS
For matching surfaces identified by X use compound LOCTITE 510 or similar one.
Clean matching surface as follows prior, smearing compound:
remove old deposits using a metal brush;
degrease surfaces by one the following cleaners: trichloroethylene, kerosene or a warm water
and soda solution.
BEARINGS
When assembling them it is advisable to proceed as follows:
heat them at 80 to 90 °C before fitting on relevant shafts;
cool them before inserting in relevant external position.
SPRING PINS
When using spring pins be sure that lengthwise slot be positioned toward stress on pin.
Coil pins don’t require specific position.
IMPORTANT: Dispose of worn and replaced materials according to local regulation.
39
PST2
D GETRIEBE DEMONTAGE UND MONTAGE - HAUPT INSTRUKTIONEN
Im Schadensfall darf Fahrzeug über eine Stecke von weniger als 2 km mit einer
maximalen Geschwindigkeit von 10 km/h abgeschleppt werden. Durch Schleppen
des Fahrzeuges kann der Motor nicht angeworfen werden.
Jeder Anschleppversuch kann Schäden im Getriebe hervorrufen und muß deshalb
unterbleiben.
Algemeine anweisungen Von dem Ein- oder Ausbau der Kraftübertragung müssen folgende
punkte beachtet werden:
1) Sauberkeit ist für die Arbeit an der Kraftübertragung sehr wichtig, deshalb müssen alle Teile vor
dem Einbau sorgfältig gereinigt werden.
2) Der dafür vorgesehene Arbeitsplatz muß staubfrei und gereinigt sein.
3) Prüfen, ob die notwendigen und in diesem Handbuch beschrieben Werkzeuge verfügbar sind.
Nicht einwandfrei eingebaute Teile, sowie Spähne und Fremdkörper können schwere Schäden im
Getriebe verursachen.
4) Bei der Wartung der Getriebe wird empfohlen, folgende Teile durch neue zu ersetzen: Alle
Dichtungen und eventuell die Teile, die beim Ausbau beschädigt worden sind.
5) Bei Defekten Getrieben müssen alle Leitungen, das Gehäuse und der Wärmetauscher sorgfältig
gereinigt werden, damit Schäden durch zurückgebliebene Fremdkörper vermieden werden.
AUSGLEICHSSCHEIBEN
Alle Einstellungen sollen vorgenommen werden, nachdem alle Ausgleichsscheiben, gemes-
sen mit einem Mikrometer, auf die benötigte Distanz zusammengestellt wurden. Vertraue
nie möglichen inkorrekten Messungen eines Paketes als ganzes, oder der Angabe eines nominellen
Wertes, angegeben auf den Ausgleichsscheiben.
DICHTUNGEN FÜR DREHENDE WELLEN

Für richtigen Einbau beachte folgende Schritte:
Vor dem Einbau sollte die Dichtung mindestens eine halbe Stunde im selben Öl gelegen haben
das auch abgedichtetwerden soll.
Reinige die Welle und stelle sicher, daß die Dichtfläche nicht beschädigt ist.
Die Dichtlippe muß immer in Richtung der abzudichtenden Flüssigkeit eingebaut werden. Bei
Verwendung von Labyrinthdichtungen müssen die Rillen unter Beachtung der Drehrichtung der
Welle so eingebaut werden , daß das rücklaufende Öl immer in Richtung der abzudichtenden
Seite fließt.
Schmiere die Dichtlippe mit einem Film Öl ein und fülle den Raum zwischen Dichtlippe und
Staubdichtung mit Fett, wenn Doppel-Dichtringe verwendet werden.
Presse die Dichtung in den entsprechenden Sitz oder benütze ein entsprechendes Montage
Werkzeug, niemals Hammer oder Dorn zur Montage benutzen.
Bei der Montage beachten und sicherstellen, daß die Dichtung richtig im dafür vorgesehenen
Platz sitzt. Überprüfe, daß die Dichtung richtig an der Dichtfläche arbeitet.
Um Beschädigungen der Dichtlippe zu vermeiden bei der Montage der Welle, schütze das Teil so
gut wie möglich.
40
PST2
D HAUPT INSTRUKTIONEN
3
O-RING DICHTUNGEN
Der O-Ring soll vor Montage eingeölt werden um ein Verdrehen und dadurch Leckagen zu vermei-
den.
DICHTUNGS - MITTEL
Für Rontaktflächen bezeichnet mit X sollten nur folgende Mittel verwendet werden: LOCTITE 510.
Reinige die Kontaktflächen wie folgt vor Anwendung von Dichtmittel:
Reinige Kontaktflächen von altem Dichtmittel Entfette Kontaktflächen mit:
Trichloräthylene, Benzin oder warmem Wasser mit Soda Lösung.
LAGER
Bei der Lagermontage soll wie folgt verfahren werden:
Erwärmung auf 80 bis 90 Grad Celsius für Montage auf Welle Kühlung vor Einbau in entspre-
chenden Sitz.
FEDERSTIFTE
Bei Verwendung von Spannstiften soll die Öffnung in Richtung Kraftwirkung eingebaut werden.
Federstifte erfordern keine spezifische Richtung.
HAUPTSACHE: die Elimination der ausgelaufenen und erneuerten Stoffe muß

entsprechend der örtlichen geltenden Gesetze zustande kommen.
41
PST2
F DEMONTAGE ET MONTAGE DE LA TRANSMISSION - GENERALITES
En cas de panne, le chariot, peut être traîné pour des distances inférieures à 2 km et une
vitesse non supérieure à 10 km/h. La mise en marche du véhicule est interdite en phase de
remolque: cela pourrait provoquear un dommage à la transmission.
Généralites
Avant de démonter ou de monter la bôite de vitesse il faut tenir compte des éléments suivants:
1) On recommande le maximum de propreté et de soin pendant l’intervention, c’est pour cette rai-
son qu’avant le montage tous les composants devront être soigneusement nettoyés.
2) L’endroit où l’on effectue le travail doit être propre et sans poussière.
3) Vérifier que tous les accessoires dont on a besoin sont disponibles et particulièrement ceux qui
sont mentionnés dans ce manuel. Des pièces mal montées peuvent en effet causer des domma-
ges importants dans la transmission.
4) Pendant la révision de la transmission nous vous conseillons de remplacer les pièces suivantes:
joints étanchéite d’huile, joints elastiques, joints toriques et toutes les pièces qui ont été éventuel-
lement déteriorées pendant le démontage.
5) En cas de rupture à l’intérieur de la transmission, tous les conduits, les carters et l’échangeur de
chaleur doivent être bien nettoyés afin d’éviter des dommages provoqués par des résidus restés
dans le circuit.
CALES DE REGLAGE
A chaque réglage sélectionner les cales de réglage en les mesurant un à un par micromètre et en
aditionnant par la suite les valeurs relevées: ne pas compter sur l’erronée mesurage du paquet
complet ou de la valeur nominale indiquée pour chaque bague.
JOINTS D’ETANCHEITE POUR ARBRES ROULANTS
Pour un correct montage des joints d’étanchéité pour arbres roulants s’en tenir aux instructions suiva-
tes:
avant le montage, maintenir les joints à bain pour au moins une demi-heure dans le même huile
dont ils feront étanchéité;
nettoyer soigneusement l’arbre et s’assurer que la surface de travail du même ne pas résulte
endommagée;
orienter le bord d’étanchéité vers le fluide; si le bord est hydrodynamique les rayures doivent être
orientées de façon que, tenu compte du sens de rotation de l’arbre, elles tendent à reporter le
fluide vers l’intérieur du moyen d’étanchéité;
étaler sur le bord d’étanchéité un voile de lubrifiant (l’huile est à préférer au gras) et remplir avec
du gras le siège entre le bord d’étanchéité et le bord parapoussière des joints à bord double;
introduire le joint dans le relatif siège en le pressant ou en utilisant un poinçon avec une surface
de contact plane, éviter absolument de le frapper par marteau ou massette;
pendant le plantage, s’assurer que le joint soit introduit perpendiculaire par rapport au siège et, à
plantage achevé, s’assurer que, dans les cas demandés, il résulte à contact de l’épaulement;
afin d’éviter que le bord d’étanchéité du joint soit endommagé par l’arbre, interposer une protec-
tion appropriée pendant le montage des deux parts.
42
PST2
GENERALITES
3
F
JOINTS TOROIDALS O-RING

Lubrifier les joints O-RING avant de les insérer dans les respectifs sièges afin d’éviter que, pendant
la phase de montage, ils roulent sur eux-mêmes et assument une position enroulée qui serait noci-
ve pour son étanchéité.
PATES A JOINT
Sur les surfaces qu’il faut accoupler appliquer la pâte à joint LOCTITE 510 ou similaires.
Avant de procéder à l’application de la pâte à joint, préparer les surfaces de cette façon:
emporter éventuelles incrustations par une brosse métallique;
dégraisser soigneusement les surfaces.
ROULEMENTS
Pendant le montage des roulements il est conseillable:
les chauffer à 80-90°C avant de les monter sur les respectifs arbres;
les refroidir avant de les insérer dans les sièges relatifs par plantage extérieur.
GOUPILLES ELASTIQUES
Au montage des goupilles élastiques à tuyau fendu s’assurer que l’entaille des mêmes soit orienté
vers l’effort, en activant la goupille.
Pour les goupilles élastiques à spiral au contraire il ne faut pas d’orientation de montage.
IMPORTANT: L’ èlimination physique des vieux matériaux ou de ceux qui ont ètè
remplacés doit être faite dans le respect des lois en vigueur.
43
PST2
ISTRUZIONI GENERALI / Conservazione ed utilizzo del prodotto

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS / Storage and service instructions
I Per garantire la corretta conservazione, manipolazione ed utilizzo del prodotto occorre attenersi alle
seguenti istruzioni:
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE
• di immagazzinamento - 40 + 60° C
• di lavoro - 30 + 60° C
Durante la manipolazione del prodotto evitare urti che potrebbero danneggiare componenti
esterni ed interni.
In caso di fermate prolungate prima dell’installazione o del riavviamento assicurarsi che il prodot-
to non abbia subito danni.
Non sottoporre i componenti elettrici a tensioni incompatibili con le loro caratteristiche
Non utilizzare mai benzina, gasolio o altri liquidi infiammabili come detergenti: ricorrere invece ai
solventi commerciali ininfiammabili e non tossici.
In caso di arresto e di abbandono del veicolo assicurarsi che il freno di stazionamento sia inseri-
to.
Il mancato rispetto di queste istruzioni oppure l’uso non corretto del prodotto può
produrre danni a cose o persone.
GB In order to assure the right condition, handling and utilization of the product, perform the following
instruction:
TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS
• Storage - 40 + 60° C
• Working - 30 + 60° C
During the handling of the product avoid any collision in order not to damage the external and
internal components.
In case of long inactivity of the product, before installing or starting, beware that the product has
not suffered any damage.
Do not energize the electrical components with incompatible voltage.
Never use petrol, solvents or other inflammable fluids, use only approved commercial solvents
that are both non-inflammable and not-toxic.
In case of stopping and before living the vehicle, make sure the parking brake is engaged.
Failing to follow these instructions or an unproper use of the product may result in harm to
persons and objects damages.
44
PST2
HAUPT INSTRUKTIONEN / Lager- und Service Hinweise

GENERALITES / Conservation et utilisation du produit 3
D Um die angemessene Lagerung, Behandlung und Verwendung der Produkte zu garantieren, müssen
folgende Hinweise beachtet werden:
TEMPERATURBEDINGUNGEN
• Bei Lagerung - 40 + 60° C
• Im Einsatz - 30 + 60° C
Innere und äußere Beschädigungen sind zu vermeiden
ßei Längerer Lagerung des Produktes, muß sichergestellt sein, daß keine Beschädigung auf-
getreten ist.
Elektrische Komponenten sind nur mit der vorgeschriebenen Spannung zu belasten.
Niemals Benzin, Lösungsmittel oder entflammbare Flüssigkeiten verwenden.

Handelsübliche, nicht ent-flammbare und ungiftige Reinigungsmittel benützen.
Beim Abstellen und vor dem Verlassen des Fahrzeuges ist die Parkbremse zu betätigen.
Durch Nichtbeachtung dieser Instruktionen oder einer ungeeigneten Verwendung dieses

Produktes kann Gefahr für Menschen oder Sachschaden an Objekten entstehen.
F Pour garantir une correcte conservation, manipulation et utilisation du produit, il faut s’en tenir aux ins-
tructions suivantes:
TEMPERATURE AMBIANTE
• Stockage - 40 + 60°C
• de travail - 30 + 60°C
Pendant la manipulation du produit éviter les coups qui pourraient endommager les components
extérieurs et intérieurs.
En cas d’arrêts prolongés avant de l’installation ou du redémarrage s’assurer que le produit ne

soit pas endommagé.
Ne pas soumettre les éléments électriques à tensions incompatibles avec leurs caractéristiques.
Ne jamais utliser de l‘essence, gas-oil ou des autres liquides inflammables comme détergents:
utiliser plutôt des solvents commerciaux ni inflammables ni toxiques.
En cas d’arrêt et d’abandon du vehicule s’assurer que le frein de stationnement soit inséré.
Le manqué respect des instructions ou un usage pas approprié du produit peut provoquer des
dommages à choses ou personnes.
45
PST2
3
SMONTAGGIO E MONTAGGIO TRASMISSIONE - Attrezzi speciali
DISASSEMBLING AND RE-ASSEMBLING OF TRANSMISSION - Specific tools
GETRIEBE DEMONTAGE UND MONTAGE - Montagewerkzeug
DEMONTAGE ET MONTAGE DE LA TRANSMISSION - Outils spéciaux
I 1 - Punzone per piantaggio cuscinetto a sfere

2 - Attrezzo per montaggio anello Q-Ring (vedere disegni pag. 142)
3 - Attrezzatura per la scomposizione dei pacchi frizione (vedere disegni pag. 140)
4 - Punzone per piantaggio cuscinetto a sfere
GB 1 - Bearing fitting tool

2 - Q-Ring assembling tool (see drawings page 142)
3 - Fixture for diassembling of clutch plates (see drawings page 140)
4 - Bearing fitting tool
D 1 - Bolzen für Montage von Rilenkugellager.

2 - Werkzeug für die Montage des Q-Rings (Siehe Zeichnung, Seite 142).
3 - Werkzeug zur Demontage der Kupplungslamellen (Siehe Zeichnung, Seite 140).
4 - Bolzen für Montage von Rillenkugellager.
F 1 -Poinçon pour positionnement roulement à billes

2 - Outil pour montage bague Q-Ring (Voir dessins page 142)
3 - Outillage pour démontage des packs embrayage (Voir dessins page 140)
4 - Poinçon pour positionnement roulement à billes
46
PST2
3
Attrezzi / Tools / Werkzeug / Outils
1 2 3
4902166
48A17127
4A41377
4 5 6 7
4902648 4902174 4902172 4902302
47
PST2
Smontaggio e montaggio trasmissione

Dismantle and assemble transmission
Getriebe Demontage und Montage
Demontage et montage de la transmission
SICUREZZA GENERALE
I Prima di eseguire qualsiasi intervento di riparazione, predisporre le adeguate misure di sicu-
rezza indicate nel capitolo “Norme di sicurezza” e rispettare le leggi vigenti in materia di sicurezza
nei posti di lavoro.
GENERAL SAFETY
GBBefore undertaking any repair, follow safety rules indicated in chapter “Safety rules” in
accordance with specific local regulation about safety on work places.
ALLGEMEINE SICHERHEIT
D Vor jeder Ausbesserung vorbereiten die Sicherheitsmaßnahme, die im Kapitel “Sicherheit
sbestimmungen” angegeben sind und achten die besonderen Gesetze über die Sicherheit im
Arbeitsplätze.
SURETE GENERALE
F Avant d’effectuer toute intervention de réparation, préparer les mesures de sûreté les plus
adéquates, indiquées au chapitre “Normes de sûreté” et respecter les réglementations en
vigueur en matière de sûreté sur les lieux de travail.
I Scarico olio: Scaricare l’olio dalla scatola inver-

sore e dalla Presa di Forza (a seconda della ver-
sione).
GB Oil draining: Drain the oil from the main case and
P.T.O. housing (according to the version).
D Ölablassen: Öl ablassen vom Getriebe und
Nebenabtriebsgehäuse (Nach der Ausführung).
F Dégorgement huile: Dégorger l’huile du carter
transmission et du carter prise de force (selon la
1 version).
I Stacco convertitore: Rimuovere il convertitore

sfilandolo assialmente.
GB Torque converter removal: Remove converter
unit by pulling it in axial direction.
D Wandler waagerecht abziehen: Wandler in
Achsenrichtung abziehen.
F Détachement du convertisseur: Détacher le

convertisseur en l’enlevant axialement.
2
48
PST2
3
I Smontaggio Valvola antishock 2a marcia (a
secondo della versione): Svitare, il raccordo (a) a
dal coperchio P.d.F., i due raccordi (b) e (c) dal
distributore, le due viti (d) e rimuovere la valvola. b
GB Dismantling 2 nd speed Antishock valve c
(according to various configuration): Unscrew
the connection hose union (a), both unions (b)
and (c) of the delivering unit, both screws (d),
finally remove the valve.
D Ausbau Antischockventil 2. Gang (je nach 3
Version): Anschluss (a) vom Deckel Nebenabtrieb
d
und die beiden Anschlüsse (b) und (c) vom
Verteiler losschrauben sowie die zwei Schrauben
(d) lösen, dann das Ventil entfernen.
F Demontage Vanne antichoc 2ème marche
(selon la version): Dévisser le raccord (a) du cou-
vercle de la Prise de Mouvement, les deux raccords
(b) et (c) du distributeur, les deux vis (d) et enlever la
vanne
I Stacco distributore: Sbloccare e svitare le viti

fissaggio corpo distributore e piastra al carter 4a
inversore.
• Smontare il distributore completo.
GB Distributor removal: Undo screws securing
distributor body and adapter plate to main case.
• Remove distributor valve assy.
D Ausbausteuerblock: Befestigungsschrauben der

Steuerung lösen.
4b
• Steuerblock komplette abheben.
F Détachement du distributeur: desserrer les vis
de fixation corps distributeur et plaque au carter
inverseur.
• Enlever le distributeur complet.
I Sbloccare e svitare le quattro viti di unione della

piastra al carter inversore.
GB Release and unscrew the four fastening bolts
from oil distributor plate.
D Die 4 Befestigungsschrauben von der
Ölverteilerplatte lösen.
F Débloquer les quatre vis d ́union entre la plaque
et le carter inverseur.
5
49
PST2
I Smontare la piastra di collegamento e la relativa

guarnizione.
GB Disassemble connecting plate and relevant gasket
D Ölverteilerplatte mit Dichtung abheben.
F Enlever le joint en papier de la plaque.
I Svitare il filtro olio usato con apposita chiave.

GB Unscrew oil filter cartridge by using a suitable
tool.
D Filterpatrone mit dem Spannband Links herum
(entgegen dem uhzeigersinn) Lösen.
F Débloquer et dévisser le filtre a huile.
I Sbloccare e svitare le viti di unione del coperchio

Presa di Forza (a seconda della versione) carter
convertitore.
GB Undo the fastening screws of the converter P.T.O.
carter (according to the version).
D Die Befestigungsschrauben vom Nebenab-triebs-
deckel herausschrauben (Nach der Ausführung).
F Débloquer et dévisser les vis de fixation du cou-
vercle prise de force (selon la version) carter.
8
PST2 senza P.d.F. PST2 ohne Nebenabtrieb
PST2 without P.T.O. PST2 sans Prise de Force
I Estrarre assialmente il coperchio Presa di Forza.

GB Remove the P.T.O. cover.
D Nebenabtriebsdeckel abziehen.
F Extraire axialment le couvercle prise de force.
9a 9b
PST2 con P.d.F. PST2 senza P.d.F.
PST2 with P.T.O. PST2 without P.T.O.
PST2 mit Nebenabtrieb PST2 ohne Nebenabtrieb
PST2 avec Prise de Force PST2 sans Prise de Force
50
PST2
3
Smontaggio coperchio Presa di Forza - versione “A”
Dismantling of Power take-off cover - version “A”
Nebenantriebsdeckeldemontage Version“A”
Demontage couvercle prise de force - version “A”
I Togliere l’anello elastico di fermo assiale ingra-

naggio conduttore.
GB Remove the snap-ring from the drive gear.
D Sicherungsring entfernen.
F Enlever le segment de retenue de l’engrenage con-
ducteur.
10
I Sfilare con precauzione l’anello di tenuta idraulica

in ghisa montato sull’albero conduttore.
GB Extract carefully the cast iron seal ring from the
drive shaft.
D Vorsichtig Kolbendichtring entfernen.
F Enlever avec précaution le bague d’étanchéité en
fonte.
11
I Sollevare gli ingranaggi con catena mediante

opportune leve.
GB Lift up gears with chain, assembly by using prop-
er levers.
D Zahnräder und Kette zusammen mit zwei
Montagehebeleisen abdrücken.
F Soulever les engrenages avec chaîne par des
leviers appropriées.
12
I Allentare le viti fissaggio coperchio fermo cusci-

netto albero conduttore.
GB Release screws securing cover retaining driving
shaft bearing.
D Schraube lösen und mit Halteblech entfernen.
F Desserrer les vis de fixation du couvercle fermeture
roulement de l’arbre conducteur.
13
51
PST2
I Spiantare l’albero conduttore completo di cusci-

netto.
GB Remove the shaft complete with bearing.
D Welle komplett mit Lager herausziehen.
F Arracher l’arbre conducteur complet de roulement.
14
I Estrarre l’anello elastico per l’eventuale sostitu-

zione del cuscinetto.
GB Remove the snap-ring if you have to replace the
bearing.
D Falls Lager getauscht werden muß, Sicherungsring
entfernen.
F Extraire le circlips en cas de substitution de le
roulement.
15
I Smontare e sostituire, la guarnizione O-Ring

all’interno dell’albero conduttore.
GB Remove the O-ring from the inside of the shaft
and replace it.
D O-Ring im Innendurchmesser der Welle prüfen,
falls erforderlich austauschen.
F Démonter et substituer, se nécessaire le joint.
16
52
PST2
3
Smontaggio coperchio Presa di Forza - versione “B”
Dismantling of Power take-off cover - version “B”
Nebenantriebsdeckeldemontage Version“B”
Demontage couvercle prise de force - version “B”
I Togliere l’anello elastico di fermo assiale albero

conduttore.
• Sfilare con precauzione l’anello di tenuta idrauli-
ca in ghisa montato sull’albero conduttore.
GB Remove the snap-ring from the drive shaft
• Extract carefully the cast iron piston seal ring
from the drive shaft.
D Den Sprengring der Antriebswelle herausziehen.

• Vorsichtig Kolbendichtring entfernen. 17
F Enlever le segment de retenue de l’arbre conducteur.
• Démonté avec précaution le joint hydraulique en
fonte que est monté sur l’arbre primaire.
I Facendo leva sotto l’ingranaggio condotto, estrar-

re contemporaneamente lo stesso e la catena.
GB Pry the driven gear and the chain out with 2 crow
bars.
D Zahnräder und Kette zusammen mit zwei
Montagehebeleisen abdrücken.
F Soulever avec une levier le pignon de renvoi et la
chaîne.
18
I Spiantare e, se necessario, sostituire il cuscinetto

dell’ingranaggio condotto.
GB Remove and, if necessary, replace driven gear
bearing.
D Wenn nötig, den Abtriebszahnradlager enfernen
und erneuern.
F Démonter et, se nécessaire, remplacer le roule-
ment du pignon de renvoi.
19
53
PST2
I Allentare e svitare le tre viti di ritegno del coper-

chietto dell’albero conduttore.
• Spiantare l’albero conduttore completo di
cuscinetto.
• Estrarre l’anello elastico per l’eventuale sostitu-
zione del cuscinetto.
• Smontare e sostituire la guarnizione Q-Ring
all’interno dell’albero conduttore.
GB Undo the three screws of the drive shaft cover.
20a 20b • Remove the drive shaft complete with bearing.
• Remove the snap-ring if bearing has to be
replaced.
• Remove the O-Ring from inside the drive shaft
and replace It.
D Die 3 Befestigungsshrauben vom

Lagerhaltedeckel herausshrauben und Deckel
abnehmen.
• Welle komplett mit Lager herausziehen.
• Falls Lager getauscht werden muß,
Sicherungsring entfernen.
• Q-Ring im Innendurchmesser der Welle prüfen,
falls erforderlich austauschen.
F Ralentir et dévisser les 3 vis du couvercle de l’ar-
bre de renvoi. Déplanter l’arbre primaire avec le
roulement.
• Déplacer le jonc pour remplacer le roulement.
• Démonter et remplacer le Q joint sur le pignon
primaire.
I Nell' eventuale sostituzione dell' anello Q-Ring

21a dell' ingranaggio conduttore e dell' ingranaggio
condotto, utilizzare per il montaggio l'attrezzo
speciale 48A17127.
GB Should the replacement of the Q-Ring fitted on
the driving and driven gears be necessary, use
specific tool 48A17127.
Q-Ring D Wenn man den Q-Ring im Antriebszahnrad und

im Abtriebszahnrad erneuern möchte, mub man
48A17127 für die Montage das spezielle Werkzeug verwen-
den, d.h.: 48A17127.
F Pour démonter et remonter le Q joint sur le
pignons primaire et de renvoi, il faut utiliser l’outil
spéciaux 48A17127.
21b
54
PST2
3
Smontaggio trasmissione
Dismantle transmission
Getriebe Demontage
Demontage de la transmission
I Sfilare la flangia di uscita del moto.

GB Extract the output flange.
D Abtriebsflansch herausziehen.
F Démonter la patte du sortie du traction.
22
I Sbloccare e svitare le viti di unione del carter

Presa di Forza alla scatola inversore.
GB Remove P.T.O. housing attachment screws.
D Befestigungsschrauben vom
Nebenabtriebsgehäuse herausschrauben.
F Démonter les vis du carter de pris de force à le
carter de boîte de vitesse.
23
I Smontare il carter Presa di Forza sfilandolo

assialmente.
GB Disassemble the P.T.O. case extracting it axially.
D Nebenabtriebsgehäuse axial abziehen.
F Démonter le carter de prise de force en enlevant
axial ment le même.
24
I Sbloccare e svitare le viti di unione del coperchio

alla scatola inversione.
GB Remove cover to housing attachment screws.
D Befestigungsschrauben vom Deckel heraus-
schrauben.
F Débloquer et dévisser les vis d’assemblage du
couvercle à la boite inverseur.
25
55
PST2
I Facendo leva, estrarre il coperchio completo di

pompa.
GB Pry off the cover with pump.
D Deckel und Pumpe mit Hilfe eines Hebeleisens
abheben.
F Détacher le couvercle complet de pompe à huile
du carter transmission.
26
I Svitare le quattro viti di ritegno pompa ed estrar-

la.
GB Remove the four retaining screws from the pump
and extract the pump.
D Die vier Befestigungsschrauben der Pumpe lösen
und Pumpe abnehmen.
F Dévisser les 4 vis de retenue de la pompe.
27
I Tappo scarico e filtro aspirazione olio

Svitare il tappo di scarico e il filtro dell’olio in
aspirazione. Pulire accuratamente il filtro con
appropriati detergenti e soffiare con aria com-
pressa, quindi rimontare e sostituire la guarnizio-
ne di rame del tappo.
GB Oil drain plug and oil filter
Unscrew the oil drain plug and remove the inlet
oil filter. Clean thoroughly the oil filter with a suit-
able cleaner and dry with compressed air, then
28 re-assemble and replace copper seal of plug.
D Ölablass-Schraube und Ölfilter

Die Ölablass-Schraube lösen und den Saugfilter
herausschrauben.
Saugfilter mit Reinigungsmittel auswaschen und
durch Ausblasen mit Druckluft trocknen.
Cu-Ring an der Verschluss-Schraube ersetzen.
F Bouchon de dégorgement et filtre d’aspiration
à huile
Dévisser le bouchon de dégorgement et le fil-
tre à huile en strade d’aspiration. Nettoyer
soigneusement le filtre avec des détergents
appropiès et souffler avec de l’air conprimé.
56
PST2
3
I Estrarre, se necessario, i cuscinetti e sostituire.
GB Inspect the bearing. Renew if necessary.
D Lager prüfen; falls erforderlich erneuern.
F Extraire, si nécessaire les roulement et substituer.
29
I Aprire la pompa, sfilando il manicotto statore dal

corpo pompa.
Controllare le usure degli ingranaggi e le relative
sedi di lavoro.
GB Disassemble the pump.

Check the gear and pump housing for wear.
D Pumpe demontieren.
Hohlrad, Ritzel und Gehäuse der Pumpe auf
Abnutzung prüfen.
30 31
F Ouvrir la pompe en enlevant le manchon stator de
Versione senza P.d.F.
le corps pompe. Contrôler les usures des pignons Version without P.T.O.
et leurs logements. Version ohne Nebenabtrieb
Version sans Prise de Force
I Rimontare la pompa inserendo gli ingranaggi

condotto, con lo smusso verso il corpo pompa, e
conduttore nel corpo pompa e quindi il coperchio
pompa-manicotto statore avendo cura di non
danneggiare la boccola sull’ingranaggio condut-
tore.
GB Reassemble the oil pump by fitting driven gear,
with the chamfer facing toward pump case, and
driving gear set in pump case, then fit the pump
/ stator sleeve cover, taking care not to damage
driving gear bushing. 32
D Pumpeneinheit montieren. Antriebsrad mit der
angeschrägten Seite zum Pumpengehäuse hin
montieren. Vorsicht bei der Montage, daß die
Buchse im Ritzel nicht beschädigt wird.
F Remonter la pompe en insérant les engrenages
conduit et conducteur dans le corps pompe, puis
le couvercle pompe-manchon stator en ayant soin
de ne pas endommager la boucle sur l’engrenage
conducteur.
57
PST2
I Rimontare la pompa completa sul coperchio

posizionando correttamente la guarnizione (ver-
sione senza P.d.F.) nella relativa sede.
GB Reassemble the pump to the cover, making sure
that the gasket (version without P.T.O.) is located
correctly.
D Pumpe komplett an den Deckel montieren.
Darauf achten, daß die Dichtung (Version ohne
Nebenabtrieb) korrekt eingebaut wird.
F Remonter la pompe complète sur le couvercle, en
positionnant correctement la joint (version sans
P.d.F.) dans son logement.
33
I Applicare, alle viti di fissaggio pompa, frena filetti

34 medio e serrare ad una coppia di 24 Nm.
GB Apply a Medium Loctite to screws and tighten
with a torque of 24 Nm.
D Schrauben mit Loctite Medium einsetzen und mit
einem Drehmoment von 24 Nm anziehen.
F Appliquer le frein à filets moyen sur les vis et blo-
quer à un couple de serrage 24 Nm.
I Rimuovere la paratia.
GB Remove baffle plate.
D Umlenkblech entfernen.
F Enlever la cloison.
35
58
PST2
3
I Estrarre con estrattore l’ingranaggio condotto
delle due velocità unitamente all’anello interno
del cuscinetto calettato sull’albero d’uscita.
GB By two arms puller, pull out the two speed
driven gear with the inner ring of the bearing on
the output shaft.
D Mit zweiarmigem Abzieher das Zahnrad
für den zweiten Gang mit dem Innenring des
Zylinderrollenlagers auf der Abtriebswelle abzie-
hen.
36
F Sortir avec la chasse, le pignon conduit de deux
vitesses en même temps que l’anneau interne du
roulement joint sur l’arbre de sortie.
I Sfilare l’albero frizioni marcia indietro completo.

GB Extract the complete reverse clutch shaft.
D Rückwärtsgangkupplung komplett herausheben.
F Enlever le arbre embrayage Marche Arrière com-
plet.
37
I Estrarre il gruppo frizione Marcia Avanti comple-

to.
GB Extract the complete Forward Clutch shaft.
D Vorwärtsgangkupplung komplett herausheben.
F Extraire le groupe embrayage Marche Avant com-
plet.
38
59
PST2
I Estrarre l’albero di uscita completo di ingranag-

gio.
GB Extract the complete output shaft.
D Abriebswelle komplett herausheben.
F Sortir l’arbre de sortie complet de pignon.
39
I Se necessario, spiantare e sostituire i cuscinetti

degli alberi frizione e dell’albero di uscita, rimuo-
vere e sostituire la guarnizione di tenuta di que-
st’ultimo.
GB Inspect the bearings of the clutch shafts, the
bearing of the output shaft, remove and replace
the oil seal.
D Kupplungswellenlager, Abtriebswellenlager und
Wellendictring prüfen. Falls erforderlich, erneuern.
F S’il est nécessaire, extraire et remplacer les rou-
lements des arbres d’embrayage et de l’arbre de
sortie et tous le joints.
40
I Verificare le condizioni della valvola sicurezza

della lubrificazione. È infilata nella sua sede sul
carter e trattenuta dal distributore.
GB Inspect lubrication safety valve. It is located in the
case, fitted under the distributor valve.
D Schmierüberdruckventil prüfen. Das ventil ist im
Gehäuse unter dem Steuerblock angebracht.
F Vérifier les conditions de la vanne de sûreté des
41 graissage et relative étanchéité sur base d’appui
du distributeur.
60
PST2
3
Revisione frizioni marcia avanti e marcia indietro: smontaggio
Forward and reverse clutch overhauling: dismantling
Ausprüfung der Vorwärts- und Rückwärtsgang Kupplungen - Demontage
Révision des embrayages Marche Avant et Marche Arrière
I Sganciare e sfilare, prestando particolare atten-

zione, l’anello di tenuta idraulica in ghisa dall’al-
bero frizioni marcia indietro.
GB On reverse clutch shaft, unhook and remove, with
particular care, cast-iron piston seal ring.
D Vorsichtig den Gusseisen- oder
Plastikkolbendichtring von der Welle der
Rückwärtsgangkupplung lösen und entfernen.
F Décrocher et enlever avec soin particulier le
bague d’étanchéité en fonte de l’arbre embrayage
marche arrière.
42
I Ripetere l’operazione per i tre anelli dal lato oppo-

sto dell’albero.
GB Repeat the same operation for the three seal rings
on the opposite side of shaft.
D Vorgang auf der gegenüberliegenden Seite mit
den 3 Kolbenringen wiederholen.
F Répéter l’opération pour les trois joints de l’autre
cote de l’arbre.
43
I Spiantare contemporaneamente dall’albero frizio-

ne: l’anello del cuscinetto, le ralle, il distanziale e
l’ingranaggio conduttore della marcia.
GB Remove from the clutch shaft: inner bearing race,
thrust washers, spacer and drive gear.
D Lagerinnenring und Zahnrad zusammen mit zwei-
armigen Abzieher abziehen.
F Extraire, en même temps, de l’arbre d’embrayage:
la bauge de roulement, les butées, l’entretoise et 44
le pignon conducteur de la vitesse.
61
PST2
I Sfilare dall’albero i componenti menzionati al

punto 44.
GB Extract from shaft the components indicated in
step 44.
D Lose Teile von Bild 44 herausnehmen.
F Défiler de l’arbre les composants sous-mentionés
au point 44.
45
I Sfilare la gabbia a rulli.

GB Extract the needle roller cage.
D Nadlhülsen herausnehmen.
F Enlever la cage à rouleaux.
46
I Sfilare la ralla e controralla e verificarne le condi-

zioni.
GB Extract thrust washers and check condition.
D Scheiben herausnehmen und prüfen.
F Défiler la butée et la contrebutée et vérifier leur
état.
47
62
PST2
3
I Rimuovere dalla sede l'anello elastico di ritegno
disco di reazione inserendo, tramite uno dei fori,
un cacciavite e premere verso l' esterno, contem-
poraneamente con un altro cacciavite sganciare
l'anello elastico di ritegno ed estrarre il tutto.
GB Remove from its seat the circlip which holds the
reaction plate. The circlip must be pressed out-
wards by a screwdriver fitted in one of the holes
of the clutch housing.
At the same time, by another screwdriver pry the
circlip out, then remove all the components of the 48
clutch pack.
D Um den Sprengring, der die Reaktionsscheibe hal-
tet, zu entfernen, einen Schraubendreher verwen-
den.
Nach auben drücken und gleichzeitig mit einem
anderem Schraubendreher den Sprengring
abhängen und die Teile herausziehen.
F Enlever du siège la bague de retenue du disque
de réaction en insérant, à travers l’un des trous,
un tournevis et pousset vers l’extérieur; en même
temps, à l’aide d’un autre tournevis, décrocher la
bague de retenue et extraire le tout.
I Sfilare dalla campana i dischi e i controdischi fri-

zione (6 + 6).
GB Pull out driving and driven disks (6 + 6) from
clutch housing.
D Deck-Innen- und Außenlamellen herausnehmen
(6 + 6).
F Enlever de la cloche les disques et les contredis-
ques de I‘embrayage (6 + 6).
49
63
PST2
ATTENZIONE
Impiegare gli utensili adatti.
NON USARE MAI DITA O MANI
o attrezzi non idonei
4A41377 WARNING
Use the proper tools.
NEVER USE FINGERS OR HANDS
or incorrect tools
ACHTUNG
Schwere Teile nur mit geeignetem Hebe-und
Transportwerkzeug transportieren.
Vorsicht auf Hände und Finger
50a
ATTENTION
Utiliser les outils appropriés.
NE JAMAIS UTILISER DE DOIGTS OU MAINS
ou d’outils pas appropriés
I Mediante appropriato attrezzo (dis. 4A41377)

comprimere la molla di reazione per estrarre
lʼanello elastico di ritegno (A).
A GB Compress the reaction spring by using a suitable
tool (dwg. 4A41377) and pull out the retaining
ring (A).
D Feder über Halteblech mit Spezialwerkzeug (Zng.
4A41377) niederdrücken, bis Sicherungsring frei
ist. Sicherungsring lösen (A).
50b F Par opportun outil (4A41377) comprimer le res-

sort de réaction afin d’extraire le segment de
retenue (A).
I Svitare quindi l’attrezzo fino a liberare il precarico

della molla.
GB Unscrew the tool to release spring pre-load.
D Muttern am Spezialwerkzeug lösen und entfernen.
F Dévisser donc l’outillage jusqu’à dégager la char-
ge du ressort.
51
64
PST2
3
I Sfilare lo scodellino di ritegno e la molla di reazio-
ne.
GB Remove retaining cup and reaction spring.
D Sicherungsring, Halteblech und Feder herausneh-
men.
F Enlever le petit bol et le ressort.
52
I Sfilare lo stantuffo dalla campana frizioni median-

te immissione aria compressa nel condotto della
marcia.
Pulire perfettamente tutti i particolari, verficarli,
sostituirli secondo necessità e rimontarli previa
lubrificazione degli anelli di tenuta.
GB Push out piston from clutch housing by injecting
compressed air into clutch ducting.
Clean full all components, check, replace as
required and reassemble after seal rings have
been duly lubricated. 53
D Kolben herausnehmen, falls erforderlich mit
Preßluft. O-Ring auf der Welle demontieren und
prüfen.
F Enlever le piston de la cloche de l‘embrayage par
introduction d‘air comprimé dans le conduit de la
marche.
Nettoyer soigneusement tous les composants,
les vérifier, les substituer selon nécessité et
les remonter après lubrification des bagues
d’étanchéité.
65
PST2
I Sostituire l’anello di tenuta esterno e quello inter-

no dello stantuffo.
Lubrificarli secondo istruzioni generali.
GB Replace the outer and inner seal rings of piston.
Lubricate rings according to instructions.
D O-Ringe von Kolben und Welle entfernen.

54 Schmieren Sie Ringe entsprechend general
Anweisungen.
F Substituer la bague d’étanchéité extérieure et la

bague intérieure du piston.
Les lubrifier en suivant les instructions general.
I Ripetere le operazioni dalla figura 44 alla figura 54 sul gruppo frizione opposto. Lo stesso pro-
cedimento va ripetuto sullʼalbero frizione marcia avanti.
GB Repeat all working operation from pictures 44 to 54 on the opposite clutch group and on the
forward clutch shaft.
D Arbeitsgänge von Bild 44 bis 54 an der gegenüberliegenden Kupplung, sowie and der Vorwärts-
gangkupplung wiederholen.
F Répéter les opérations de l’illustration 44 à l’illustration 54 sur groupe friction opposé. La
même procédure doit être répété sur l’arbre friction vitesse avant.
66
PST2
3
SMONTAGGIO E RIMONTAGGIO DISTRIBUTORE
DISTRIBUTOR VALVE DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
STEUERBLOCK - DEMONTAGE UND MONTAGE
DEMONTAGE ET REMONTAGE DU DISTRIBUTEUR
Inching Idraulico Inching Meccanlco

Hydraulic Inching Mechanical Inching
Hydraulisches Inching Mechanisches Inching
Inching Hidraulique Inching Mecanique
fig. 55
I La figura indica in sequenza dallʼalto verso il D Das Bild zeigt die fünf Schaltebenen des
basso i cinque assi del distributore: Steuerblockes (von oben nach unten):
1) asse Inching-control; 1) Inchkolben;
2) asse valvola antishock e pressione 2) Antischockventil und Wandlerdruck;
convertitore; 3) Schaltmagnetventil für den 1. Gang und
3) asse valvola selettrice 1a - 2a; 2. Gang;
4) asse valvola selettrice avanti-indietro; 4) Schaltmagnetventil für den Vorwärts- und
5) asse valvola modulatrice e pressione Rückwärtsgang;
principale. 5) Modulationsventil und Hauptdruck.
6) asse valvola antishock 2a marcia (Optional) 6) Antischockventil zweitev Gang (auf Wunsch).
GB The figure shows from top to bottom the five F Dans la figure on peut voir, du l’haut vers le bas,
distributor valve axles: les cinq axes du distributeur:
1) Inching control axle; 1) axe vanne modulateur et pression principale;
2) anti-shock valves and converter pressure; 2) axe vanne sélecteur avant-arrière;
3) solenoid valve for the 1st and 2nd gear; 3) axe vanne sélecteur 1ére et 2éme marche;
4) forward and reverse solenoid valves; 4) axe vanne antichoc et pression convertisseur;
5) modulating valves and main pressure; 5) axe Inching contrôle;
6) 2nd speed Antishock valve (Optional) 6) axe vanne antichoc 2ème marche (en option).
67
PST2
I Smontaggio asse selettrice avanti-indietro

Svitare le viti a testa cilindrica del coperchio di
ritegno elettrovalvola.
GB Forward-reverse shift valve disassembly

Unscrew securing bolts of forward and reverse
solenoid valve lid.
D Schaltmagnetventil für den Vorwärts- und

Rückwärtsgang Achse Demontage
56 Lösen die Befestigungsschrauben von den
Halteblechen der Richtungsschaltmagnete.
F Démontage de l’axe sélecteur avant-arrière:
dévisser les vis à tête cylindrique de fixation des
électrovannes.
I Estrarre quindi l’elettrovalvola e relativo anello di

tenuta O-Ring, il pistoncino e la molla di richia-
mo.
Ripetere l’operazione sul lato opposto.
GB Remove solenoid valve with O-Ring, spool and
spring.
Repeat the same procedure on the opposite side.
D Magnetventil mit O-Ringen, Kolben und Feder
herausziehen, dann das Gleiche auf der gegen-
57 überliegenden Seite wiederholen.
F Extraire les électrovannes et relative bague
d’étanchéite O-Ring et les deux petits pistons
avec relatif ressort.
I Estrarre i lamierini di ritegno.

GB Remove retaining plates.
D Anschlagblech herausnehmen.
F Extraire les tôles fines de retenue.
58
68
PST2
3
I Smontaggio asse selettrice 1a - 2a marcia:
Svitare le viti di ritegno del coperchio elettroval-
vola ed estrarre in sequenza: l’elettrovalvola, il
selettore e la molla.
GB Disassembly of solenoid valve for 1st - 2nd
gear: Unscrew the bolts of the 1st - 2nd sole-
noid valvelid. Extract in sequence: solenoid valve,
spool and spring.
D Schaltmagnetventil für den 1. Gang und 2.
Gang Achse Demontage: 59
Befestigungsschrauben von den ersten und zwei-
ten Gangmagneten lösen und Magneten, Kolben,
Federn und Einstellscheiben demontieren.
F Démontage axe sélecteur 1ere - 2eme vitesse:
dévisser les vis de retenue du couvercle électro-
vanne et sortir en suite: l’électrovanne, le sélec-
teur et le ressort.
I Smontaggio Asse Inching - Versione Comando

Meccanico:
Svitare le viti di fissaggio coperchio asse Inching.
GB Inching Axle Dismantling - Mechanical Drive

Version:
Undo screws securing cover on Inching axle.
D Ausbau Inching-Achse - Version mechanische

Schaltung:
Lösen die Befestigungsschrauben des Inchventil
und herausschrauben der gegenüberliegenden
Verschlüßschraube.
F Démontage de l’axe Inching - Version

Commande Mécanique:
Dévisser les vis de fixation du couvercle antérieur
de l’axe Inching. 60
I Sfilare i componenti asse Inching.

GB Remove Inching control components.
D Kolben und Feder herausnehmen.
F Enlever les components de l’axe Inching.
61
69
PST2
I Smontaggio asse valvola antishock e pres-

sione convertitore:
Svitare la vite di arresto dell’astuccio valvola
antishock.
GB Anti-shock valve and converter pressure valve
disassembly:
Unscrew the restraining screw of the anti-shock
valve casing.
D Antischockventil und Wandlerdruckventil
Achse Demontage:
Arretierschraube für das Antischockventil heraus-
schrauben.
F Démontage axe vanne antichoc et pression
convertisseur:
62 Dévisser le vis d’arrêt de la douille vanne anti-
choc.
I Estrarre l’astuccio valvola antishock e relativa

molla.
GB Extract the anti-shock valve casing with spring.
D Antischockventil und Feder herausziehen.
F Sortir la douille vanne antichoc et le ressort cor-
respondant.
63
I Agendo sul lato opposto, svitare il tappo filettato

ed estrarre il pistoncino valvola convertitore.
GB On the opposite side, unscrew the plug and
extract the converter valve piston.
D Auf der Gegenüberliegenden seite Verschluß-
Schraube herausschrauben und Kolben vom
Wandlerventil herausziehen.
F En travaillant sur l’autre cote, dévisser le bouchon
fileté et extraire le piston vanne convertisseur.
64
70
PST2
3
I Smontaggio asse valvola modulatrice e princi-
pale.
Svitare il tappo filettato d’estremità ed estrarre il
pistoncino valvola pressione pincipale unitamente
a spessori di regolazione e molla.
GB Modulating valve and main valve disassembly:

Unscrew plug and remove piston of main pres-
sure valve with adjusting shims and spring.
D Modulationsventil und Hauptdruck Achse 65

Demontage:
Verschluß-Schraube herausschrauben und
Kolben, Regulierscheiben und Feder für den
Hauptdruck herausziehen.
F Démontage de l’axe de la valve modulatrice et
de la valve principale.
Dévisser le bouchon d’extrémité fileté et extraire
le piston de la valve de pression principale, les
épaisseurs de réglage et le ressort.
I Svitare la vite di fermo dell’astuccio valvola

modulatrice.
GB Unscrew the retaining screw of the modulating
valve casing.
D Arretierschraube für das Modulationsventil
herausschrauben.
F Dévisser la vis de fermature de l’etui vanne modu-
lateur.
66
I Estrarre la valvola modulatrice completa.

• Pulire perfettamente tutti i particolari, verificarli,
sostituirli secondo necessità.
GB Extract the modulating valve complete.

• Clean components full, check and replace as
required.
D Modulationsventil herausziehen.
• Die Teile putzen, kontrollieren und nötigenfalls
ersetzen. 67
F Extraire la vanne modulateur complete.
• Nettoyer soigneusement tous les components,
les vérifier et substituer selon nécessité et les
remonter.
71
PST2
I Montaggio asse valvole modulatrice e pressio-

ne principale:
Inserire il bicchierino e l’astuccio modulatrice,
bloccare questo ultimo serrando la vite di ritegno
ad una coppia di 23 Nm, quindi inserire dal lato
opposto del distributore la molla e il pistoncino
valvola pressione principale con gli spessori di
regolazione ed infine avvitare il tappo filettato.
GB Modulating valve and main pressure valve

spool assembly:
68
Install the modulating valve complete. Snug the
restraining screw and tighten at torque of 23 Nm.
On the opposite side, insert piston, spring, main
pressure piston with adjusting shims, gasket and
plug. Lock the plug.
D Modulationsventil und Hauptdruck Achse
Montage:
Modulationsventil komplett einsetzen,
Fixierschraube einschrauben und mit einem
Drehmoment von 23 Nm anziehen. Auf der
gegenüberliegenden Seite Kolben, Feder, Kolben
für den Hauptdruck mit Einstellscheiben, Dichtung
und Verschluß-schraube montieren.
F Montage axe soupape modulateur et pression
principale:
Introduire le coup et la douille modulateur, blo-
quer ce dernier en serrant la vis de retenue à un
couple de 23 Nm, donc engager de l’autre cote
du distributeur le ressort et le piston soupape de
pression principale avec les cales de réglage et
enfin visser le bouchon fileté.
I Montaggio asse valvole antishock e pressione

convertitore:
Inserire l’astuccio valvola antishock e avvitare la
vite di fermo assiale (coppia di serraggio 23 Nm)
avendo cura di far coincidere il perno della vite
con la sede esistente sull’astuccio.
GB Antishock valve and converter pressure valve
spool assembly:
Insert the antishock valve complete. Tighten the
retaining screw with torque of 23 Nm.
69
D Antischockventil und Wandlerdruckventil
Achse Montage:
Antischockventil komplett einsetzen.
Fixierschraube einschrauben und mit einem
Drehmoment von 23 Nm anziehen.
F Montage axe antichoc et pression convertis-
seur:
Insérer l’étui des vannes antichoc et visser la vis
de fermeture axiale en ayant soin de faire coïn-
cider le pivot de la vis avec le siège esistant sur
l’étui (couple de serrage = 23 Nm).
72
PST2
3
I Operando sul lato opposto del distributore, intro-
durre la molla, il pistoncino convertitore completo
di distanziali di regolazione e serrare il tappo di
estremità.
GB On the opposite side, install the spring, the piston
with shims for converter pressure, gasket and
plug. Lock the plug.
D Auf der gegenüberliegenden Seite Feder, Kolben
für den Wandlerdruck mit Distanzscheiben,
Dichtung und Verschlußschraube montieren.
70
F En travaillant sur l’autre cote du distributeur, intro-
duire le ressort, le piston convertisseur complet
d’entretoises de réglage et serrer le bouchon
d’extrémité.
I Montaggio asse Inching - Versione Comando

Meccanico:
• Montare i componenti come indicato in figura.
GB Assembly of Inching control valve spool -
Mechanical Drive Version:
• Assemble components as shown in figure.
D Inchkolben Montage - Version mechanische

Schaltung:
• Die Zinzelteile wie in der Abbildung montieren. 71
F Montage de l’axe Inching - Version Commande
Mécanique:
• Monter les pièces comme indiqué sur la figure.
I Serrare le viti di fissaggio del coperchietto alla

coppia di serraggio 3 Nm.
GB Tighten the fixing screw of the stop cover with 3
Nm torque.
D Befestigungsschrauben vom Haltedeckel mit
F Serrer les vis de fixation du petit couvercle à un
couple de serrage de 3 Nm.
72
73
PST2
I Montaggio valvola selettrice 1a - 2a marcia:

Infilare nella sede la molla, il selettore e l’elet-
trovalvola con anello O-Ring esterno. Montare il
coperchietto di ritegno dell’elettrovalvola e serra-
re le viti con coppia 3 Nm.
GB Assembling of solenoid valve for the 1st and
2nd gear:
Install the spring, the selector spool, solenoid
valve with outer O-Ring, lid and the holding
screws. Tighten the screws at 3 Nm torque..
73 D Magnetventil für ersten und zweiten Gang
Achse Montage:
Feder, Kolben, Magnetventil mit O-Ringen,
Haltedeckel und Schrauben einsetzen. Schrauben
mit einem Drehmoment von 3 Nm anziehen.
F Montage de la vanne de sélection 1ère – 2ème
vitesse:
Insérer le ressort dans son siège, le sélecteur
et l’électrovanne avec un joint torique externe.
Monter le couvercle de retenue de l’électrovanne
et serrer les vis au couple 3 Nm.
I Montaggio selettrice avanti-indietro:

Posizionare i lamierini di ritegno assicurandosi del
corretto inserimento nella loro sede.
GB Assembling solenoid valve for forward and

reverse gear:
Set the retaining metal plates in place, making
sure about correct position.
D Magnetventils für Vorwärts- und

Rückwärtsgang Achse Montage:
Anschlagblech einsetzen, korrekte Sitz und Platz
prüfen.
F Remontage sélectrice avant-arrière:

74 Insérer les tôles fines de retenue.
I Infilare la molla, i due selettori, le elettrovalvole

con relativi O-Ring; montare i coperchietti di rite-
gno e serrare le viti ad una coppia di 3 Nm.
GB Insert the spring, the two pistons, the solenoid
valves with O-Rings; assemble the stop covers
and lock the screw with 3 Nm torque.
D Feder, die zwei Kolben und die zwei Magnetventile
mit den O-Ringen einsetzen. Haltebleche montie-
ren und Schrauben mit einem Drehmoment von 3
75 Nm anziehen.
F Enfiler le ressort, les valves, donc les électrovan-
nes avec les joints relatifs (opportunément lufri-
fiés) et les petits couvercle. Bloquere les vis de
fixation des petits couvercles de électrovannes à
un couple de serrage de 3 Nm.
74
PST2
3
I Smontaggio/Rimontaggio Asse Inching
Versione Comando Idraulico:
Svitare il bocchettone dal distributore e il boc-
chettone dal corpo Inching, rimuovere rosette di
tenuta e tubo.
GB Inching Axle Dismantling/Reassembling

Hydraulic Inching Version:
Unscrew connector from distributor and connec-
tor from Inching body, remove rubber seals and
pipe.
76a 76b
D Ausbau/Einbau Inching-Achse - Version
hydraulische Schaltung:
Den Stutzen vom Verteiler und den Stutzen vom
Inching-Körper abschrauben, Dichtringe und
Leitung abnehmen.
F Démontage/Rémontage Axe Inching - Versión

Commande Hydraulique:
Dévisser le raccord du distributeur et le raccord
du corps Inching, enlever joints et tuyau.
I Svitare le quattro viti di fissaggio corpo Inching al

distributore.
GB Undo the four fixing screws of Inching body to
distributor.
D Undo the four fixing screws of Inching body to
distributor.
F Dévisser les quatre vis de fixation corps Inching
au distributeur.
77
I Sfilare i componenti asse Inching.

• Pulire perfettamente tutti i particolari, verificarli
e sostituirli secondo necessità.
GB Remove components of Inching axle.

• Clean full each component, check them, replace
if required.
D Die Bauteile der Inching-Achse herausziehen.

• Alle Bestandteile sorgfältig reinigen, prüfen, bei
Bedarf ersetzen. 78
F Enlever les composants de l’axe Inching.
• Nettoyer soigneusement tout les composants,
vérifier et, si nécessaire, remplacer.
75
PST2
I IMPORTANTE: Il comando Inching idraulico

79 non è revisionabile, in caso di usura o malfun-
zionamento, sostituire.
GB IMPORTANT: The inching control assy is not
repairable. In case of wear or malfunction a
new assy must be ﬁtted.
D HAUPTSACHE: Der Inching-Hydraulik-Befehl
kann nicht instandgesetzt werden: beim
Verschleiss oder Störung austauschen
F IMPORTANT: La commande Inching hydrau-
lique ne peut pas être inspectée, en cas
d’usure ou de mauvais fonctionnement, la
remplacer.
I Rimontaggio Asse Inching - Versione

Comando Idraulico:
In caso di smontaggio, rimontare il tappo con la
relativa rosetta di tenuta sul lato opposto e serra-
re alla coppia di 58 ÷ 64 Nm.
• Montare i componenti Asse Inching come indi-
cato.
GB Inching Axle reassembling - Hydraulic Drive

Version:
In case of dismantly, reassemble plug with rel-
80a evant rubber seal on the opposite side and lock
with a torque of 58 ÷ 64 Nm.
• Insert components of Inching Axle as indicated.
D Einbau Inching-Achse - Version hydraulische

Steuerung:
Wenn die Demontage eintreten sollte, den
Verschluß mit entsprechenden Dichtring wieder
montieren und mit einem Drehmoment von 58 ÷
64 Nm anziehen.
• Die Bestandteile der Inching-Achse wie gezeigt
zusammensetzen.
80b F Rémontage Axe Inching - Version Commande
Hydraulique:
En cas de démontage, remonter le bouchon en
se servant de le joint correspondant et serrer au
couple de 58 ÷ 64 Nm.
• Insérer les composants de l’Axe Inching.
76
PST2
3
I Umettare le quattro viti con Loctite 242 e bloc-
care alla coppia di 0,5 daNm il corpo Inching al
distributore.
GB Smear the four screws with Loctite 242 and lock
Inching body to distributor with a torque of 0.5
daNm.
D Die vier Schrauben mit Loctite 242 benetzen
und mit einem Drehmoment von 0,5 daNm den
Inching-Körper am Verteiler festziehen.
F Humecter les quatre vis par Loctite 242 et blo- 81
quer au couple de 0,5 daNm le corps Inching au
distributeur.
I Avvitare i bocchettoni con tubo e relative rosette

di tenuta al distributore e al corpo Inching.
GB Screw in the connectors with pipe and relevant
rubber seals to distributor and Inching body.
D Die Anschlusstutzen mit dem Rohr und der ent-
sprechenden Dichtung-Unterlegscheibe an dem
Verteiler und komplett Inching zusammenschrau-
ben.
F Visser les raccords avec tuyau et joints corress-
pondantes au distributeur et au corps Inching. 82
77
PST2
Smontaggio e Rimontaggio valvola antishock 2a marcia (a secondo della versione)

2nd speed Anti-shock valve disassembly and Assembly (according to various configuration)
I Smontaggio valvola antishock 2a marcia:

83 d
• Svitare la vite di arresto (a) ed estrarre l’astuccio
valvola antishock (b). Agendo sul lato opposto,
c b svitare il tappo filettato (c).
• Pulire perfettamente tutti i particolari, verificarli,
sostituirli secondo necessità.
Rimontaggio:
• In caso di smontaggio, rimontare i tappi (d) con
la relativa rosetta di tenuta e serrare alla coppia di
a 16 ÷ 20 Nm.
• Inserire l’astuccio valvola antishock (b) e avvita-
re la vite di fermo assiale (a) completa di rosetta
di tenuta, avendo cura di far coincidere il perno
della vite con la sede esistente sull’astuccio.
• Avvitare sul lato opposto della valvola, il tappo
(c) completo di guarnizione alla coppia di serrag-
gio di 130 ÷ 135 Nm.
GB 2nd speed Anti-shock valve disassembly:

• Unscrew the retaining screw (a) end extract the
anti-shock valve casing (b). On the opposite side,
unscrew the plug (c).
• Clean all components, check and replace as
required.
Assembly:
• If dismantled, reassemble plugs (d) with relevant
rubber seal and lock with a torque of 16 ÷ 20 Nm.
• Insert the antishock valve complete (b). Set the
retaining screw (a).
• On the opposite side, insert gasket and plug (c).
Lock the plug 130 ÷ 135 Nm.
78
PST2
Antischockventil 2. Gang Demontage und Montage (je nach Version):

Demontage et Remontage Vanne antichoc 2ème marche (selon la version) 3
D Ausbau Antischockventil 2. Gang:
d 83
• Arretierschraube (a) lösen und die Hülse des
Antischockventils (b) herausziehen.
• Gewindeverschluss (c) an der gegenüberliegen- c b
den Seite lösen.
• Sämtliche Einzelteile reinigen, überprüfen und
bei Bedarf ersetzen.
Wiedereinbau:
• Wenn abmontiert, sind die Hülsen (d) mit dem
dazugehörigen Dichtungsring wieder einzusetzen a
und mit einem Drehmoment zwischen 16 ÷ 20
Nm anzuziehen.
• Die Hülse des Antischockventils (b) einset-
zen und die Achs-Feststellschraube (a) mit
Dichtungsring aufschrauben; dabei darauf achten,
dass der Schraubenstift mit dem vorhandenen
Sitz an der Hülse übereinstimmt.
• Auf der dem Ventil gegenüberliegenden Seite
den Verschluss (c) mit Dichtung mit einem
Anzugsdrehmoment von 130 ÷ 135 Nm anziehen.
F Demontage Vanne antichoc 2ème marche:
• Dévisser la vis de retenue (a) et retirer la gaine
de la vanne antichoc (b).
• En appuyant sur le côté opposé, dévisser le
bouchon fileté (c).
• Nettoyer avec soin tous les détails, les contrôler
et éventuellement les remplacer si nécessaire.
Remontage:
• En cas de démontage, remonter tous les cou-
vercles (d) ainsi que leur propre joint d’étanchéité
et serrer au couple 16 ÷ 20 Nm.
• Insérer la gaine de la vanne antichoc (b) et
remettre la vis de retenue axiale (a) ainsi que son
joint, faire attention que le pivot de la vis coïncide
bien avec le siège présent sur la gaine.
• Visser le couvercle (c) ainsi que son joint sur le
côté opposé de la vanne et serrer au couple 130
÷ 135 Nm.
79
PST2
Rimontaggio frizioni
Clutches re-assembly
ATTENZIONE
Kupplungsmontage
Remontage embrayages Impiegare gli utensili adatti.
NON USARE MAI DITA O MANI
o attrezzi non idonei
WARNING
Use the proper tools.
84a NEVER USE FINGERS OR HANDS
or incorrect tools
ACHTUNG
4A41377 Schwere Teile nur mit geeignetem Hebe-und
Transportwerkzeug transportieren.
Vorsicht auf Hände und Finger
ATTENTION
Utiliser les outils appropriés.
NE JAMAIS UTILISER DE DOIGTS OU MAINS
ou d’outils pas appropriés
I Mediante l’apposito attrezzo (dis. 4A41377), com-

primere la molla di reazione ed inserire l’anello
elastico (foto 84b) di ritegno molla nella sede
sull’albero.
GB By using the specific tool (dwg. 4A41377), com-
press the reaction spring and insert the lock ring
(photo 84b) retaining spring into the seat on shaft.
D Mit Spezialwerkzeug (Zng. 4A41377) Feder nie-
derdrücken und Sicherungsring sichern (Bild
84b).
F Par opportun outil (4A41377) comprimer le res-
sort de réaction et insérer le segment de retenue
84b du ressort au siège sur l’arbre (photo 84b).
I Montare i sei dischi frizione e i sei controdischi in

acciaio in modo alternato, avendo cura di posi-
zionare a contatto dello stantuffo un controdisco
in acciaio.
GB Assemble the six clutch disks and the six steel
disks alternately, taking care to place a steel disk
in contact with the piston.
D Sechs Außen- und Sechs Innenlamellen einlegen;
darauf achten, daß zuerst eine Stahlaußenlamelle
85 zum Kolben eingelegt wird.
F Monter les plaques d’embrayage et les six con-
tre-plaques en acier de manière alternée, tout en
prenant soin de placer une contre-plaque en acier
contre le piston.
80
PST2
3
I Posizionare come da foto 86a il disco di reazione
completo di anello elastico, successivamente
premere sull' anello in modo che vada a inserirsi
nella propria sede, foto 86b e 86c.
! Avvertenza: controllare (attraverso le asole o fori)

che nel pacco frizioni vi sia un gioco totale da
2,50 a 3,25 mm. e verificarlo in tre punti equidi-
stanti a 120° (come da figura 86d).
GB Fit the circlip on the reaction plate, then insert the

assy as shown in photo 86a, then press on the 86a
circlip in order to fit it in its seat, photo 86b and
86c.
! Note: check for the correct free end play of the

clutch pack (through the slots or the holes), which
is 2.50 to 3.25 mm. and verify it in three points,
every 120° (as figure 86d)
D Die Reaktionsscheibe mit dem Sprengring wie im

Bild 86a stellen, dann auf den Ring drücken um
ihn in seinem Sitz zu stecken. Bild 86b und 86c.
! Hinweis: Kolntrolliere (durch den Schlitz oder die
Bohrung) Spiel des Lamellenpaketes von 2,50 86b
bis 3,25 mm. kontrollieren und an drei abstands-
gleichen Punkten von 120° messen (wie in
Abbildung 86d).
F Placer, comme la photo 86a le montre, le disque

de réaction complet de bague de retenue; par la
suite, pousser sur la bague de maniere qu’elle se
place dans son propre siège, photo 86b et 86c.
! Attention: contrôler (à travers les lumières ou les

trous) que la boîte d’embrayage ait un jeu maxi-
mum de 2,50 à 3,25 mm., et ce, en contrôlant en
trois points se trouvant tous à une distance de
120° (voir figure 86d). 86c
2.50 ÷ 3.25 2.50 ÷ 3.25
86d
81
PST2
I Inserire la ralla e controralla di spallamento ingra-

naggio folle, avendo cura di posizionare per
seconda quella in materiale sintetico.
GB Insert steel thrust washer and synthetic thrust
washer at the back of idle gear. Beware that the
synthetic thrust washer faces idle gear.
D Stahl- und Kunststoffring einlegen (Kunststoffring
zum Zahnrad).
F Insérer la rondelle et la contre rondelle de butée
de l’engrenage du point mort, et ce, en ayant soin
de placer en deuxième position celle en matériel
synthétique.
87
I Infilare l’ingranaggio conduttore nel pacco frizioni

centrando con cura lo scanalato dei dischi frizio-
ne.
Assicurarsi che l’ingranaggio sia in battuta sulla
ralla.
GB Insert the drive gear in the clutch pack,meshing
with care in the grooving of the disks.
Make sure that gear is in contact with the thrust
washer.
D Zahnrad vorsichtig in die Innenverzahnung der
Lamellen montieren.
Zahnrad sichern durch die Anlaufscheibe.
F Placer l ́ e ngrenage conducteur dans la boîte
d’embrayage en ayant soin de centrer le rainu-
rage des plaques d’embrayage.
88 Vérifier que l’engrenage touche la rondelle de
butée.
I Infilare sull’albero le due gabbie a rulli.

GB Insert on the shaft the two roller cages.
D Zwei Nadelhülsen einsetzen.
F Placer les deux cages à rouleaux sur l’arbre.
89
82
PST2
3
I Montare la ralla di spallamento, acciaio più mate-
riale sintetico in modo che quest’ultimo sia a
contatto con l’ingranaggio.
GB Place the synthetic and steel thrust rings, with
synthetic material in contact with gear.
D Kunststoff- und Stahlring einlegen (Kunststoffring
zum Zahnrad).
F Monter les rondelles de butée en acier et en
matériel synthétique de manière à ce que cette
dernière soit en contact avec l’engrenage.
90
I Piantare l’anello interno del cuscinetto a rulli cilin-

drici.
Verificare il gioco tra ingranaggio e ralla (vedi figu-

ra 92).
GB Fit the cylindric roller bearing inner ring.

Verify clereance between gear and thrust washer
(see fig. 92).
D Innenring vom Zylinderrollenlager montieren.

Das Spiel zwischen Zahnrad und Paßstück prüfen
(siehe Abb. 92).
F Planter la bague intérieure du roulement.
Vérifier le jeu entre engrenage et rapaudine (voir
figure 92).
91
0.20 ÷ 0.54
92
83
PST2
I Per la frizione contrapposta ripetere le operazioni

dal punto 84 al punto 89, quindi montare la ralla,
il distanziale e la ralla di spallamento, acciaio più
materiale sintetico, in modo che quest’ultimo sia
a contatto con l’ingranaggio. Piantare l’anello
interno del cuscinetto a rulli cilindrici e verificare il
gioco tra ingranaggio e ralla (vedi figura 94).
Montare gli anelli di tenuta idraulica nelle loro
sedi (a).
! Nota: dopo l’installazione degli anelli (a), occorre
spalmarli di grasso in modo da poterli centrare e
fermare in sede durante l’inserimento degli alberi
evitando avarie e danneggiamenti.
Ripetere tutte queste operazioni per l’albero
marcia avanti.
GB For the opposite clutch, repeat operation of steps
84 to 89, then install thrust washer, spacer and
93 steel/synthetic material thrust washer, with syn-
thetic material washer in contact with gear. Fit
the inner roller bearing cage and verify clereance
between gear and thrust washer (see fig. 94).
Install the seal rings into their seats (a).
a
! Note: smear cast rings (a) with grease, after
installation, to keep them centered and steady in
relevant seat when shafts are inserted, so to pre-
0.20 ÷ 0.54
vent failures or damages.
Proceed in the same way for the forward gear
train.
D Beachte bei der Montage der Druckscheibe,
der Abstandscheibe und der Druckscheibe, daß
Positionen 84 und 89 (syntetische Scheibenseite)
am Zahnrad anliegen.
Das Spiel zwischen Zahnrad und Paßstück prüfen
(siehe Abb. 94).
! Anmerkung: Kolbenring (a) mit Fett einschmie-
ren und in die vorgesehene Nut einführen.
Dabei ist auf ordnungsgemässen Sitzt zu achten.
Vorwärtsgangwelle ist wie die
Rückwärtsgangwelle zu montieren.
F Pour l’embrayage opposé, répéter les opérations
a du point 84 au point 89, puis monter la rondelle,
l’entretoise et la rondelle de butée, en acier et en
matériel synthétique, de manière à ce que cette
dernière soit en contact avec l’engrenage. Placer
le joint interne du roulement à billes cylindriques
et contrôler le jeu entre l’engrenage et la rondelle
de butée (voir figure 94).
Monter les bagues d’étanchéité hydraulique dans
leurs sièges respectifs (a).
! Remarque: une fois les bagues (a) installées, il

est nécessaire d’étaler de la graisse de manière à
pouvoir les centrer et les bloquer dans leur siège
durant le positionnement des arbres. Le but est
d’éviter d’éventuels problèmes ou endommage-
94 ments du matériel.
Répéter toutes ces opérations pour l’arbre
marche avant.
84
PST2
3
Rimontaggio trasmissione
Transmission re-assembling
Getriebe Montage
Remontage de la transmission
I L’albero di uscita può essere smontato e rimonta-

to così come indicato in figura.
GB Assembly the output shaft.
D Abtriebswelle montieren.
F L ́arbre de sortie peut être démonté ou remonté
comme indiqué sur la figure.
95
I Inserire l’albero di uscita completo di ingranaggio

1a velocità, distanziali e anello interno del cusci-
netto a rulli nella sua sede sul carter inversore.
GB Insert the output shaft with 1st gear, spacers and
inner race of the roller bearing in the main hous-
ing.
D Abtriebswelle mit Distanzring, Zahnrad und
Lagerinnenring ins Gehäuse einsetzen.
F Placer l ́arbre de sortie avec l’engrenage 1ère
vitesse, l’entretoise et la bague interne de roule-
ment à billes dans son propre siège sur le carter
de l’inverseur.
96
I Inserire quindi l’albero marcia avanti completo.

GB Insert the complete forward clutch shaft.
D Vorwärtsgangkupplung komplett einsetzen.
F Placer l’arbre marche avant complet
97
85 85
PST2
I Per ultimo viene inserito lʼalbero frizione marcia

98 indietro completo.
ATTENZIONE: Durante l’inserimento degli
alberi frizione sul carter inversore, occorre
prestare particolare cura per non danneggiare
gli anelli di tenuta idraulica (a).
GB Last insert the assembled reverse clutch shaft.

WARNING: Take great care not to damage
the cast iron seal rings. (a).
D Rückwärtsgangkupplung komplett einsetzen.
ACHTUNG: Darauf achten, daß beim Einbau

die Kolbendichtringe (a) nicht beschädigt wer-
a den.
F Enfin, placer l’arbre de l’embrayage marche arriè-

re complet.
ATTENTION: Durant le placement de l’ar-

bre de l’embrayage sur le carter de l’inver-
98a seur, faire attention à ne pas endommager les
bagues d’étanchéité hydraulique (a).
I Montare sull’albero d’uscita l’ingranaggio con-

dotto della 2a velocità e quindi piantare l’anello
interno del cuscinetto a rulli cilindrici.
GB Assemble the 2nd speed driven gear and cylindri-
cal roller bearing inner race on the output shaft.
D Zahnrad vom Zweitengang und den Innenring
vom Zylinderrollenlager auf die Abtriebswelle mon-
tieren.
F Monter sur l’arbre de sortie l’engrenage conduit
99 de la deuxième vitesse, puis placer la bague
interne du roulement à billes cylindriques.
I Posizionare sulla scatola inversore la guarnizione

100 dopo aver pulito accuratamente le superfici di
unione.
GB Position the gasket on the main housing, after
careful cleaning of the surfaces.
D Dichtfläche vorsichtig reinigen, Dichtung anbrin-
gen.
F Placer le joint sur le boîtier après avoir nettoyé
avec soin les superficies en contact
86
PST2
3
I Montare la paratia.
101
GB Install the baffle plate.
D Umlenkblech montieren.
F Monter la cloison.
I Montare il coperchio facendo attenzione a non

danneggiare l’anello di tenuta idraulica (figura 102
102a) sistemata sull’albero frizioni marcia indietro.
La corretta posizione di montaggio è garantita da
spine cilindriche di riferimento.
GB Assemble the cover taking care not to damage
the piston seal ring (figure 102a) on the reverse
clutch shaft. Proper assembly position is ensured
by dowel pins.
D Deckel vorsichtig montieren, so daß die
Kolbendichtringe auf der Welle nicht beschädigt
werden (Bild 102a).
F Monter le couvercle en prenant soin de ne pas 102a
endommager la bague d’étanchéité hydraulique
(figure 102a) placée sur l’arbre de l’embrayage
marche arrière. La bonne position de montage
est garantie par les goupilles cylindriques de réfé-
rence
I Spalmare le viti di unione fra scatola e coperchio

con frenafiletti medio quindi avvitare e serrare alla
coppia di 65 Nm.
GB Apply a medium grade Loctite to screws fasten-
ing case and cover. Tighten to the torque of 65
Nm
D Befestigungsschrauben mit Loctite medium ein-
setzen und mit einem Drehmoment von 65 Nm
festziehen.
F Etaler du frein-filet moyen sur les vis d’union entre
103
le boîtier et le couvercle, puis serrer au couple 65
Nm.
87
PST2
Rimontaggio gruppo Presa di Forza

Power take-off unit re-assembly
Einbau Nebenabtrieb
Rémontage du groupe Prise de force
I Dopo aver pulito le superfici e posizionato la

104 guarnizione, montare il carter Presa di Forza sul
coperchio inversore.
GB Clean the mating surfaces, lay the gasket and
install the P.T.O. carter on the P.T.O. carter.
D Dichtungsfläche reinigen Dichtung anbringen und
Nebenabtriebsgehäuse an dem Gehäuse-deckel
aufsetzen.
F Après avoir nettoyé les superficies et placé le
joint, monter le carter de la Prise de Mouvement
sur le couvercle de l’inverseur.
I Applicare alle viti di unione, fra coperchio e carter

105 Presa di Forza, frenafiletti medio.
• Avvitare e bloccare le viti con chiave dinamo-
metrica alla coppia di 65 Nm.
GB Apply a medium grade Loctite to screws faste-
ning cover and P.T.O. case
• Fit screws tighten at torque of 65 Nm.
D Befestigungsschrauben mit Loctite medium einset-
zen.
• Befesstigungsschrauben mit einem Drehmoment
von 65 Nm anziehen.
F Appliquer du frein-filet moyen entre le couvercle
et le carter de la Prise de Mouvement.
• Visser et bloquer les vis à l’aide d’une clé
dynamométrique au couple 65 Nm.
I Infilare la flangia presa movimento nello scanala-

106 to dell’albero di uscita previo ingrassaggio delle
parti.
GB Lubricate the splines with grease and insert the
output flange in the output shaft.
D Keilversahnung am Abtriebsflansch in die
Abtriebswelle schieben.
F Insérer le flasque de prise de mouvement dans le
rainurage de l’arbre de sortie, et ce, après avoir
graissé les parties concernées.
88
PST2
3
I Piantare l’anello di tenuta sul coperchio Presa di
Forza.
GB Assemble the seal in the P.T.O. housing.
D Wellendichtring in Nebenabtriebsdeckel montieren.
F Placer la bague d’étanchéité sur le couvercle
Prise de Mouvement.
107
Rimontaggio coperchio Presa di Forza - versione “A”

Re-assembling of Power take-off cover - version “A”
Nebenantriebsdeckelmontage Version “A”
Rémontage couvercle prise de force - version “A”
I Montare l’albero conduttore della Presa di Forza,

completo di cuscinetto a sfere, sul coperchio.
GB Insert the P.T.O. drive shaft, complete with ball
bearing.
D Antriebswelle vom Nebenabtrieb einsetzen.
F Placer la bague d’étanchéité sur le couvercle
Prise de Mouvement.
108
I Inserire l’anello elastico di fermo assiale ingranag-

gio sull’albero conduttore.
GB Insert the snap-ring for gear on drive shaft.
D Sicherungsring montieren.
F Insérer la bague d’étanchéité d’arrêt axial engre-
nage sur l’arbre conducteur.
109
89
PST2
I Posizionare il coperchio di ritegno, applicare fre-

nafiletti medio alle viti di fissaggio e serrare con
coppia di 3 Nm.
GB Set the stop cover, apply medium Loctite to the
fixing screws and tighten with 3 Nm.
D Lagerhalteblech montieren. Befestigungs-schrau-
ben mit Loctite medium einsetzen und mit einem
F Placer le couvercle de retenue, appliquer du frein-
110 filet moyen sur les vis de fixation et serrer au cou-
ple 3 Nm.
I Infilare simultaneamente la catena, l’ingranaggio

conduttore e l’ingranaggio condotto completo di
albero e cuscinetto a sfere.
GB Insert drive gear, driven gear with P.T.O. output
shaft, ball bearing and chain together.
D Antriebszahnrad getriebenes Zahnrad mit
Nebenabtriebswelle, Kugelrollenlager und Kette
zusammen montieren.
F Insérer, simultanément, la chaîne, l’engrenage
111 conducteur et l’engrenage conduit avec l’arbre et
le roulement à billes.
I Inserire l’anello elastico di ritegno ingranaggio

conduttore.
GB Insert the snap-ring for drive gear.
D Sicherungsring anbringen.
F Insérer la bague élastique de retenue de l’engre-
nage conducteur.
112
I Montare nella sua sede l’anello di tenuta idraulica

in ghisa.
GB Assemble the cast iron piston seal ring.
D Kolbendichtring montieren.
F Monter la bague d’étanchéité hydraulique en
fonte dans son siège.
113
90
PST2
3
Rimontaggio coperchio Presa di Forza - versione “B”
Re-assembling of Power take-off cover - version “B”
Nebenantriebsdeckelmontage Version “B”
Rémontage couvercle prise de force - version “B”
I Montare l’albero conduttore della Presa di Forza,

completo di cuscinetto a sfere, sul coperchio 114a
Presa di Forza.
• Posizionare il coperchio di ritegno, applicare
frenafiletti medio alle viti di fissaggio e serrare
con coppia di 3 Nm.
• Infilare simultaneamente la catena, l’ingranag-
gio conduttore e l’ingranaggio condotto completo
di albero e cuscinetto a sfere.
GB Insert on P.T.O. cover the P.T.O. drive shaft,
complete with ball bearing.
• Set the stop cover, apply medium Loctite to
thefixing screws and tighten with 3 Nm.
• Insert drive gear, driven gear with P.T.O. out-
putshaft, ball bearing and chain together. 114b
D Die mit dem Kugellager versehene
Nebenantriebswelle auf dem Nebenantriebsdeckel
einsetzen.
• Lagerhalteblech montieren. Befestigungs-
schrauben mit Loctite medium einsetzen und mit
• Antriebszahnrad getriebenes Zahnrad mit
Nebenabtriebswelle, Kugelrollenlager und Kette
zusammen montieren.
F Monter l ́ a rbre conducteur de la Prise de
Mouvement, complet de roulement à billes, sur le
couvercle de Prise de Mouvement.
• Placer le couvercle de retenue, appliquer du
frein-filet moyen sur les vis de fixation et serrer au
couple 3 Nm.
• Insérer, simultanément, la chaîne, l’engrenage
conducteur et l’engrenage conduit avec l’arbre et
le roulement à billes.
I Inserire l’anello elastico di ritegno ingranaggio

conduttore. 115
• Montare nella sua sede l’anello di tenuta idrauli-
ca in ghisa.
GB Insert the snap-ring for drive gear.
• Insert the cast iron piston seal ring.
D Sicherungsring anbringen.
• Kolbendichtring montieren.
F Insérer la bague élastique de retenue de l’engre-
nage conducteur.
• Monter la bague d’étanchéité hydraulique en
fonte dans son siège.
91
PST2

116 guarnizione, montare il coperchio Presa di Forza
completo di carter, curando di non danneggiare
nell’imbocco l’anello di tenuta idraulica e facendo
coincidere i due dentini dell’albero conduttore
con le sedi presenti sull’ingranaggio della pompa
per il trascinamento della stessa.
GB Clean the union surfaces and position the gasket.
Assemble the P.T.O. cover to the case taking care
not to damage the seal ring and making sure that
the pegs on the drive shaft coincide correctly with
drive pump gear.
Versione con P.d.F. Version mit Nebenabtrieb
Version with P.T.O. Version avec Prise de Force
D Dichtfläche reinigen und Dichtung montieren.
Neben-abtriebsdeckel komplett vorsichtig auf
das Neben-abtriebsgehäuse schieben damit die
Abdichtringe nicht beschädigt werden. Sicher stel-
len daß die Verzahnung von der Abtriebswelle in die
Nut des Pumpenantriebs-zahnrades korrekt greift.
F Après avoir nettoyé les superficies et placé
le joint, monter le couvercle de la Prise de
Mouvement avec le carter. Prendre soin de ne
pas endommager la bague d’étanchéité présente
dans l’embouchure et de faire coïncider les deux
dents de l’arbre conducteur avec les sièges pré-
sents sur l’engrenage de la pompe pour l’entraî-
nement de celle-ci.

guarnizione, montare il carter convertitore.
GB Clean throughly the mating surfaces, fit the gas-
ket and mount the converter bell housing.
D Oberfläche reinigen, Dichtring einsetzen und
Schwungrad-Wandlergehäuse montieren.
F Après avoir nettoyé et placé le joint, monter le
carter du convertisseu
117
Versione senza P.d.F. Version ohne Nebenabtrieb
Version without P.T.O. Version sans Prise de Force
I Applicare frenafiletti medio alle viti di unione, fra

carter convertitore e scatola inversore.
• Avvitare e bloccare le viti con chiave dinamo-
metrica alla coppia di 65 Nm.
GB Apply medium grade Loctite to the mounting bolts,
between converter cover and main housing.
• Tighten screws to a torque of 65 Nm.
D Schrauben zur Befestigung der Gehäuse mit
Loctite sichern.
118 - Befestigungsschrauben mit einem Drehmoment
von 65 Nm anziehen.
Versione senza P.d.F. Version ohne Nebenabtrieb F Appliquer du frein-filet moyen sur les vis d’union
Version without P.T.O. Version sans Prise de Force
entre le carter du convertisseur et le boîtier de
l’inverseur.
• Visser et bloquer les vis à l’aide d’une clé dyna-
mométrique au couple 65 Nm.
92
PST2
3
I Applicare frenafiletti medio sulle viti di unione fra
coperchio Presa di Forza e carter.
• Avvitare e serrare le viti alla coppia di 65 Nm.
GB Insert the fastening screws with Medium Loctite.
• Lock the screws with 65 Nm torque.
D Befestigungsschrauben mit Loctite Medium ein-
setzen.
• Befestigungsschrauben mit einem Drehmoment
von 65 Nm anziehen.
119
F Appliquer du frein-filet sur les vis d’union entre le
couvercle Prise de Mouvement et le carter. Versione con P.d.F. Version mit Nebenabtrieb
• Visser et serrer les vis au couple 65 Nm. Version with P.T.O. Version avec Prise de Force
I Rimontare il filtro olio di linea chiudendo a mano.

120
GB Reassemble the line oil filter, hand tighten.
D Feinfilter montieren.
F Remonter le filtre de l’huile de la ligne en serrant
manuellement.
I Applicare la guarnizione fra scatola inversore e

piastra distributore, quindi, posizionare la stessa.
GB Place the gasket between the main housing and
the distributor adaptor plate.
D Dichtung zwischen Ölverteilerplatte und Gehäuse
legen, Ölverteilerplatte auflegen.
F Placer le joint entre le boîtier de l’inverseur et la
plaque du distributeur, puis, placer cette dernière.
121
I Serrare le quattro viti di fissaggio della piastra

con una coppia di 20 Nm.
GB Lock the four screws with 20 Nm torque.
D Vi e r B e f e s t i g u n g s s c h r a u b e n m i t e i n e m
F Serrer les quatre vis de fixation de la plaque au
couple 20 Nm.
122
93
PST2
I Montare quindi il distributore completo.

123 123a • Serrare accuratamente le viti di fissaggio del
distributore alla coppia di 20 Nm.
GB Assembly control valve complete.
• Carefully tighten the fixing screws of distributor
with 20 Nm torque.
D Steuerblock komplett montieren.
• Befestigungsschrauben vorsichtig mit einem
F Ensuite monter le distributeur ainsi complété.
• Prendre soin de bien serrer les vis de fixation du
distributeur au couple 20 Nm.
I Nel caso di smontaggio del convertitore dal piat-

to di trascinamento, in fase di rimontaggio spal-
mare Loctite 270 e avvitare le viti di unione piatto
di trascinamento al convertitore, chiudendo alla
coppia di 49 ± 5% Nm.
GB In case of dismantling of converter from drive
plate, at re-assembling, smear Loctite 270 and
tighten converter drive plate with a torque of 49 ±
5% Nm.
D Nach der Wandlersdemontage aus der
124 Führungsplatte, im Wiederzusammensetzungs
gang Schrauben an der Antriebsmembrane mit
Loctite 270 einsetzen und anziehen mit einem
Drehmoment von 49 ± 5% Nm.
F En cas de démontage du convertisseur du disque
d’entraînement, durant la phase de remontage,
étaler du Loctite 270 et visser les vis d’union de la
plaque d’entraînement et du convertisseur en les
serrant au couple 49 ± 5% Nm.
I Inserire a fondo il convertitore sull’albero di entra-

ta della trasmissione. Assicurarsi che il converti-
tore sia collocato adeguatamente, oltre la guarni-
zione a labbro.
GB Insert the converter on the transmission input
shaft. Beware that the converter is properly locat-
ed, care it is taken when fitting over lip seal.
D Drehmomentwandler auf Antriebswelle und
Leitradträger schieben.
125 F Insérer le convertisseur à fond sur l’arbre d’entrée
de la transmission. Vérifier que le convertisseur
ait été placé correctement, c’est-à-dire après le
joint à lèvres.
94
PST2
3
I Assicurarsi che il convertitore sia in presa con
l’ingranaggio della pompa, ruotando in senso 126
orario e antiorario.
ATTENZIONE: La trasmissione va accoppia-

ta al motore completa di convertitore con piatto
di trascinamento (per non pregiudicare l’anello
di tenuta della pompa), quindi avvitare le viti di
fermo del piatto di trascinamento al volano moto-
re.
Se non è possibile, vedere le istruzioni alternative
a pag. 102.
GB Make sure that converter couples with the oil
pump driving gear, by turning it clockwise and
anticlockwise.
WARNING: The transmission has to be coupled

to engine with converter drive plate preassembled
(in order not to damage pump seal), then screw in
locking screws of drive plate to flywheel.
If not possible, see alternative instructions page
104.
D Wandler greift der Pumpenradverzahnung ein.
Kontrolle durch Drehen des Wandlers in beiden
Drehrichtungen.
ACHTUNG: Ölbefüllung durch Getriebeentlüftu

ngsbohrung. Getriebeentlüfter vorher herausdre-
hen.
Ölmenge siehe bei Ölspezifikationen; Seite 106.
F Vérifier que le convertisseur soit bien pris dans
l’engrenage de la pompe, et ce en le faisant tour-
ner dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre, et
dans le sens contraire.
ATTENTION: La transmission doit être cou-

plée au moteur avec le convertisseur et sa plaque
d’entraînement (afin de ne pas endommager la
bague d’étanchéité de la pompe), puis, visser les
vis de retenue de la plaque d’entraînement sur le
volant du moteur.
Si cela n’est pas possible, voir les instructions
alternatives page 108.
95
PST2
I Rimontaggio Valvola antishock 2 a marcia (a

127 a secondo della versione):
• Posizionare la valvola sulla piastra, umettare il
b filetto delle due viti (d) con Loctite 242 e comple-
c te di rosetta avvitare alla coppia di serraggio di 8
÷ 10 Nm.
• Avvitare i due raccordi (b) e (c) con tubi sul
distributore.
• Avvitare il raccordo con tubo flessibile (a) sul
coperchio P.d.F..
d GB Re-assembling 2 nd speed Antishock valve
(according to various configuration):
• Place the valve on the plate, wet the thread,
screw both screws (d) with their related washer at
the torque of 8 ÷ 10 Nm.
• Screw both unions (b) and (c) with pipes on the
delivering unit.
• Screw the union with the flexible pipe (a) on the
connection cover.
D Wiedereinbau Antischockventil 2. Gang (je
nach Version):
• Ventil auf die Platte setzen, das Gewinde
anfeuchten und die beiden Schrauben (d) mit
Dichtring mit einem Anzugsdrehmoment von 8 ÷
19 Nm anziehen.
• Die beiden Anschlüsse (b) und (c) mit
Rohrleitungen am Verteiler festschrauben.
• Den Anschluss mit Schlauch (a) am Deckel
Nebenabtrieb festschrauben.
F Remontage de la Vanne antichoc 2èm vitesse
(selon la version):
• Placer la vanne sur la plaque, humecter le file-
tage et visser les deux vis (d) et leur rondelle au
couple 8 ÷ 10 Nm.
• Visser les deux raccords (b) et (c) avec le tuyau
sur le distributeur.
• Visser le raccord avec le tuyau flexible (a) sur le
couvercle de la Prise de Mouvement.
96
PST2
4
TIPO OLIO
OIL SPECIFICATIONS
ÖLSPEZIFIKATION
TYPE HUILE
I Tipo olio trasmissione

Appartenente alla classe ATF e rispondente alle specifiche DEXRON II D oppure TYPE “A” SUFFIX
A della General Motors oppure C3 della Detroit Diesel Allison (per esempio MOBIL ATF 220 e FIAT
TUTELA GI/A e GI/M) oppure corrispondente alle specifiche MIL-L2104B e API CC (per esempio
MOBIL DELVAC 1110) o specifiche MIL-L2104C e API CD (per esempio MOBIL DELVAC 1310) nella
gradazione 10W20.
PST2 con P.d.F.: 1° riempimento: ~ 12,5 litri - cambio olio: ~ 11,5 litri
Quantità
PST2 senza P.d.F.: 1° riempimento: ~ 11,5 litri - cambio olio: ~ 10,5 litri
Circuito frenante più Inching idraulico

Secondo specifiche: SAE J1703, FMVSS 116 DOT 3, LUNA DOT 3 AB, FORD SAM 6C 9101A, ISO
4925.
GB Transmission oil specification

ATF oils corresponding to specifications DEXRON II D or TYPE “A” SUFFIX A of General Motors or
C3 of Detroit Diesel Allison (e.g. MOBIL ATF 220 and FIAT TUTELA GI/A and GI/M) or corresponding
to specifications MIL-L2104B and API CC (e.g. MOBIL DELVAC 1110) or to the specifications MIL-
L2104C and API CD (e.g. MOBIL DELVAC 1310) viscosity 10W20.
PST2 with P.d.F.: 1st filling: ~ 12.5 liters - oil change: ~ 11.5 liters
Quantity
PST2 without P.d.F.: 1st filling: ~ 11.5 liters - oil change: ~ 10.5 liters
Brake circuit plus hydraulic Inching

According specifications: SAE J1703, FMVSS 116 DOT 3, LUNA DOT 3 AB, FORD SAM 6C 9101A,
ISO 4925.
D Getriebe Ölspezifikation
ATF-Öle entsprechend den Spezifikationen DEXRON II D oder TYP “A” SUFFIX A von General Motors
oder C3 von Detroit Diesel Allison (z.B. MOBIL ATF 220 und FIAT TUTELA GI/A und GI/M) oder
entsprechend den Spezifikationen MIL-L2104B und API CC (z.B. MOBIL DELVAC 1110) oder den
Spezifikationen AIL-L2104C und API CD (z.B. MOBIL DELVAC 1310) Viskosität 10W20.
PST2 mit Nebenabtrieb: 1° Öl-Füllung: ~ 12,5 Lt. - Ölwechsel: ~ 11,5 Lt.
Bedarf
PST2 ohne Nebenabtrieb: 1° Öl-Füllung: ~ 11,5 Lt. - Ölwechsel: ~ 10,5 Lt.
Bremskreis plus Hydraulisches Inching

Bei Spezifikationen: SAE J1703, FMVSS 116 DOT 3, LUNA DOT 3 AB, FORD SAM 6C 9101A, ISO
4925.
F Transmission type huile

Appartenante à la classe ATF et correspondante aux spécifiques DEXTRON II D ou TYPE “A” SUFFIX
A de la General Motors ou C3 de la Detroit Diesel Allison (par example MOBIL ATF 220 et FIAT
TUTELA GI/A et GI/M) ou correspondante aux spécifiques MIL-L2104B et API CC (par examble
MOBIL DELVAC 1110) ou spécifiques MIL-L2104C et API CD (par example MOBIL DELVAC 1310)
dans la gradation 10W20.
PST2 avec P.d.F.: 1ére remplissage ~ 12,5 litres - changement d’huile ~ 11,5 litres.
Quantité
PST2 sans P.d.F.: 1ére remplissage ~ 11,5 litres - changement d’huile ~ 10,5 litres.
Circuit freinant plus Inching hydraulique:

Selon spécifiques: SAE J1703, FMVSS 116 DOT 3, LUNA DOT 3 AB, FORD SAM 6C 9101A, ISO 4925.
97
PST2
ISTALLAZIONE DELLA TRASMISSIONE

TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION
I PREPARAZIONE DEL CARRELLO PER L’ INSTALLAZIONE DELLA TRASMISSIONE

Per garantire un corretto accoppiamento della trasmissione al motore si devono eseguire i con-
trolli sotto precisati. Assicuratevi che i valori rilevati siano per i vari punti:
• Controllare che il diametro centraggio anulare carter volano C , o l’adattatore, siano quelli pre-
visti a seconda della categoria SAE:
1. SAE 3 : 409,58 409,71
2. SAE 4 : 361,95 362,08
• Controllare la coassialità del centraggio del carter volano C ; lo scostamento massimo è per
SAE 3 0,15 mm e per SAE 4 0,15 mm.
• Controllare la perpendicolarità del piano appoggio carter D ; lo scostamento massimo è per
SAE 3 0,20 mm e per SAE 4 0,20 mm.
• Controllare diametro del foro centraggio codolo convertitore sul volano E ; la misura deve esse-
re da 19,063 a 19,088 per codolo 19,037, e da 20,020 a 20,041 per codolo 20mm.
• Controllare la coassialità del foro centraggio codolo sul volano A . Lo scostamento massimo
ammesso è di 0,10 mm
• Controllare la perpendicolarità del piano volano dove viene fissato il piatto di trascinamento B ;
lo scartamento massimo ammesso è di 0,2 mm
• Controllare la planarità del piatto di trascinamento in corrispondenza dei fori di fissaggio al con-
vertitore; lo scartamento massimo ammesso è di 0,17 mm
• Controllare la distanza tra piano di appoggio piato di trascinamento sul volano e piano di appog-
gio su carter convertitore B . La misura va da 66 a 67 mm.
GB PREPARING TRUCK FOR TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION

To ensure that the transmission is properly coupled to the engine the following checks must be
performed. The points outline below should be within the limits stated.
• Check the flywheel housing, or, installed adapter, bore diameter C . Measurement accordind to
SAE standard:
1. SAE 3 : 409.58 409.71
2. SAE 4 : 361.95 362.08
• Check the flywheel housing bore eccentricity C . Measurement not to exceed for SAE 3 0.15
mm and for SAE 4 0.15 mm.
• Check the flywheel housing face squareness D . Measurement not to exceed for SAE 3 0.20
mm and for SAE 4 0.20 mm.
• Check the crankshaft hub pilot diameter E , or when used, the hub adaptor pilot diameter.
Measurement from 19.063 to 19.088 for spigot 19.037, and from 20.020 to 20.041 for spigot
20mm.
• Check the crankshaft hub pilot bore eccentricity A , or when used the hub adaptor one.
Measurement not to exceed 0.10 mm
• Check the crankshaft face squareness where flexion plate is fastened B . Measurement not to
exceed 0.2 mm.
• Check the converter plate flatness adjacent to each converter mounting bore hole. Measurement
not to exceed 0.17mm
• Check the flywheel axial location B . Measurement must be from 66 to 67 mm.
98
PST2
Controllo accoppiamento motore-cambio

Engine flywheel - housing installation check
4
E
A
01
2 QUOTA MINIMA
MIN DIMENSION
MINDESTABSTAND
PART MIMINIMUM
PIANO DI APPOGGIO PIATTO DI TRASCINAMENTO

LEVEL TO PLACE DRIVE PLATE
EBENE ZUR BEFESTIGUNG DER MITNEHMERSCHEIBE
PLAN D' APPUI DU PLATEU D' ENTRAINEMENT
01 APPLICAZIONE FLANGIA SAE 3 E 4

B SAE 3 AND 4 FLANGE APPLICATION
VERWENDUNG VON FLANSCH SAE 3 UND 4
APPLICATION BRIDE SAE 3 ET 4
66.5±0.5
99
PST2
INSTALLATION GETRIEBE
INSTALLATION DE LA TRANSMISSION
D VORBEREITUNG DES FAHRGESTELLS FÜR DIE MONTAGE DES GETRIEBES

Um eine korrekte Kupplung des Getriebes mit dem Motor sicherzustellen, sind die hier näher auf-
geführten Kontrollen durchzuführen. Es ist darauf zu achten, dass die gemessenen Werte für die
verschiedenen Punkte stimmen.
• Prüfen Sie, ob Durchmesser Ring-Zentrierung Schwungradgehäuse C oder Zwischenstück der
Kategorie SAE entspricht:
1. SAE 3 : 409,58 409,71
2. SAE 4 : 361,95 362,08
• Prüfen Sie die Koaxialität der Zentrierung des Schwungradgehäuses C ; die maximale
Abweichung für SAE 3 beträgt 0,15 mm und 0,15 mm für SAE 4.
• Prüfen sie, ob die Gehäuseauflagefläche D senkrecht ist; die maximale Abweichung für SAE 3
beträgt 0,20 mm und 0,20 mm für SAE 4.
• Prüfen Sie den Durchmesser der Zentrierbohrung Endstück Wandler am Schwungrad prüfen
E ; das Maß muss zwischen 19,063 und 19,088 für Endstück 19,037, und zwischen 20,020 und
20,041 für Endstück 20mm liegen.
• Prüfen Sie die Koaxialität der Zentrierbohrung Endstück Wandler am Schwungrad prüfen A .
Die zulässige maximale Abweichung beträgt 0,10 mm.
• Prüfen Sie, ob die Schwungradfläche, auf der die Mitnehmerplatte befestigt wird B , senkrecht
ist; die zulässige maximale Abweichung beträgt 0,2 mm.
• Prüfen Sie die Ebenheit des Mitnehmertellers an den Befestigungsbohrungen für den Wandler;
die zulässige maximale Abweichung beträgt 0,17 mm.
• Prüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Auflagefläche Mitnehmerteller am Schwungrad und
Auflagefläche am Wandlergehäuse B . Das Maß liegt zwischen 66 und 67 mm.
F PREPARATION DU CHARIOT POUR L’ INSTALLATION DE LA TRANSMISSION

Il est nécessaire de procéder aux contrôles indiqués ci-dessous afin d’obtenir un bon ajustement
de la transmission au moteur. Vérifier que les valeurs relevées soient pour les différents points
comme suit:
• Contrôler que le diamètre du centrage annulaire du carter du volant C , ou de l ́adaptateur, soit
celui prévu selon la catégorie SAE:
1. SAE 3 : 409,58 409,71
2. SAE 4 : 361,95 362,08
• Contrôler la coaxialité du centrage du carter du volant C ; la différence maximale doit être pour
SAE 3 de 0,15 mm et pour SAE 4 de 0,15 mm.
• Contrôler la perpendicularité du plan d’appui du carter D ; la différence maximale doit être pour
SAE 3 de 0,20 mm et pour SAE 4 de 0,20 mm.
• Contrôler le diamètre du trou de centrage de la queue du convertisseur sur le volant E ; la
mesure doit être de 19,063 à 19,088 pour une queue de 19,037, et de 20,020 à 20,041 pour une
queue de 20mm.
• Contrôler la coaxialité du trou du centrage de la queue sur le volant A . La différence maximale
admise est de 0,10 mm.
• Contrôler la perpendicularité du plan d’appui du volant à l’endroit où est fixé la plaque d’entraî-
nement B ; la différence maximale admise est de 0,2 mm.
• Contrôler la planarité de la plaque d’entraînement en correspondance des trous de fixation du
convertisseur; la différence maximale admise est de 0,17 mm.
• Contrôler la distance entre le plan d’appui de la plaque d’entraînement sur le volant et le plan
d’appui sur le carter du convertisseur B . La mesure doit être entre 66 et 67 mm.
100
PST2
Rundlaufkontrolle
Contrôle accouplement moteur-boîte 4
E
A
01
2 QUOTA MINIMA
MIN DIMENSION
MINDESTABSTAND
PART MIMINIMUM
PIANO DI APPOGGIO PIATTO DI TRASCINAMENTO

LEVEL TO PLACE DRIVE PLATE
EBENE ZUR BEFESTIGUNG DER MITNEHMERSCHEIBE
PLAN D' APPUI DU PLATEU D' ENTRAINEMENT
01 APPLICAZIONE FLANGIA SAE 3 E 4

B SAE 3 AND 4 FLANGE APPLICATION
VERWENDUNG VON FLANSCH SAE 3 UND 4
APPLICATION BRIDE SAE 3 ET 4
66.5±0.5
101
PST2
MONTAGGIO DELLA TRASMISSIONE SUL CARRELLO
I Se si monta una nuova trasmissione togliere i fermi del convertitore e recuperare il sacchetto con
le rondelle speciali.
ATTENZIONE: La trasmissione deve essere maneggiata con cura per evitare che il con-
vertitore di coppia si sfili dalla trasmissione. Cercare di tenere sempre la parte posteriore
più bassa.
• Controllare che il piatto di trascinamento (1) sul convertitore sia montato con l’anello di spalla-
mento (2) orientato verso il volano. Verificare che le viti (3) siano strette alla coppia di serraggio di
47,5 ÷ 52,5 Nm.
• Lubrificate il foro di centraggio codolo sul volano
• Durante il montaggio allineare il piatto di trascinamento al volano assicurandosi che i fori sul piat-
to coincidano con quelli di fissaggio sul volano. E’ consigliabile utilizzare spine di centraggio.
• Spingete la trasmissione verso il motore mentre si allineano le spine con i fori sul piatto ed il
codolo nel foro di centraggio sul volano.
• Accoppiare il carter trasmissione al carter volano
• Stringere le viti che fissano il carter convertitore al carter volano. Rispettare la coppia di serrag-
gio specifica per la classe di viti utilizzata.
• Rimuovere le spine di allineamento, montare e stringere le viti (5) che fissano il piatto di trascina-
mento al volano assicurandosi che le rondelle speciali (6) siano montate tra la testa vite e piatto.
Rispettare la coppia di serraggio specifica per la classe di viti utilizzata.
• Assicurarsi che ci sia una luce minima di 2mm tra battuta codolo e volano.
102
PST2
Schema accoppiamento motore con P. d. F.

4
1
6
159 +0,3
- 0,93
66,5 ± 0,5 92,5
VOLANO 6 5
FLYWHEEL 2
SCHWUNGRAD
VOLANT
r3 MIMIMO
MINIMUM 1
MINIMUM
4
3
2
∅ 232
1 - Piatto di trascinamento convertitore

2 - Anello di rinforzo
3 - Viti di unione del piatto di trascinamento al convertitore (quattro pezzi)
4 - Rondella elastica
5 - Viti di unione del piatto di trascinamento al volano - fornite dal cliente
6 - Rondella speciale (vedi pag. 111)
A Dimensione foro su volano (consigliata): ∅ 19,063 + 0,025

0
Codolo: ∅ 19,037 + 0,025

0,020
A Dimensione foro su volano (consigliata): ∅ 20 + 0,020

0,041
- 0,040
Codolo: ∅ 20 - 0.007
103
PST2
INSTALLING TRANSMISSION INTO TRUCK
GB If a new transmission is fitted, remove the torque converter retaining strap when the transmission
is in position for installation and recover the plastic bag with the special washers.
Caution: The transmission must be handled very carefully, after the strap is removed to
avoid separating the torque converter from the transmission . Keep the front of the trans-
mission lower at all times.
• Check that the wear plate (1) faces outward and that flex plate (2) securing screw (3) be tightened
to the torque of 47,5 ÷ 52,5 Nm.
• Lubricate the centre pilot boss with grease.
• Install 2 dowel pilot tools in the flywheel to ease the alignment of the flex plate holes with the fly-
wheel holes. These tools are to be locally manufactured.
• Push the transmission toward the engine while guiding the centre pilot boss into the flywheel
centre bore and the dowel pilot tools in the flex plate holes.
• Engage the pilot diameter of the transmission housing into the engine bell housing
• Install the bolts that secure the transmission housing to the engine bell housing. Tighten the bolts
to the torque specified by the truck manufacturer.
• Remove the dowel pilot tools and secure the flexion plate to the flywheel, taking care to install
the special washer (6) between the screw (5) head and flexion plate. Tighten the bolts to the torque
specified by the truck manufacturer.
• Make sure that there is a minimum width of 2mm between spigot pin butt and flywheel.
104
PST2
Engine with P. T. O. coupling diagram

4
1
6
159 +0,3
- 0,93
66,5 ± 0,5 92,5
VOLANO 6 5
FLYWHEEL 2
SCHWUNGRAD
VOLANT
r3 MIMIMO
MINIMUM 1
MINIMUM
4
3
2
∅ 232
1 - Converter drive plate

2 - Converter reinforcing ring
3 - Bolts (four pcs) - drive plate to converter
4 - Spring washer
5 - Bolts - drive plate to flywheel - supplied by customer
6 - Special washer (see page 111)
A Suggested dimension for flywheel hole: ∅ 19.063 + 00.025

Pilot : ∅ 19,037 + 0,025
0,020
A Suggested dimension for flywheel hole: ∅ 20 + 0.041

0.020
- 0,040
Pilot: ∅ 20 - 0.007
105
PST2
MONTAGE DES GETRIEBES AM FAHRGESTELL
D Wird ein neues Getriebe montiert, entfernen Sie die Feststellvorrichtungen des Wandlers und stel-
len den Beutel mit den Spezialunterlegscheiben sicher.
ACHTUNG: Das Getriebe muss vorsichtig behandelt werden, um zu vermeiden, dass sich
der Drehmomentwandler vom Getriebe löst. Die hintere Seite möglichst immer tiefer halten.
• Prüfen Sie, ob der Mitnehmerteller (1) am Wandler mit dem Bordring (2) in Richtung auf das
Schwungrad montiert ist. Überprüfen, ob die Schrauben (3) mit Anzugsdrehmoment von 47,5 ÷
52,5 Nm festgezogen sind.
• Die Zentrierbohrung des Endstücks am Schwungrad muss geschmiert werden.
• Bei der Montage ist der Mitnehmerteller am Schwungrad auszurichten und darauf zu achten,
dass die Bohrungen im Teller mit den Befestigungsbohrungen am Schwungrad übereinstimmen.
Es wird die Verwendung von Zentrierstiften empfohlen.
• Beim Ausrichten der Zentrierstifte am Teller und des Endstücks in der Zentrierbohrung am
Schwungrad schieben Sie das Getriebe in Richtung Motor.
• Das Getriebegehäuse mit dem Gehäuse des Schwungrads verbinden.
• Die Schrauben zur Befestigung des Wandlergehäuses am Schwungradgehäuse anziehen. Das für
die verwendete Schraubenklasse spezifische Anzugsmoment beachten.
• Entfernen Sie die Ausricht-Schrauben, dann die Schrauben (5), die den Mitnehmerteller
am Schwungrad befestigen, eindrehen und anziehen. Es ist darauf zu achten, dass die
Spezialunterlegscheiben (6) zwischen Schraubenkopf und Teller liegen. Beachten Sie das für die
verwendete Schraubenklasse spezifische Anzugsmoment.
• Bitte stellen Sie fest, dass es zwischen den Schaftanschlag und den Schwungrad immer 2 mm
Licht gibt.
106
PST2
Einbau-Schema Motor mit Nebenabtrieb

4
1
6
159 +0,3
- 0,93
66,5 ± 0,5 92,5
VOLANO 6 5
FLYWHEEL 2
SCHWUNGRAD
VOLANT
r3 MIMIMO
MINIMUM 1
MINIMUM
4
3
2
∅ 232
1 - Wandlerantriebsmembrane
2 - Wandlerverstärkungsblech
3 - Schrauben - Verbindung Antriebsmembrane mit Wandler
4 - Federring
5 - Schrauben - Verbindung Antriebsmembrane mit Schwungrad - Kundenbeistellung
6 - Spewialscheibe (Siehe Seite 111)
A Maß für Zentrierung im Schwungrad: ∅ 19,063 + 0,025

0
Führungszapfen: ∅ 19,037 + 0,025

0,020
A Maß für Zentrierung im Schwungrad: ∅ 20 + 0.020

0,041
Führungszapfen: ∅ 20 -- 0.007
0,040
107
PST2
MONTAGE DE LA TRANSMISSION SUR LE CHARIOT
F Dans le cas de montage d’une nouvelle transmission, il faut enlever les systèmes de blocage du
convertisseur et récupérer le sachet de rondelles spéciales.
ATTENTION: La transmission doit être manipulée avec soin afin d’éviter que le convertis-
seur de couplage sorte de la transmission. Essayer de laisser la partie postérieure dans la
position la plus basse possible.
• Contrôler que la plaque d’entraînement (1) sur le convertisseur soit monté avec la rondelle de
butée (2) orientée vers le volant. Vérifier que les vis (3) soient bien serrées au couple 47,5 ÷ 52,5
Nm.
• Lubrifier les trous de centrage de la queue du volant
• Durant le montage, aligner la plaque d’entraînement du volant en vérifiant que les trous sur la
plaque coïncident avec ceux de fixation présents sur le volant. Il est conseillé d’utiliser des gou-
pilles de centrage.
• Pousser la transmission vers le moteur pendant que les goupilles s’alignent en correspondance
des trous sur la plaque, et la queue, en correspondance du trou de centrage sur le volant.
• Coupler le carter de la transmission avec le carter du volant.
• Serrer les vis qui fixent le carter du convertisseur au carter du volant. Respecter le couple de ser-
rage spécifique pour la classe de vis utilisée.
• Eliminer les goupilles d’alignement, monter et serrer les vis (5) qui fixent la plaque d’entraînement
au volant en vérifiant que les rondelles spéciales (6) soient montées entre la tête de la vis et la pla-
que. Respecter le couple de serrage spécifique pour la classe de vis utilisée.
• La distance minimum entre le goujon de centrage et le volant moteur doit être 2mm.
108
PST2
Schéma d’accouplement moteur avec P. d. F.

4
1
6
159 +0,3
- 0,93
66,5 ± 0,5 92,5
VOLANO 6 5
FLYWHEEL 2
SCHWUNGRAD
VOLANT
r3 MIMIMO
MINIMUM 1
MINIMUM
4
3
2
∅ 232
1 - Plateau d’entraînement du convertisseur

2 - Bague de renfort
3 - Vis d’union du plateau d’entraînement au convertisseur
4 - Rondelle elastique
5 - Vis d’union du plateau d’entraînement au volant - fournies du client
6 - Rondelle spéciale (voir page 111)
A Dimension du trou sur le volant (conseillée): ∅ 19,063 + 00,025

Queue : ∅ 19,037 + 0,020
0,025
A Dimension du trou sur le volant (conseillée): ∅ 20 + 0.020

0,041
- 0,040
Queue: ∅ 20 - 0.007
109
PST2
Schema accoppiamento motore senza P.d.F.

Engine without P.T.O. coupling diagram
Einbau-Schema Motor ohne Nebenabtrieb
Schéma d’accouplement moteur sans P. d. F.
I 1 - Piatto di trascinamento
convertitore r 3 MIMIMO 5 4
MINIMUM
2 - Anello di rinforzo MINIMUM
3 - Viti di unione del piatto di
trascinamento al converti-
tore (quattro pezzi)
4 - Rondella elastica
5 - Viti di unione del piatto di
trascinamento al volano FÜHRUNGSZAPFEN / QUEUE
(fornite dal cliente)
6 - Rondella speciale
(vedi pag. 111)
CODOLINO / PILOT
- 0,025
+0,000
GB 1 - Converter drive plate

∅ 19,037
2 - Converter reinforcing ring

3 - Bolts (four pcs) - drive
plate to converter
4 - Spring washer
5 - Bolts - drive plate to
flywheel (supplied by
customer)
6 - Special washer
(see page 111)
2
D 1 - Wandlerantriebsmembrane
2 - Wandlerverstärkungsblech 3
3 - Schrauben - Verbindung
Antriebsmembrane mit
Wandler 6
4 - Federring
5 - Schrauben - Verbindung 1
Antriebsmembrane
mit Schwungrad
(Kundenbeistellung) 2
6 - Spewialscheibe VOLANO
(Siehe Seite 111) FLYWHEEL
66,5 ± 0,5
SCHWUNGRAD
F 1 - Plateau d’entraînement du VOLANT
convertisseur
2 - Bague de renfort
3 - Vis d’union du plateau
d’entraînement au conver- 0
tisseur Dimensione foro su volano (consigliata): ∅19,063 + 0,025
4 - Rondelle elastique 0
5 - Vis d’union du plateau Suggested dimension for flywheel Pilot hole: ∅19.063 + 0.025
d’entraînement au volant 0
(fournies du client) Maß für Zentrierung im Schwungrad: ∅19,063 + 0,025
6 - Rondelle spéciale 0
Dimension du trou sur le volant (conseillée): ∅19,063 + 0,025
(voir page 111)
110
PST2
4
Rondella speciale per fissaggio piatto-volano
Special washer to fix drive plate to flywheel
Spezialscheibe zur Befestigung von der Membrane an das Schwungrad
17 +0.50 Rondelle spéciale pour fixer le plateau au volant
15° 15°
0
+0.30
9 - 0.20
R5 R5
1.5
Disegno N°
Drawing Nr. 3.16475.3
1.5
Zeichnung Nr.
Plan N.
∅ 24±0.65
∅ 13±0.27
15°
15°
R5
1.5
R5
Disegno N°
Drawing Nr. 3.17113.3 2.5±0.22
Zeichnung Nr.
Plan N.
∅10.2 +0.20
0
15°
15°
∅22
R5
1.5
R5
Disegno N° 2
Drawing Nr. 3.20489.3
Zeichnung Nr.
Plan N.
111
PST2
DATI TECNICI - Prelievo pressione

TECHNICAL DATA - Pressure measurement
a b
F max. pressione corsa pressione zero
3 4 max. pressure stroke zero pressure
D 20
E
6
7
C
1 B A
6 5
Valvola antishock 2a marcia (Optional)

2nd speed Antishock valve (Optional)
Diagramma intervento pressione - Corsa Inching meccanico

Pressure operating time diagram - Mechanical Inching travel
Pressione / Pressure / Druk / Pression

Pressione 0.5 ÷ 0.7 max
P./ P. / D. / P. max
Pressure / Druk / Pression
bar
Coppia frenante (intervento freno)
Apply brakes (brake operating time)
Bremsdrehmoment (Bremseinsatz)
Couple de frein (intervention frein)
Corsa / Stroke / Hub / Course

0 2 5 10 15 18 20 mm
F
a F / F / K /F = 13 +20 Kg b
112
PST2
4
DATI TECNICI - Prelievo pressione
TECHNICAL DATA - Pressure measurement
I Prelievo pressione
1 - Presa pressione principale M10×1
2 - Presa pressione convertitore M10×1
3 - Presa pressione 1a avanti M10×1
4 - Presa pressione 1a indietro M10×1
5 - Presa pressione 2a avanti M10×1
6 - Presa pressione 2a indietro M10×1
7 - Pressione lubrificazione
se eccitata la trasmissione è in 1a velocità (lenta)
A - Elettrovalvola 1a/2 a:
se diseccitata la trasmissione è in 2a velocità (veloce)
se eccitata innesta la marcia avanti
B - Elettrovalvola AVANTI:
se diseccitata la marcia è disinnestata.
se eccitata innesta la retromarcia
C - Elettrovalvola INDIETRO:
se diseccitata la marcia è disinnestata.
D - Inching idraulico.
E - Inching meccanico.
F - Ingresso olio freni
Nel caso le viti di fissaggio del distributore al cambio dovessero essere utilizzate per ancorarvi altri
elementi occorrerà darne comunicazione a Graziano Trasmissioni S.p.A. (Ufficio Tecnico Progetti)
per benestare. In ogni caso le viti dovranno essere chiuse alla coppia di serraggio di 19 ÷ 21 Nm.
GB Pressure measurement
1 - Main pressure M10×1
2 - Converter pressure intake M10×1
3 - 1st forward pressure M10×1
4 - 1st reverse pressure M10×1
5 - 2 nd forward pressure M10×1
6 - 2 nd reverse pressure M10×1
7 - Lubrication pressure
energized, 1st speed is engaged
A - Electrovalve 1st/2 nd:
not energized, 2 nd speed is engaged.
energized, forward gear is engaged
B - FORWARD electrovalve:
not energized, in neutral.
energized, reverse gear is engaged
C - REVERSE electrovalve:
not energized, in neutral.
D - Hydraulic Inching.
E - Mechanical Inching.
F - Oil brake feed
If the fixing bolts of the control valve on the transmission are used to fasten other elements, please
contact Graziano Trasmissioni S.p.A. for approval. Bolts must be tightened to torque of 19 ÷ 21 Nm.
113
PST2
TECHNISCHE DATEN - Druckmessung

DONNEES TECHNIQUES - Prelevement de pression
a b
F max. Druck Hub Drucklos
3 4 max. pression course pression zéro
D 20
E
6
7
C
1 B A
6 5
Antischockventil zweitev Gang (auf Wunsch)

Vanne antichoc 2ème marche (en option)
Diagramm Inchdruck - Hub mechanisches inchen

Diagramme d’intervention pression - Course Inching mécanique
Pressione / Pressure / Druk / Pression

Pressione 0.5 ÷ 0.7 max
P./ P. / D. / P. max
Pressure / Druk / Pression
bar
Coppia frenante (intervento freno)
Apply brakes (brake operating time)
Bremsdrehmoment (Bremseinsatz)
Couple de frein (intervention frein)
Corsa / Stroke / Hub / Course

0 2 5 10 15 18 20 mm
F
a F / F / K /F = 13 +20 Kg b
114
PST2
4
TECHNISCHE DATEN - Druckmessung
DONNEES TECHNIQUES - Prelevement de pression
D Druckmessung
1 - Hauptdruckmeßstelle M10×1
2 - Wandlerdruckmeßstelle M10×1
3 - Kupplungsdruck Vorwärtsgang M10×1
4 - Kupplungsdruck Rückwärtsgang M10×1
5 - Kupplungsdruck 2.Gang Vorwärts M10×1
6 - Kupplungsdruck 2.Gang Rückwärts M10×1
7 - Schmierdruck
Bei eingeschaltetem Strom wird der 1. Gang aktiviert
A - Elektroventi: 1./2.Gang:
Bei ausgeschaltetem wird der 2. Gang aktiviert.
Bei eingeschaltetem Strom wird der Vorwärts-Gang aktiviert
B - Elektroventi Vorwärtsgang:
Bei ausschaltetem Strom wird der Freilauf aktiviert.
Bei eingeschaltetem Strom wird der Rückwärts-Gang aktiviert
C - Eletroventil Rückwärtsgang:
Bei ausschatetem Strom wird der Freilauf aktiviert.
D - Hydraulisches Inching.
E - Mechanisches Inching.
F - Ölbremsen Zufuhr
Werden die Befestigungsschrauben des Steuerblocks am Getriebe zur Befestigung anderer Teile
verwendet, erfordert dies die Freigabe durch Graziano Trasmissioni S.p.A. Anzugsmoment der
Schrauben: 19 ÷ 21 Nm.
F Prélèvement de pression
1 - Prise de pression principale M10x1
2 - Prise de pression convertisseur M10x1
3 - Prise de pression 1ère Marche Avant M10x1
4 - Prise de pression 1ère Marche Arrière M10x1
5 - Prise de pression 2ème Marche Avant M10x1
6 - Prise de pression 2ème Marche Arrière M10x1
7 - Pression lubrification
si la transmission est soumise à excitation, elle est en 1ère vitesse (lente)
A - Electrovanne 1ère/2ème:
si la transmission n’est plus soumise à excitation, elle est en 2ème
vitesse (rapide)
si la est soumise à excitation, branché elle met la Marche Avant
B - Electrovanne AVANT:
si la est soumise à excitation, débranché elle met la boîte au Point Mort.
si la est soumise à excitation, branché elle met la Marche Arrière
C - Electrovanne ARRIERE:
si la est soumise à excitation, débranché elle met la boîte au Point Mort.
D - Inching hydraulique.
E - Inching mecanique.
F - Entrée huile des freins
Si les vis de serrage du distributeur sur la transmission sont utilisées pour y fixer des autres éléments,
il faut le communiquer à GRAZIANO Trasmissioni S.p.A. (Bureau Technique Projets) pour l’approba-
tion. En tout cas les vis doivent être serrées à la couple de serrage de 19 ÷ 21 Nm.
115
PST2
5 RODAGGIO
I Trasmissione idraulica
Il periodo di rodaggio è di 60-80 ore, durante le quali è necessario seguire le seguenti prescrizioni:
ispezionare frequentemente la trasmissione assicurandosi che non esistano perdite di olio.
Ogni 10 ore
Controllare il livello olio nella trasmissione ed eventualmente rabboccare.
PROCEDURA DI CONTROLLO DEL LIVELLO OLIO.
• Avviare il motore ed innestare tutte le marce, ognuna per almeno 2 minuti, per riempire tutto il
circuito, poi mettere il selettore in folle.
• Spurgare bene il circuito facendo girare il motore per almeno 2 minuti a 1000 ÷ 1200 g/min.
• Assicurarsi che il carrello sia in piano ed il freno a mano sia inserito
• Con motore al minimo e marcia in folle controllare il livello come segue:
1. Con asta livello olio con indicazioni HOT e CLD:
1a: Con olio freddo alla temperatura di 20 ÷ 40 °C il livello dell’olio deve essere tra le 2 tacche
dell’intervallo “CLD”. E’ consigliabile ripetere il controllo con temperatura olio stabilizzata
di 70 ÷ 90 °C.
CLD HOT
LIVELLO OLIO FREDDO MIN. LIVELLO OLIO FREDDO MAX.
1b: Con olio caldo alla temperatura di 70 ÷ 90 °C il livello dell’olio deve essere tra le 2 tacche
dell’intervallo “HOT”
LIVELLO OLIO CALDO MIN. LIVELLO OLIO CALDO MAX.
CLD HOT
2. Con asta livello olio MAX e MIN , il livello dell’olio deve essere controllato tra i 40 e 70 °C e
deve trovarsi nel campo intermedio a quello MIN e MAX.
MIN MAX
Al termine del periodo di rodaggio

a. sostituire l’olio
b. sostituire il filtro dell’olio
Le suddette norme devono essere osservate anche dopo una revisione della trasmissione idrau-
lica.
116
PST2
RUNNING-IN
5
GB Hydraulic transmission
The running-in time is 60-80 hrs., during which it is necessary to perform the following opera-
tions: check the transmission frequently to make sure that there are no oil leaks.
Every 10 hrs.
Check the oil level in the transmission and, if required, top up (for oil brand pls. refer to the supply
list).
PROCEDURE TO CHECK OIL LEVEL
• Start the engine and shift the transmission through all drive ranges, for at least 2 minutes each,
to fill the clutch cavity and oil passage, then shift to neutral
• Run the engine for at least 2 minutes at 1000 ÷ 1200 rpm to clear the system from air.
• Check the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground and the parking brake applied.
• With the engine at low idle and transmission in neutral check the oil level as follows:
1. With oil level marked HOT and CLD :
1a: With oil temperature at 20 ÷ 40 °C the oil level should register in the CLD run band, con-
versely act as required. A hot oil check is recommended after the transmission reaches the
stabilized temperature.
CLD HOT
MIN OIL LEVEL WITH COLD OIL MAX OIL LEVEL WITH COLD OIL
1b: With oil temperature at 70 ÷ 90 °C the oil level should register in the HOT run band, con-
versely act as required
MIN OIL LEVEL WITH WARM OIL MAX OIL LEVEL WITH WARM OIL
CLD HOT
2. With oil level marked MIN and MAX: with oil temperature at 40 ÷ 70 °C the oil level should
register in the middle run band, conversely act as required. A hot oil check is recommended
after the transmission reaches the stabilized temperature.
MIN MAX
At the end of the running-in period

a. change the oil
b. replace the oil filter
Above rules must be observed even after an overhaul of the hydraulic transmission.
117
PST2
INBETRIEBNAHME
D Hydraulikgetriebe
Die Einlaufzeit beträgt 60-80 Stunden. In dieser zeit sind die folgenden Maßnahmen dur-
chzuführen: Getriebe mehrfach prüfen und sicherstellen, dass kein Öl austritt.
Alle 10 Stunden
Getriebeölstand prüfen und gegebenenfalls Öl nachfüllen.
VERFAHREN ÖLSTAND PRÜFEN
• Den Motor anlassen und alle Gänge nacheinander einlegen, jeden ungefähr mindestens 2
Minuten, so dass der gesamte Kreis gefüllt wird, dann das Wechselventil im Leerlauf drehen.
• Den Kreis gründlich spülen, dabei den Motor mindestens 2 Minuten bei 1000 + 1200 U/min.
drehen lassen
• Darauf achten, dass das Fahrgestell eben liegt und die Handbremse angezogen ist.
• Bei auf Minimum laufendem Motor und Getriebe in Neutralstellung den Ölstand wie folgt kon-
trollieren:
1. Anhand Ölmessstab mit Anzeige HOT und CLD:
1a) Bei kaltem Öl und einer Temperatur zwischen 20-40 °C muss der Ölstand zwischen den
beiden Einkerbungen der Markierung “CLD” liegen. Es wird empfohlen, die Kontrolle bei
einer stabilisierten Öltemperatur von 70-90°C zu wiederholen.
CLD HOT
Min. Ölstand, kalt Max. Ölstand, kalt
1b) Bei warmem Öl und einer Temperatur zwischen 20-40 °C muss der Ölstand zwischen den
beiden Einkerbungen des Abstands “HOT” liegen.
Min. Ölstand, warm Max. Ölstand, warm
CLD HOT
2. Mit Ölmessstab MIN und MAX muss der Ölstand zwischen 40 und 70 °C kontrolliert werden
und in der Mitte zwischen MIN und MAX liegen.
MIN MAX
Am Ende der Einlaufphase

a. Ölwechsel vornehmen
b. Ölfilter wechseln
Die obigen Regeln müssen auch nach einer Überholung des Hydraulikgetriebes befolgt werden.
118
PST2
RODAGE
5
F Transmission hydraulique
La période de rodage est de 60-80 heures, pendant lesquelles il faut suivre les prescriptions sui-
vantes: inspecter souvent la transmission pour s’assurer qu’il n’y a pas de pertes d’huile.
Toutes les 10 heures
Contrôler le niveau d’huile dans la boîte de transmission et si nécessaire, en rajouter.
PROCEDURE DE CONTROLE DU NIVEAU D’HUILE.
• Mettre en marche le moteur et embrayer toutes les vitesses, chacune pendant au moins 2
minutes, et ce, afin de remplir tout le circuit ; puis positionner le sélecteur au point mort.
• Bien purger le circuit en faisant tourner le moteur pendant deux minutes au moins à 1000 ÷
1200 t/mn.
• Vérifier que le chariot soit sur le plat et que le frein à main ne soit pas enclenché.
• Lorsque le moteur est au minimum et la boîte au point mort, contrôler le niveau comme suit:
1. Par l’intermédiaire de la tige d’huile avec les indications HOT et CLD:
1a: lorsque l’huile est froide et à une température comprise entre 20 et 40 °C, le niveau d’huile
doit être entre les deux marques de l’intervalle “CLD”. Il est conseillé de recontrôler lors-
que la température de l’huile s’est stabilisée entre 70 et 90 °C.
CLD HOT
NIVEAU HUILE FROID MIN. NIVEAU HUILE FROID MAX.
1b: lorsque l’huile est chaude et à une température comprise entre 70 et 90 °C, le niveau
d’huile doit être entre les deux marques de l’intervalle “HOT”
NIVEAU HUILE CHAUD MIN. NIVEAU HUILE CHAUD MAX.
CLD HOT
2. Par l’intermédiaire de la tige du niveau d’huile MAX et MIN , le niveau de l’huile doit être con-
trôlé lorsque la température est comprise entre 40 et 70 °C ; celle-ci doit être dans la partie
intermédiaire située entre MIN et MAX.
MIN MAX
Au terme de la période de rodage

a. remplacer l’huile
b. remplacer le filtre de l’huile
Les règles ci-dessus doivent être impérativement suivies même après un contrôle de la transmis-
sion hydraulique.
119
PST2
MANUTENZIONE PERIODICA
PERIODIC SERVICING
I Ogni 200 ore:

Livello Olio
• Verificare il livello olio con l’astina (a) e se
necessario aggiungerne, tramite il foro di introdu-
zione olio trasmissione (d).
• Il controllo deve essere effettuato come descrit-
to nel controllo ogni 10 ore (vedere pag. 116).
Ogni 500 ore:
Filtro olio cambio
• Sostituire la cartuccia filtrante (b).
Nota - Ogni due sostituzioni della cartuccia
occorre sostituire l’olio della trasmissione.
• Per lo scarico dellʼolio togliere il tappo (e).
• In occasione del cambio olio effettuare la pulizia
del filtro di aspirazione della pompa (c).
• La sostituzione dell’olio deve essere fatta non
oltre 1 anno oppure 1000 ore.
d
GB Every 200 hrs.:
d Oil Level
• Check the oil level by mean of the dipstick (a)
and if necessary, top up through the transmission
oil hole (d).
• Need to be checked by following indications
supplied in the paragraph of “every ten hours”
(refer to page 117).
PST2 con P.d.F. PST2 senza P.d.F.
PST2 with P.T.O. PST2 without P.T.O. Every 500 hrs.:
Transmission oil filter
• Change the filtering cartridge (b).
Note - Every two replacements of the filter, it is
necessary to replace transmission oil.
• Drain thru plug (e).

When oil is renewed clean also oil suction filter
(c).
• Oil replacement should be performed every year
or 1000 hours, whichever occurs first.
120
PST2
REGELMÄßIGE WARTUNG
ENTRETIEN PERIODIQUE 5
D Alle 200 Stunden:
Schmierölstand
• Prüfen Sie den Ölstand mit dem Ölmessstab
(a), wenn nötig, Öl durch den Ölauffüllstutzen (d)
auffüllen .
• Die Kontrolle muss, wie unter Kontrolle
beschrieben, alle 10 Stunden durchgeführt wer-
den (siehe S. 118).
Alle 500 Stunden:
Getriebeölfilter:
• Filtereinsatz wechseln (b).
Anmerkung: Jeder zweite Filteraustausch muss
das Getriebeöl gewechselt werden.
• Ölablass durch den Verschlussstopfen (e).

• Beim Ölwechsel, den Filter putzen (c).
• Der Ölwechsel muss mindestens 1 mal jährlich
oder alle 100 Stunden maximal durchgeführt wer- d
den.
d
F Tous les 200 heures:
Niveau d’Huile
• Vérifier le niveau de l’huile à l’aide de la tige (a)
et, si nécessaire, en rajouter à travers l’embou-
chure de l’huile de la transmission (d).
• Le contrôle doit être effectué selon ce qui a été PST2 mit Nebenabtrieb PST2 ohne Nebenabtrieb
décrit dans le paragraphe sur le contrôle à faire PST2 avec Prise de Force PST2 sans Prise de Force
toutes les dix heures (voir p. 119).
Toutes les 500 heures:
Remplacement du filtre à huile
• Substituer la cartouche de filtrage (b).
Remarque: toutes les deux substitutions de la
cartouche, il faut remplacer l’huile de la transmis-
sion.
• Pour déverser l’huile, enlever le bouchon (e) au
moment du vidange, nettoyer le filtre d’aspiration
de la pompe (c).
• Effectuer le vidange chaque année au moins ou
1000 heures.
121
PST2
6 RICERCA DIFETTI DI FUNZIONAMENTO
I A. Indicazioni generali
Prima della localizzazione dei guasti della trasmissione occorre fare quanto segue:
• Controllare il livello dell’olio e le condizioni dell’olio. Vedere sezione manutenzione per dettagli.
• Controllare la trasmissione, radiatore dell’olio e linee degli scambiatori di calore dell’olio per dan-
neggiamenti o perdite. Rimediare ad ogni problema.
• Controllare che la causa del problema non sia il motore e/o il gruppo ponte.
Fare tutti i controlli di pressione alla temperatura di funzionamento normale. I manometri usati devo-
no aver un campo di misura di 0 ÷ 15 bar e devono essere precisi.
Attenzione: mai mantenere in stallo la trasmissione per più di 10 secondi con regime
motore elevato. Mettere in Folle e lasciar raffreddare la trasmissione. La mancanza di que-
sta precauzione può causare seri danni alla trasmissione.
B. Indicazioni di intervento
Durante la ricerca dei guasti inserire ogni posizione del selettore per stabilire quando si verifica-
no i problemi o i rumori. Determinare quali parti sono in movimento. Questo servirà come punto
di riferimento per individuare la causa. Utilizzare le seguenti informazioni come guida in caso di
problemi.
Convertitore
Alcuni problemi di trasmissione sono legati al convertitore. Controllare e/o sostituire il converti-
tore nei casi seguenti:
• accelerazione debole con velocità massima ridotta e surriscaldamento (velocità di stallo
normale): indica che la ruota libera dello statore si è bloccata.
• Un suono metallico proveniente dal convetitore indica un danneggiamento delle palette del
convertitore.
• Una notevole caduta della velocità di stallo indica che la ruota libera del convertitore non è in
presa.
Frizioni
Controllare e/o sostituire le frizioni qualora si verifichino i seguenti inconvenienti.
• Alta velocità di stallo. Ciò può indicare che la frizione slitta. La frizione che slitta generalmente
stride.
Nota: la frizione che slitta normalmente si surriscalda. Questo può produrre lo svergolamento dei
dischi. In caso di forte surriscaldamento i dischi possono saldarsi insieme. Questo può
causare un arresto nella trasmissione se un’altra frizione viene innestata.
• Il movimento del carrello con Marcia in Folle può indicare danneggiamento della frizione
(Svergolamento dei dischi).
122
PST2
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
6
GB A. General information
Before locating any fault, it is necessary to act as follows:
• check oil level and oil condition. For details, pls. see servicing section.
• Check transmission, oil cooler and oil cooler pipes for any damage or leak. Repair if necessary.
• Make sure that the problem is not due to the engine and/or to the axle assy.
Take all pressure readings at normal working temperature. The pressure gauges must have a range
of 0 ÷ 15 bar and must be accurate.
Warning: never stall converter for more than 10 seconds with high engine r.p.m.. Select
neutral and let transmission cool. Failure of this precaution can cause serious damage to
the transmission.
B. Problems hints
During the diagnosis, switch the selector into all positions and try to find out in which position
the problems or noises appear. Determine which parts are in motion. This will be a useful point to
determinate the cause. Use the following as a guide in case of problems.
Converter
Some transmission problems are related to the converter. Check and/or replace the converter in
the following cases:
• weak acceleration with reduced max. speed and overheating (normal stall speed): may indicate
that the one way clutch wheel is sticking.
• A metallic noise from the converter can indicate converter vane damage.
• Increased stall speed may indicate that the one way clutch is broken.
Clutches
Check and/or replace the clutches if the following abnormalties appear.
• High stall speed. This can indicate that the clutch is slipping. A slipping clutch generally
squeals.
Note: generally a slipping clutch overheats. This can cause the disks to warp. In case of over-
heating, the disks can stick together. This can stall the transmission if another clutch is
engaged.
• If the truck moves in neutral this can indicate clutch damage. Clutch plates warped.
123
PST2
FEHLERSUCHE
D A. Allgemeines
Vor der Lokalisierung eines Fehler ist folgendes erforderlich:
• Ölstand und Ölzustand prüfen. Einselheiten gemäß Abschnitt “Wartung”.
• Getriebe, Ölkühler und Verrohrung auf Beschädigung oder Leckage prüfen. Falls notwendig,
reparieren.
• Prüfen, ob Fehler durch Motor und/oder Achsbaugruppe verursacht ist.
Alle Druckprüfungen sind bei normaler Betriebstemperatur vorzunehmen. Die Manometer müs-
sen einen Meßbereich von 0 - 15 bar haben.
Achtung: Getriebe niemals mehr als 10 sec. festbremsen mit hoher Drehzahl. Mißachtung
dieser Anweisung kann schwere Schäden im Getriebe hervorrufen.
B. Schadenssuche bzw. -Behebung

Bei der Fehlersuche Wahlschalter in alle Stellungen schalten und versuchen herauszufinden, in
welcher Stellung die Probleme oder Geräusche auftreten.
Wandler
Einige Getriebeprobleme können vom Wandler verursacht werden.
• Schlechte Beschleunigung bei verringerter Höchstgeschwindigkeit und Überhitzung (normale
Festbremsdrehzahl). Dies zeigt an, daß sich bei höherer Fahrgeschwindigkeit das Leitrad nicht
löst. Der Freilauf blockiert.
• Ein metallisches Geräusch im Wandler zeigt eine Wandler-Schaufelbeschädigung an.
• Eine zu hohe Festbremsdrehzahl kann bedeuten, daß sich das in diesem Betriebsbereich nor-
malerweise feststehende Leitrad dreht. Der Leitradfreilauf hat keine Klemmwirkung mehr.
Schaltkupplungen.
Überprüfen und wenn erforderlich, austauschen. Folgendes Symptom kann einen Austausch
erforderlich machen:
• Zu hohe Festbremsdrehzahl. Dies kann anzeigen, daß die Kupplung rutscht. Schleifgeräusch.
Anmerkung: Im allgemeinen wird eine rutschende Kupplung zu heiß. Dies kann zur Vermormung
der Lamellen führen. Bei sehr starker Überhitzung können die Lamellen zusammen-
schweißen. Dies kann zu einer Blockierung des Getriebes führen, falls eine andere
Kupplung schaltet.
• Bewegt sich das Fahrzeug in Neutralstellung, so kann dies auf verschweißte Lamellen hindeu-
ten.
124
PST2
RECHERCHE DE PANNES DE FONCTIONNEMENT

6
F A. Généralites
Avant de localiser les pannes de la transmission il faut effectuer les opérations suivantes:
• Contrôler le niveau et l’état de l’huile. Reportez vous au chapitre entretien pour avoir plus de
détails.
• Contrôler la transmission, le radiateur d’huile et lignes des échangeurs de chaleur de l’huile pour les
pannes ou les pertes. Résoudre chaque problème.
• Contrôler que la cause de la panne ne soit pas imputable au moteur et/ou au groupe pont.
Faire tous les contrôles de pression à la température de fonctionnement normale. Les dispositifs de
mesure pour la pression doivent posséder une plage de mesure de 0 à 15 bar et doivent être précis.
Attention: il ne faut pas mantenir le régime max. de la transmission pendant plus de 10

seconds avec régime-moteur élevée. Mettre au Point Mort et laisser refroidir la transmis-
sion, dans le cas contraire on peut causer d’importants à la transmission.
B. Indications d’intervention
Pendant la recherche de la panne, enclencher toutes les positions du sélecteur afin de localiser les
problèmes ou des bruits anormaux. Déterminer quels sont les éléments qui sont en mouvement, ce
qui servira comme point de repère pour identifier la cause. Employez à titre indicatif les renseignements
suivants en cas de problème.
Convertisseur
Quelques problèmes de transmission sont liés au convertisseur. Contrôler et/ou remplacer le
convertisseur dans les cas suivantes:
• faible accéleration, la vitesse maximum est réduite, et surchauffe du moteur (vitesse normale).
Cet état indique que la roue libre du stator est bloquée.
• Un bruit métallique qui provient du convertisseur indique une déterioration des pales du convertis-
seur.
• Une baisse de vitesse important du régime max. indique que la roue libre du convertisseur
n’èst pas en prise.
Embrayages:
Contrôler et/ou remplacer les embrayages quand on a les inconvenients suivants:
• vitesse élévée du régime. Ceci peut indiquer que l’embrayage patine. Un embrayage qui patine
pent produire un sifflement.
Remarque: L’embrayage qui patine en général surchauffe. Ceci peut provoquer une déformation
des disques. Dans le cas de surchauffe importante, les disques peuvent se souder
entre eux. Ceci peut provoquer un blocage dans la transmission si un autre embrayage
est embrayé.
• Le mouvement du chariot au Point Mort est conséquent à une détérioration des embrayages
(déformatiotion des disques).
125
PST2
C. Diagnostica
C. Diagnosis
I Problemi Cause Rimedi

PERDITE
1. Perdite della pompa dalla guar- - Guarnizione difettosa Sostituire

nizione dell’albero d’uscita o - Cattivo allineamento Correggere
dall’albero della P.d.F. - Albero danneggiato Sostituire.
2. Perdite tra l’esterno della guar- - Sede danneggiata Applicare sigillante sul diam. ester-
nizione e la sua sede no della guarnizione sostituendola.
3. Perdite dalle guarnizioni di - Allentamento viti di unione Stringere bene le viti.

unione carter
4. Perdite dai tappi scarico olio - Danneggiamento guarnizione in Sostituire.

rame
5. Perdita d’olio non localizzabile - Perdite d’olio dal radiatore o dal Sostituire componenti del circuito
sulla trasmissione circuito di raffreddamento olio difettosi.
6. Fuoriuscita olio dallo sfiato - Livello olio alto o basso Correggere livello olio
GB Problems Causes Remedies

LEAKS
1. Pump output shaft gasket or - Faulty gasket Replace

PTO shaft leaks - Bad alignement Rectify
- Damaged shaft Replace.
2. Leaks between the outside of - Damaged seal seat in housing Change seal and apply sealant on
the gasket and its seating the outside diameter.
3. Leaks from the case sealing - Fixing screws loosened Tighten the screws.
gasket
4. Leaks from the drain plug - Copper gasket damaged Replace.
5. Not easy to locate oil leaks on - Oil leaks from the cooler or from Replace the faulty cooler or the faulty
the transmission the oil cooling circuit components of the circuit.
6. Oil leaks from the breather - High or low oil level Rectify the oil level.
126
PST2
6
C. Untersuchung
C. Diagnostic
D Probleme Ursachen Abhife

UNDICHTIGKEIT
1. Pumpenabtriebswellen dichtung - Fehlerhafte Dichtung Austauschen

oder Nebenabtriebswellendich- - Schlechte Ausrichtung Korrigieren
tung undicht - Beschädigte Welle Ersetzen.
2. Leckage zwischen äußerer - Aufnahmebohrung für Dichtung Dichtung tauschen. Dichtmasse

Dichtung und Gehäuse Gehäuse beschädigt auf den Außendurchmesser der
Dichtung aufrbingen.
3. Undichtigkeit am Zwischen- - Verbindungsschrauben lösen sich Anziehen.

gehäuse
4. Undichter Ablaß - Kupferdichtung beschädigt Austauschen.
5. Nicht leicht zu lokalisierende - Ölleckage vom Kühler oder vom Fehlerhaften Kühler oder defekte
Ölleckagen am Getriebe Ölkühlkreislauf Teile des Kreislaufs ersetzen.
6. Ölausfluß vom Entlüfter - Zu hoher Ölstand Ölstand korrigieren.
F Problemes Causes Remedes

FUITES
1. Fuite de la pompe, du joint de - Joint déféctueux Remplacer

l’arbre de sortie ou de l’arbre de - Mauvais alignement Corrigere
la prise de force - Arbre endommagé Remplacer.
2. Fuites entre l’extérieur du joint - Siège endommagé Remplacer le joint.

et son siège
3. Fuites aux joints de jonction au - Desserage des vis de jonction Bien serrer les vis.
4. Fuites aux bouchons de vidange - Joint en cuivre endommagé Remplacer.

d’huile
5. Fuite d’huile non localisée sur la - Pertes d’huile du radiateur ou du Remplacer le radiateur ou la pièce
transmission circuit de refroidissement défectueuse du circuit.
6. Sortie d’huile du reniflard - Niveau d’huile trop haut ou bas Corriger le niveau d’huile.
127
PST2
Difetti di funzionamento comuni a tutte le marce

1. Pressione olio bassa - Valvola regolatrice bloccata Pulire e lucidare la valvola
- Perdita interna Sostituire gli anelli di tenuta diffettosi
- Livello olio basso Aggiungere olio
- Pompa difettosa Sostituire la pompa
- Filtro d’aspirazione intasato Sostituire
- Comando Inching sregolato Regolare correttamente.
2. Mancanza di pressione olio - Perdita interna Sostituire le parti difettose

- Pompa danneggiata Sostituire la pompa
- Valvola regolatrice difettosa Pulire e lucidare la valvola.
3. Innesto violento - Alta pressione valvola regolatrice Pulire e lucidare

bloccata
- Minimo motore troppo alto Regolare
- Valvola modulatrice difettosa Revisionare
- Valvola antishock starata o bloccata Tarare o sostituire
- Impurità o corpi estranei nel Smontare e pulire.
distributore
4. Innesto lento - Bassa pressione alle frizioni Vedere “Pressione olio bassa”
- Minimo motore troppo basso Regolare
- Valvola modulatrice difettosa Revisionare
- Valvola antishock starata o bloccata Tarare o sostituire.
5. Alta pressione - Valvola regolatrice bloccata Pulire e lucidare.
6. Temperatura dell’olio alta - Linea di raffreddamento difettosa Sostituire le parti difettose

- Strozzatura nella linea di raffred- Rimuovere
damento
- Radiatore difettoso Sostituire
- Convertitore danneggiato Sostituire
- Livello olio alto Ripristinare livello.
7. Rumorosità con la Marcia Avanti - Cattivo allineamento del carter Allineare il gruppo del convertitore
e Retromarcia convertitore o del convertitore e il corpo
con il motore
- Ingranaggi danneggiati Sostituire
- Danneggiamento palette Sostituire convertitore.
convertitore
8. Assenza di movimento con le - Mancanza pressione Vedi “Mancanza pressione olio”

marce inserite - Albero d’ingresso rotto Sostituire
- Piatto di trascinamento converti- Sostituire
tore rotto
- Guasto all’impianto elettrico Riparare.
9. Cattivo funzionamento Inching - Valvola inceppata Riparare o sostituire.
128
PST2
Common running faults in all gears

6
1. Low oil pressure - Regulating valve sticked Clean and polish the valve
- Internal leakage Replace the faulty seal rings
- Low oil level Add oil
- Faulty pump Replace the pump
- Suction filter clogged Replace
- Misadjusted Inching control Adjust.
2. No oil pressure - Internal leakage Replace the faulty parts

- Damaged pump Replace the pump
- Damage in the regulating valve Clean and polish the valve.
3. Hard clutch engagement - Locked high pressure regulating Clean and polish
valve
- Engine idling speed too high Rectify
- Faulty modulating valve Overhaul
- Sticking or unset anti-shock valve Reset or replace
- Impurity or foreign particles in Disassemble and clean.
the distributor
4. Slow clutch engagement - Low clutch pressure See “Low oil pressure”
- Too low idling speed engine Adjust
- Faulty modulating valve Overhaul
- Sticking or unset anti-shock valve Reset or replace.
5. High pressure - Sticking regulating valve Clean and polish.
6. High oil temperature - Faulty cooling circuit Replace the faulty parts
- Choke in the cooling circuit Remove
- Faulty cooler Replace
- Damaged converter Replace
- High oil level Restore the level.
7. Noises in Forward and Reverse - Bad alignment of the converter Align the converter group and the
housing or of the converter with case
the engine
- Damaged gears Replace the damaged gears
- Damaged converter vane Replace the converter.
8. No drive when gears are - Pressure lack See “Oil pressure lack”
engaged - Broken input shaft Replace
- Broken converter drive plate Replace
- Failure of the electric system Repair.
9. Bad Inching working - Sticking valve Repair or replace.
129
PST2
Gilt für alle funktionsstörungen

1. Zu niedriger Öldruck - Regelventil blockiert Ventil reinigen
- Innere Leckage Defekte Dichtringe austauschen
- Niedriger Ölstand Öl auffüllen
- Pumpenfehler Pumpe austauschen
- Saugfilter verstopft Austauschen
- Falsch eingestellte Inchsteuerung Korrigieren.
2. Fehlender Öldruck - Innere Leckage Defekte Teile ersetzen

- Pumpenfehler Pumpe austauschen
- Verschmutztes Ventil reinigen.
3. Rupfende Kupplung - Blockierter Hauptdruck, Regelvenil Reinigen

- Defektes Modulationsventil Überholen / Ersetzen
- Blockiertes oder falsch eingestelltes Einstellen oder austauschen
Anti-Schock-Ventil
- Schmutz oder Fremdkörper im Demontieren und reinigen.
Verteiler
4. Verzögertes Einschalten der - Niedriger Kupplungsdruck Siehe “Zu niedriger Öldruck”

Kupplung - Zu niedrige Leerlaufdrehzahl Motor Korrigieren
- Defektes Modulationsventil Überholen
- Blockiertes oder falsch eingestelltes Einstellen oder austauschen
Anti-Schock-Ventil
- Schmutz im Verteiler Reinigen.
5. Zu hoher Druck - Festsitzendes Regelventil Reinigen.
6. Hohe Öltemperatur - Defekter Kühlerkreis Defekte Teile austauschen

- Drossel im Kühlkreislauf Entfernen
- Defekter Kühler Austauschen
- Beschädigter Wandler Austauschen
- Hoher Ölstand Ölstand korrigieren.
7. Geräusche im Vorwärts- und - Schlechte Ausrichtung des Wandlergruppe und Gehäuse neu
Rückwärtsgang Wandlergehäuses oder Wandlers korrekt einrichten
mit dem Motor
- Beschädigte Zahnräder Zahnräder ersetzen
- Beschädigte Wandlerschaufel Wandler ersetzen.
8. Kein Antrieb in Gängen - Fehlender Druck Siehe “Fehlender Öldruck”

- Gebrochene Antriebswelle Austauschen
- Gebrochene Membrane Austauschen
- Ausfall des Elektriksystems Reparieren.
9. Schlechtes Inchingverhalten - Blockiertes Ventil Reparieren oder ersetzen.
130
PST2
Defauts de fonctionnement pour toutes les vitesse

6
1. Pression d’huile basse - Vanne régulatrice bloquée Nettoyer et polir la vanne
- Fuite interne Remplacer les bagues de tenue
défectueuses
- Niveau d’huile bas Ajouter de l’huile
- Pompe défectueuse Remplacer la pompe
- Filtre d’aspiration ecrassée Remplacer
- Commande Inching mal reglée Regler la commande correctement.
2. Manque de pression huile - Fuite interne Remplacer les pièces défectueuses
- Pompe endommagée Remplacer la pompe
- Vanne régulatrice défectueuse Nettoyer et polir la vanne.
3. Embrayage violent - Haute pression de la vanne Nettoyer et polir
régulatrice bloquée
- Ralenti trop élevé Regler
- Vanne modulatrice défectueuse Réviser
- Vanne antichock mal calibrée ou Calibrer ou remplacer la vanne
bloquée
- Corps étrangers ou impurités Demonter et nettoyer
dans le distributeur
4. Embrayage lent - Pression basse des embrayages Voir chapitre “Pression d’huile basse”
- Ralenti trop bas Régler
- Vanne modulatrice défectueuse Réviser
- Vanne antichock mal calibrée ou Calibrer ou emplacer
bloquée
- Impurités dans le distributeur Nettoyer.
5. Pression haute - Vanne régulatrice bloquée Nettoyer et polir.
6. Température d’huile élevée - Ligne de refroidissement Remplacer les pièces
défectueuse défectueuse
- Entranglement dans la ligne de Remettre la ligne en place
refroidissement
- Radiateur défectueux Remplacer
- Convertisseur endommagé Remplacer
- Niveau d’huile trop haut Régler le niveau.
7. Bruits en Marche Avant ou arrière - Mauvais alignement du carter Aligner le groupe du convertisseur
avec le convertisseur ou du et le corps
convertisseur avec le moteur
- Engrenage endommagés Remplacer les engrenages
endommagés
- Pales du convertisseur Remplacer le convertisseur.
endommagés
8. Pas de mouvement du véhicule - Manque de pression Voir chapitre “Manque pression huile”
direction vitesses enclenchées - Arbre entrée cassé Remplacer
- Plateau d’entraînement du Remplacer
convertisseur cassé
- Panne sur l’installation électrique Reparer
9. Mauvais fonctionnement Inching -Vanne coincée Reparer ou remplacer.
131
PST2
Anomalie di funzionamento a marce innestate

Marcia Avanti e Retromarcia
Running faults with gears engaged
Forward and Reverse Gear

1. La frizione fa resistenza o non - Dischi frizione svergolati Sostituire le parti difettose
stacca (il carrello si muove in Folle) - Guasti meccanici Sostituire le parti difettose
- Assenza di gioco nel pacco Aumentare il gioco secondo speci-
frizione fiche
- Elettrovalvola inceppata Riparare o sostituire
- Selettore bloccato Pulire e lucidare
- Guasto elettrico Riparare
- Impurità o corpi estranei nel distri- Smontare e pulire.
butore
2. La frizione non si innesta (il car- - Bassa pressione Vedere “Pressione olio bassa”
rello non si muove) - Elettrovalvola inceppata Riparare o sostituire
- Guasto elettrico Riparare
- Impurità o corpi estranei nel distri- Smontare e pulire.
butore
3. Il carrello si muove debolmente - Bassa pressione Vedere “Pressione olio bassa”

o non si muove - Anelli di tenuta consumati o rotti Sostituire le parti difettose.

1. The clutch drags or does not - Warped clutch disks Replace the faulty parts
release (the truck moves at idle) - Mechanical failures Replace the faulty parts
- Absence of clearance in the Increase the clearance as per
clutch pack descriptions
- Sticking electrovalve Repair or replace
- Sticking selector Clean and polish
- Electric failure Repair
- Impurity or foreign particles in the Disassemble and clean.
distributor
2. The clutch does not engage - Low pressure See “Low oil pressure”
(the truck does not move) - Locked electrovalve Repair or replace
- Electric failure Repair
- Impurity or foreign particles in the Disassemble and clean.
distributor
3. The truck does not move or it - Low pressure See “Low oil pressure”
moves weakly - Broken or worn seal rings Replace the faulty parts.
132
PST2
6
Funktionsstörungen bei eingelegtem gang
Vorwärts- und Rückwärtsgang
Anomalies de fonctionnement avec marches mises
Marche Avant et Marche Arrière

1. Die Kupplung rupft oder löst sich - Verzogene Kupplungsscheiben Defekte Teile austauschen
nicht. Fahrzeug bewegt sich im - Mechanischer Fehler Defekte Teile austauschen
Leerlauf
- Fehlendes Spiel im Spiel gemäß Beschreibung
Kupplungspaket erhöhen
- Festsitzendes Elektroventil Reparieren oder ersetzen
- Elektrikausfall Reparieren
- Schmutz im Verteiler Demontieren und reinigen
- Blockierter Wahlschalter Reinigen.
2. Kupplung wurde beaufschlagt - Niedriger Druck Siehe “Zu niedriger Öldruck”

Fahrzeug bewegt sich nicht - Blociertes Elektroventil Reparieren oder austauschen
- Elektrikausfall Reparieren
- Schmutz im Verteiler Demontieren und reinigen.
3. Fahrzeug bewegt sich nicht - Niedriger Druck Siehe “Zu niedriger Öldruck”
oder nur wenig - Geborchene oder verschlissene Defekte Teile austauschen.
Dichtringe

1. L’embrayage resiste ou ne - Disques de l’embrayage Remplacer les pièces défectueuses
s’enclenche pas. (Le chariot endommagés
bouge au Point Mort). - Pannes mécaniques Remplacer les pièces défectueuses
- Absence de jeu dans le bloc Augementer le jeu suivant les
embrayage normes
- Electrovannes bloquée Reparer ou remplacer
- Sélecteur bloquée Nettoyer et polir
- Panne électrique Reparer
- Corps étrangers ou impuretés Demonter et nettoyer
2. L’embrayage n’embrayage pas - Pression basse Voir chapitre “Basse pression d’huile”
(le chariot ne bouge pas) - Electrovanne bloquée Reparer or remplacer
- Sélecteur bloquée Nettoyer et polir
- Panne électrique Reparare
- Corps étranger ou impuretés Demonter et nettoyer.
3. Le chariot ne bouge pas - Pression basse Voir chapitre “Basse pression d’huile”
- Bagues de tenue usées ou Remplacer les pièces défectueuses.
cassées
133
PST2
Problemi vari
Further problems

1. Rumore idraulico o ronzio di - Aria nel circuito idraulico o basso Controllare il livello olio e aggiun-
valvola livello olio gerne se manca. Far girare il moto-
re a 1200 giri al minuto per elimina-
re l’aria
2. Rumore di ingranaggi in Marcia - Denti di ingranaggi rotti, incrinati Sostituire le parti difettose
Avanti e Retromarcia o usurati
- Cuscinetti usurati o danneggiati Sostituire.
3. Presa di Forza rumorosa - Catena usurata Sostituire

- Ingranaggi rotti, incrinati o usurati Sostituire
- Cuscinetti danneggiati Sostituire.
4. Assenza di moto alla presa di - Catena rotta Sostituire.

forza

1. Hydraulic noises or valve hums - Air in the hydraulic circuit or low Check the oil level and add if failing.
oil level Make the engine run at 1200 r.p.m.
to eliminate the air.
2. Noises in Forward and Reverse - Broken, cracked or worn gear Replace the damaged parts
Gear teeth
- Worn or damaged bearings Replace.
3. Noisy P.T.O. - Worn chain Replace

- Broken, cracked or worn gears Replace
- Damaged bearings Replace.
4. P.T.O. motion absence - Broken chain Replace.
134
PST2
Sonstige probleme
Problemes divers 6
1. Hydraulik-oder Ventilgeräusche - Luft im Hydraulikkreislauf oder Entlüften und Ölstand korrigieren
niedriger Ölstand Motor mit 1200 UpM laufe lassen,
um die Luft zu beseitigen
2. Getriebegeräusche im - Gebrochene, gerissene oder Defekte Teile austauschen

Vorwärtsgang und Rückwärtsgang verschlissene Zähne
- Verschlissene oder beschädigte Austauschen.
Lager
3. Geräusche im Nebenabtrieb - Verschlissene Kette Ersetzen

(P.T.O.) - Gebrochene, gerissene oder Ersetzen
verschlissene Zahnräder
- Beschädigte Lager Ersetzen.
4. Kein Abtrieb vom Nebenabtrieb - Gebrochene Kette Ersetzen.

1. Bruit hydraulique ou - Air dans le circuit hydraulique ou Contrôler le niveau d’huile et en
bourdonnement d’une niveau d’huile trop bas ajuouter le cas échéant. Faire tourner
électrovanne le moteur à 1200 tours minute pour
éliminer l’air
2. Bruit de l’engrenage en Marche - Dents cassées, felées ou usées Remplacer les pièces défectueuses
Avant, et Marche Arrière sur l’engrenage
- Coussinets usés ou détériorés Remplacer.
3. Prise de Mouvement bruyante - Chaîne abîmée Remplacer Remplacer.

- Engrenages cassés, inclinés ou Remplacer.
abîmés
- Roulements endommagés Remplacer.
4. Absence de mise en marche à - Chaîne cassée Remplacer.

la prise de mouvement
135
PST2
Cattivo funzionamento in Folle

Bad working in idle
Schlechter leerlaufbetrieb
Mauvais fonctionnement au Point Mort

1. Trascinamento in avanti o in - Dischi della frizione svergolati o Sostituire le parti difettose
Retromarcia guasti meccanici della frizione
2. La Marcia Avanti o Retromarcia - Guasto elettrico Riparare

rimane innestata - Elettrovalvola inceppata Riparare o sostituire
- Impurità o copri estranei nel Smontare e pulire.
distributore

1. Truck moving Forward and - Warped clutch plates or clutch Replace the faulty parts
Reverse Gears at idle mechanical failure
2. The Forward and Reverse Gears - Electric fault Repair

remain engaged - Sticking electrovalve Repair or replace
- Impurities or foreign bodies in valve Dismantle and clean.

1. Fahrzeug bewegt sich im Leerlauf - Verformte Kupplungslamellen Defekte Teile ersetzen.
vorwärts und Rückwärtsgang
2. Vorwärtsgang und Rückwärtsgang - Stromausfall Reparieren

bleibt eingeschaltet - Festsitzendes Elektroventil Reparieren oder ersetzen
- Blockierter Wahlschalter Reinigen
- Verunreinigungen oder Ausbauen und reinigen.
Fremdkörper im Verteiler

1. Entraînement en Avant ou en - Disques de embrayage détériorés Remplacer les pièces défectueuses.
Marche Arrière ou pannes mécaniques de
l’embrayage
2. La Marche Avant ou Marche - Electrovanne bloquée Reparer ou remplacer

Arrière reste embrayée - Sélecteur bloqué Nettoyer et polir
- Panne électrique Reparer
- Corps étrangers ou impuretés Démonter et nettoyer.
136
PST2
Surriscaldamento della trasmissione

Transmission overheating 6
Surriscaldamento - Radiatore troppo piccolo o Tutte le linee olio esterne ed il
passaggio olio inadeguati radiatore devono permettere il libe-
ro passaggio dell’olio ed aver una
capacità di scambio adeguata
- Radiatore difettoso Sostituire
- Convertitore danneggiato Sostituire
- Livello olio non corretto Ripristinare livello
- Filtro aspirazione intasato Pulire
- Uso improprio o scorretto della Non usare la macchina in stallo
macchina prolungato
- Pressione della pompa bassa, Controllare le pressioni della
pompa usurata o danneggiata trasmissione. Ispezionare il gruppo
della pompa e verificare se le pres-
sioni sono basse. Sostituire il grup-
po della pompa se usurato o
danneggiato
- Frizioni che slittano Controllare gli anelli di tenuta e le
pressioni
- Bassa pressione Vedere “Pressione olio bassa”
- Olio emulsionato Controllare tipo di olio e livello
- Sensore di temperatura difettoso Sostituire.

Overheating - Too small cooler or oil hoses All the external oil lines and the
cooler must allow the passage of
the oil and have an adequate
exchange capacity
- Faulty cooler Replace
- Damaged converter Replace
- Low oil level Restore the level
- Obstructed suction filter Clean
- Improper use of equipment Do not use the engine in extended
stall
- Low pump pressure, pump worn Check the pressures. Inspect the
or damaged pump if pressures are low. Replace
the pump if worn or damaged
- Slipping clutches Check the seal rings and pressures
- Low pressure See “Low oil pressure”
- Emulsified oil Check the type of oil or low oil level
- Faulty temperature sensor Replace.
137
PST2
Getriebeüberhitzung
Surcharge de la transmission

Überhitzung - Zu kleiner Kühler oder Alle externen Ölleitungen und der
Verbindungsschläuche (Rohre) Kühler müssen genügend große
Querschnitte aufweisen, und der
Kühler eine genügend große
Kühlleistung
- Beschädigter Kühler Austauschen
- Beschädigter Wandler Austauschen
- Flascher Ölstand Ölstand korrigieren
- Blockierter Saugfilter Reinigen
- Falsch eingestellter Motor oder Eistellung nach Vorschrift korrigieren
zu langes Fahren im Getriebe nicht länger als 10 Sek.
Festbremspunkt festbremsen
- Niedriger Pumpendruck Drücke prüfen. Bei niedrigen Drücken,
Drücken,Pumpengruppe unter-
suchen. Verschlissene oder be-
schädigte Pumpengruppe ersetzen
- Rutschende Kupplungen Dichtringe und Druck prüfen
- Niedriger Druck Siehe “Zu niedriger Öldruck”
- Schäumendes Öl Öl nach Vorschrift tauschen
- Defekter Temperaturfühler Austauschen.

Surcharge - Radiateur trop petit ou passages Toutes les conduites d’huile
d’huile inadéquats extérieures et le radiateur doivent
permettre le libre passage d’huile
et avoir une capacité d’échange
appropriée
- Radiateur ecrassée Remplacer
- Convertisseur endommagé Remplacer
- Niveau d’huile incorrect Rectifier le niveau d’huile
- Filtre d’aspiration bouché Nettoyer
- Utilisation incorrecte du véhicule Ne pas utiliser le véhicule
- Basse pression de la pompe Contrôler la pression de la
transmission
- Pompe usée ou endommagée Contrôler le groupe de la pompe
dans le cas où les pressions sont
trop basses. Remplacer le groupe
pompe si celui-ci est usé ou
endommagé
- Embrayages qui patinent Contrôler les bagues de tenue et
les pressions
- Basse pression Voir chapitre “Basse pression de
l’huile”
- Huile “émultionée” Contrôler le type d’huile
- Sonde de température Remplacer.
défectueuse
138
PST2
7
ATTREZZI SPECIALI - DISEGNI
SPECIFIC TOOLS - DRAWINGS
SPEZIALWERKZEUG - ZEICHNUNG
OUTILS SPECIAUX - PLAN
INDICE / INDEX / INHALTSVERZEICHNIS / INDEX
Disegno Denominazione pag.

Drawing. Description page
Zeichnung Beschreibung Seite
Plan Designation pag.
4A41377/00 Attrezzatura per la scomposizione dei pacchi frizione 140

Fixture for diassembling of clutch plates 141
Werkzeug zur Demontage der Kupplungslamellen
Outillage pour démontage des packs embrayage
48A17127/00 Attrezzo per montaggio anello Q-Ring 142

Q-Ring assembling tool 143
Werkzeug für die Montage des Q-Rings
Outil pour montage bague Q-Ring
139
PST2
Attrezzatura per la scomposizione dei pacchi frizione

Fixture for diassembling of clutch plates
Werkzeug zur Demontage der Kupplungslamellen
Outillage pour démontage des packs embrayage
∅ 8 x 130
Acciaccare
Notch
Sichem
∅ 22 x 250
Saldature 3x3
Weldings
Schweinßnaht
Soudures
01
02
Barra Filettata M12 L = 240 mm

Thread Rod Attrezzo 4A41377/00
Gewindestange Tool
Barre Taraudee Werkzeug
Outil
Scala : 1:2.5
140
PST2
Attrezzo / Tool / Werkzeug / Outil 4A41377/01
=
40
=
sm 2x45
01
22
8 12 7
65
15
45
30
3x30
180
122
80
66
=
Saldature 3x3
14
Weldings
Schweinßnaht 7 30'
118
Soudures
25
Soldaduras
Scala : 1:2,5
20
sm 2x45
=
40
=
02 12
50
Saldature 3x3
Weldings sm 1
Schweinßnaht
Soudures
Soldaduras
sm 1
=
150
110
180
=
M12
Scala : 1:2,5
141
PST2
Attrezzo per montaggio anello Q-Ring

Q-Ring assembling tool
Werkzeug für die Montage des Q-Rings
Outil pour montage bague Q-Ring
3
N
3/N CACCIASPINA 1 UNI 7502 ∅5

2 BASE 1 ALLUMINIO
1 PUNZONE 1 ALLUMINIO
N.Part Denom.particolare Quant Materiale o normale Trattam. Dimens.
ELEMENTO DIS. N. 3289943-3289933-3290003
Attrezzo / Tool / Werkzeug / Outil 48A17127/00 Scala : 1:2
142 48A17127
PST2
7
∅ 140
∅ 95.2
15
85
∅ 126.2+0.1
Quantita' Mater.
*ZONA PER MARCATURA 1 ALLUMINIO
N. ATTREZZO 48A17127/1 1 N.Dis. Trattam.
3.2
DIS.ELEMENTO 328993-94
329000 -
Scala : 1:2
∅ 95
R15
15
R15
75
R15
15
7.7
∅ 54.2
∅ 123
1.6
∅ 126+0.1
Quantita' Mater.
*ZONA PER MARCATURA 1 ALLUMINIO 3.2 1.6
N. ATTREZZO 48A17127/2 2 N.Dis. Trattam.
DIS.ELEMENTO 328993-94
329000 -
Scala : 1:2
143
PST2
I I dati contenuti in questa pubblicazione potrebbero risultare non aggiornati in consequenza di

modifiche adottate dal Costruttore, in qualunque momento, per ragioni di natura tecnica o
commerciale nonché per adattamento ai requisiti di legge nei diversi Paesi.
Descrizioni e fotografie possono riferirsi ad equipaggiamenti non di serie.
GB The data in this edition may prove not to be up to date due to modification made by the manu-
facturer, which may become necessary for technical or commercial reasons, as well as meet-
ing legal requirements of various countries.
Descriptions and photos might refer to non-serial equipment.
D Die in dieser Ausgabe enthaltenen Daten mögen nicht dem neuesten Stand entsprechen,
da Änderungen aus technischen oder wirtschaftlichen Gesichtspunkten sowie gesetzlichen
Vorschriften unterschiedlicher Länder jederzeit durchgeführt werden können.
F Les données figurant dans cette publication sont forunies à titre indicatif, suite à des modifi-
cations apportées par le constructeur à n’importe quel moment, pour des raisons de genre
technique ou commercial, ainsi que pour une adaption due aux lois des différents pays.
Les descriptions et les photos peuvent se référer à des équipements hors série.
Copyright by: GRAZIANO TRASMISSIONI S.p.A.

PUBBLICAZIONI TECNICHE - D344r1- P.N. 3VT00583
MANUALE NORME DI RIPARAZIONI PST2 5ª edizione - rev. a
STAMPATO il 25-07-2006
Realization: Studio ELLETec - Torino.
GRAZIANO TRASMISSIONI
GRAZIANO TrasmissioniGROUP
S.p.A.
HEAD QUARTERS
Via Cumiana, 14
10090 CASCINE VICA-RIVOLI-TORINO (ITALY)
SALES AND AFTER SALES
MATERIAL HANDLING DRIVELINES
Tel.: +39 011 9505.011 - Fax: +39 011 9574.674
MARKETING COMPANIES
(SALES AND AFTERSALES SERVICE)
GRAZIANO TRASMISSIONI UK Ltd.
9, Harley Ind Park - Paxton Hill
St Neots - Huntingdon
Cambs PE19 4RA
England
TEL.: +44(0)1480 403453
FAX: +44(0)1480 403454
e-mail: [email protected]
GRAZIANO TRASMISSIONI North America, Inc.

2222 Northmont Parkway, Suite 300, Duluth, GA 30096
Phone: +1(0)770 476-0496 Fax: +1(0)770 623-3290
e-mail: [email protected]
ISO 9001-Cert. n°0486

AVSQ ‘94-Cert. n°0989
QS-9000-Cert. n°2053
A Saurer Group Company
144

Wsp900 TLD Aug11 Water Truck

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wsp900 TLD Aug11 Water Truck

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wsp900 TLD Aug11 Water Truck

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What information is provided about company locations and contact details?

What information is provided about company locations and contact details?

What does the document discuss regarding tools and equipment?

What does the document discuss regarding tools and equipment?

WSP-900

Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-0-01

0-0-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-0-03

0-0-04 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

0-1-TLD – SALES INFORMATIONS

DON ' T HESITATE TO CONTACT US.

Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-01

Quick Reference Address List

TLD America - Windsor

0-1-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-03

The manual has five chapters:

0-0-04 Créaion 07.16 - 2007

0-1-04 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

0-1-1-4-TLD WEBSITE ACCESS:

Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-05

Fig 5 : Spare part access

Fig 6 : Download on web site

Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-07

Fig 7 : Look for vehicle

0-1-08 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

Fig 8 : Vehicle list example

Fig 9 : Vehicle choice

Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-09

Fig 10 : Indentify a vehicle

Fig 11 : Section "Pubs and Parts"

0-1-010 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

Fig 12 : Vehicle documentation

Fig 13 : Filtered search

Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-011

Fig 14 : Download a PDF file

Fig 15 : PDF file

0-1-012 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

Fig 16 : Sparepart page

Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-013

Fig 18 : Enter the quantity

0-1-014 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-1-015

0-1-016 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

0-2-GENERAL WARRANTY CONDITIONS

Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-2-01

0-2-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

Read this entire chapter BEFORE attempting to operate this

0-3-1-2-OBLIGATION TO GO THROUGH THE USER'S MANUAL

Fig 21 : Read documentation

Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-3-01

0-3-1-4- MODIFICATIONS – ADDITIONS

0-3-02 Creation : 07.16 – 2007

PLEASE NOTE: NOTICE IS USED TO NOTIFY PEOPLE OF INSTALLATION, OPERATION, OR

READ WITH CARE: Refers to a chapter or a procedure

Creation : 07.16 - 2007 0-3-03

In operation you can find some signalization panels, advertisements, etc…

COLOR SYMBOL MEANING USING

YELLOW - Carefulness Danger advertisement